Mercedes - CL - Owners Manual - 20212 - 2012

CL Operator's Manual Symbols Registered trademarks: is a registered trademark of the Siemens Automotive Corp. RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. RESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Prince, a Johnson Controls Company. RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the USA and in other countries. RLogic 7® is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries, Incorporated. RMicrosoft® is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation in the USA and in other countries. RSIRIUS and associated brands are registered trademarks of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio and associated brands are registered trademarks of the iBiquity Digital Corporation. RWindows Media® is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation in the USA and in other countries. RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZagatSurvey® and associated brands are registered trademarks of Zagat. In this Operator's Manual, you will find the following symbols: ! These warning notes draw your attention to hazards that could cause damage to your vehicle. RBabySmart™ G WARNING Warning notes draw your attention to hazards that endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. i This symbol indicates useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. X This symbol designates an instruction you must follow. Several consecutive symbols X indicate an instruction with several steps. Y Page This symbol tells you where you can find further information on a topic. This symbol indicates a warning or YY an instruction that is continued on the next page. Display This font indicates a display message in the multifunction display/COMAND display. Parts of the software in the vehicle are subject to copyright according to © 2005 The FreeType Project http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved. Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you drive off, please familiarize yourself with your vehicle and read this manual, especially the safety and warning notes. This will help you to obtain the maximum pleasure from your vehicle and avoid endangering yourself and others. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may differ according to: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features Therefore, you cannot base any claims on the illustrations or text content in this Operator's Manual. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROperator's Manual Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. When you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company RService 2165840982 É21658409822ËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31 Introduction ......................................... 26 Safety ................................................... 39 Opening/closing ................................. 71 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 91 COMAND ............................................ 105 Lights and windshield wipers .......... 243 Climate control ................................. 255 Driving and parking .......................... 265 On-board computer and displays .... 329 Stowing and features ....................... 387 Maintenance and care ...................... 407 Breakdown assistance ..................... 423 Wheels and tires ............................... 441 Technical data ................................... 471 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 12 V socket see Sockets 4ETS see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 306 4MATIC off-road system ................... 306 A ABC see Active Body Control (ABC) ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 347 Function/notes ................................ 62 Important safety notes .................... 62 Warning lamp ................................. 380 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 258 Activating/deactivating Night View Assist Plus Without spotlight function ............. 319 With spotlight function ................... 318 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 343 Display message ............................ 369 Function/information .................... 321 Active Body Control (ABC) Display message ............................ 368 Function/notes ............................. 305 Active Driving Assistance package . 321 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 343 Display message ............................ 369 Function/information .................... 324 Active Light System Display message ............................ 361 Active multicontour seat ............ 97, 241 Active service system PLUS see ASSYST PLUS service interval display ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 66 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 304 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 362 Function/notes ............................. 248 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ...................................... 344 Additional speedometer ................... 344 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 478 Address Entering (example) ......................... 138 see Address book Address book Calling up ....................................... 189 Connecting a call ........................... 192 Creating an entry ........................... 190 Deleting an entry ........................... 191 Entering characters ....................... 122 Entry as a home address ............... 162 Importing contacts ........................ 188 Introduction ................................... 187 Starting route guidance ................. 192 Voice tag ....................................... 192 Air bags Display message ............................ 357 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 44 Important safety notes .................... 42 Knee bag .......................................... 44 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp .................................. 46 Safety guidelines ............................. 41 Side impact air bag .......................... 45 Window curtain air bag .................... 46 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Air distribution Setting ........................................... 259 Setting (COMAND) ......................... 236 Airflow Setting ........................................... 259 Setting (COMAND) ......................... 236 AIRMATIC Display message ............................ 367 Function/notes ............................. 303 Air pressure see Tire pressure Air vents Glove box ....................................... 263 Important safety notes .................. 261 Index Rear ............................................... 263 Setting ........................................... 261 Setting the center air vents ........... 262 Setting the side air vents ............... 262 Stowage compartment .................. 262 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Alertness Assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST Alternative route ............................... 155 Ambient light setting (COMAND) ..... 233 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 337 Anti-lock Braking System see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Anti-theft system ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 68 Ashtray ............................................... 393 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .......................................... 341 ASSYST PLUS see ASSYST PLUS service interval display ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 68 Function ........................................... 68 Switching off the alarm .................... 68 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 342 Display message ............................ 366 Function/notes ............................. 316 Audio Radio mode ................................... 195 Audio database see MUSIC REGISTER Audio DVD Mode, switching to ........................ 205 Pause function ............................... 207 Playback options ........................... 212 Safety notes .................................. 204 Setting the audio format ................ 211 Stop function ................................. 207 Audio format, setting Audio DVD ..................................... 211 Video DVD ..................................... 229 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 336 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... Automatic headlamp mode .............. Automatic transmission Automatic drive program ............... Changing gear ............................... DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... Display message ............................ Driving tips .................................... Emergency running mode .............. Kickdown ....................................... Manual drive program .................... Problem (malfunction) ................... Program selector button ................ Pulling away ................................... Shift ranges ................................... Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... Transmission position display ........ Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency mode ............................... Autostore ........................................... see Station memory (radio) AUX (audio) Notes/socket ................................ Switching to ................................... AUX (video) Setting the picture ......................... Setting the volume and sound ....... Showing/hiding the menu ............. Switching to ................................... 361 271 270 245 277 276 273 374 276 280 276 279 280 277 269 278 268 277 275 275 280 197 223 223 224 230 230 230 B Back button ....................................... 109 Back support see Lumbar support Bag hook ............................................ 391 Balance, adjusting ............................. 125 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 62 5 6 Index Basic settings see Settings BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) .................................................... 62 Bass, setting ...................................... 125 Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 76 Important safety notes .................... 76 Replacing ......................................... 76 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 432 Display message ............................ 364 Important safety notes .................. 430 Jump starting ................................. 433 Belt see Seat belts Bird's-eye view (navigation) ............. 168 Blind see Roller sunblind Blind Spot Assist see Active Blind Spot Assist Bluetooth® Activating/deactivating ................. 132 Authorizing a device (registering) . . 132 Conditions (general) ...................... 131 Conditions (telephone) .................. 179 Connecting another mobile phone . 181 Connecting devices ....................... 132 De-authorizing (de-registering) a device ............................................ 134 External authorization (general) ..... 133 External authorization (telephone) . 181 General information ....................... 131 Introduction ................................... 177 Receiving vCards ........................... 188 Searching for devices .................... 132 Settings ......................................... 131 Telephone basic menu ................... 182 Telephony ...................................... 179 Telephony notes ............................ 177 Bluetooth® interface Telephony ...................................... 177 Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 353 Notes ............................................. 479 Brake fluid level ................................ 413 Brake lamps Display message ............................ 360 Brakes ABS .................................................. 62 BAS .................................................. 62 BAS PLUS ........................................ 62 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 479 Display message ............................ 347 Driving tips .................................... 287 High-performance brake system .... 289 Important safety notes .................. 287 Maintenance .................................. 288 Warning lamp ................................. 379 Breakdown see Flat tire see Towing away Breakdown assistance see Mercedes-Benz Contact Brightness, setting (TV, video) ......... 224 Bulbs see Changing bulbs C California Important notice for retail customers and lessees .................... 27 Call Accepting/ending/rejecting .......... 183 see Telephone Calling up a malfunction see Display messages Calling voicemail ............................... 185 Call lists Displaying details ........................... 189 Introduction ................................... 193 Opening and selecting an entry ..... 193 Saving an entry in the address book .............................................. 194 Capacities see Technical data Car see Vehicle Care Carpets .......................................... 421 Car wash ........................................ 415 Display ........................................... 419 Index Exterior lights ................................ 418 Gear or selector lever .................... 420 Matte finish ................................... 417 Night View Assist Plus ................... 419 Notes ............................................. 414 Paint .............................................. 416 Plastic trim .................................... 419 Power washer ................................ 416 Rear view camera .......................... 418 Roof lining ...................................... 421 Seat belt ........................................ 421 Seat cover ..................................... 420 Sensors ......................................... 418 Steering wheel ............................... 420 Tail pipes ....................................... 419 Trim pieces .................................... 420 Washing by hand ........................... 415 Wheels ........................................... 416 Windows ........................................ 417 Wiper blades .................................. 418 Wooden trim .................................. 420 Cargo tie down rings ......................... 390 Car pool lanes .................................... 153 Car wash (care) ................................. 415 Category Satellite radio ................................ 202 CD Copy protection ............................. 213 Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 209 General information ....................... 213 Inserting ........................................ 204 Mode, switching to ........................ 205 Multisession .................................. 212 Notes on discs ............................... 213 Operating the player/changer (on-board computer) ...................... 337 Pause function ............................... 207 Playback options ........................... 212 Player/changer operation (COMAND) ..................................... 204 Safety notes .................................. 204 Selecting a media type .................. 208 Selecting a track ............................ 208 Sound settings (balance, bass, fader, treble) .................................. 125 Cell phone see Mobile phone Center console ..................................... 36 Central locking Automatic locking feature (COMAND) ..................................... 234 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 72 Changing bulbs High-beam headlamps ................... 251 Important safety notes .................. 250 Overview of bulb types .................. 251 Changing direction Announcement phase .................... 151 Change of direction phase ............. 151 Preparation phase ......................... 151 Character bar ..................................... 119 Characters Entering ......................................... 120 Entering (address book, phone book) ............................................. 122 Entering (navigation) ...................... 119 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 60 Children In the vehicle ................................... 55 Restraint systems ............................ 55 Child seat LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 58 Special seat belt retractor ............... 57 Top Tether ....................................... 59 Cigarette lighter ................................ 394 Climate control Automatic climate control ............. 257 COMAND ....................................... 235 Controlling automatically ............... 258 Controlling centrally (COMAND) .... 237 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 258 Cooling with air dehumidification (COMAND) ..................................... 237 Defrosting the windows ................. 260 Defrosting the windshield .............. 259 Important safety notes .................. 256 Indicator lamp ................................ 258 Main menu ..................................... 236 Maximum cooling .......................... 260 Overview of systems ...................... 256 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 258 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 260 7 8 Index Refrigerant ..................................... 479 Setting the air distribution ............. 259 Setting the airflow ......................... 259 Setting the airflow (COMAND) ....... 238 Setting the air vents ...................... 261 Setting the footwell temperature (COMAND) ..................................... 238 Setting the temperature ................ 259 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 260 Switching on/off ........................... 257 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 261 Switching the rear window heating on/off ............................... 260 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 32 see Instrument cluster Color, setting (TV, video) .................. 224 COMAND At a glance (overview) .................... 108 Back button ................................... 109 Basic functions .............................. 123 Components .................................. 108 Display ........................................... 111 Example of operation ..................... 118 Function buttons ........................... 109 Menu overview .............................. 111 Remote control .............................. 115 Switching on/off ........................... 123 System settings ............................. 127 COMAND controller ........................... 108 COMAND display Cleaning instructions ..................... 114 Folding in and swiveling ................. 114 Setting ........................................... 127 COMAND operating system .............. 108 Combination switch .......................... 246 Compass function ............................. 172 Conference connection ..................... 185 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 334 Contrast, setting (TV, video) ............ 224 Convenience closing feature .............. 87 Convenience opening feature ............ 87 Convenience telephone Importing contacts ........................ 188 Convenience telephony .................... 177 Introduction ................................... 177 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 411 Display message ............................ 362 Notes ............................................. 479 Temperature (on-board computer) . 337 Temperature gauge ........................ 330 Cooling see Climate control Copy protection (CD/DVD) ............... 213 Cornering light function Display message ............................ 359 Function/notes ............................. 248 Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... 291 Deactivating ................................... 292 Display message ............................ 372 Driving system ............................... 290 Function/notes ............................. 290 Important safety notes .................. 290 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 291 Setting a speed .............................. 292 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 291 Cup holder Center console .............................. 391 Important safety notes .................. 391 Rear compartment ......................... 392 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 29 Customer Relations Department ....... 29 D Dashboard see Cockpit Data see Technical data Data carrier MUSIC REGISTER ........................... Data medium Audio DVD ..................................... CD/DVD ........................................ MP3 ............................................... Date format, setting .......................... Day design, setting ........................... Daytime running lamp mode see Daytime running lamps 214 212 213 212 128 127 Index Daytime running lamps Display message ............................ Switching on/off (on-board computer) ...................................... Switching on/off (switch) .............. Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (COMAND) ........... Interior lighting (COMAND) ............ Destination (navigation) Displaying information ................... Entering a destination by address .. Entering a destination using the map ............................................... Entering an intermediate stop ....... Entering a point of interest ............ Saving ............................................ Selecting from the destination memory ......................................... Selecting from the list of last destinations ................................... Destination memory (navigation) Deleting an entry ........................... Entering/saving your home address .......................................... Previous destinations .................... Dialing a number (telephone) ........... Digital speedometer ......................... Digital TV see TV DIRECT SELECT lever see Automatic transmission Display Selecting the design ...................... Settings ......................................... Display (cleaning instructions) ........ Displaying the arrival time ............... Displaying the distance to the destination ......................................... Display messages Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Driving systems ............................. Engine ............................................ General notes ................................ Hiding (on-board computer) ........... Lights ............................................. Safety systems .............................. Service interval display .................. SmartKey ....................................... 361 343 245 233 233 156 138 144 145 147 163 143 143 165 141 165 184 334 127 127 419 156 156 346 366 362 346 346 359 347 413 376 Tires ............................................... 372 Vehicle ........................................... 374 Distance see Navigation, route overview Distance display (on-board computer) .......................................... 341 Distance recorder ............................. 334 see Odometer see Trip odometer Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 385 DISTRONIC PLUS Deactivating ................................... 300 Display message ............................ 370 Displays in the multifunction display ........................................... 299 Driving tips .................................... 300 Function/notes ............................. 292 Important safety notes .................. 292 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 298 Warning lamp ................................. 385 Dolby Digital ...................................... 126 Doors Automatic locking (switch) ............... 81 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 72 Control panel ................................... 38 Display message ............................ 375 Emergency locking ........................... 82 Emergency unlocking ....................... 81 Important safety notes .................... 79 Opening (from inside) ...................... 80 Power closing feature ...................... 81 Drinking and driving ......................... 286 Drinks holder see Cup holder Drive program Automatic ...................................... 277 Manual ........................................... 279 Driver's door see Doors Driver's seat see Seats Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 414 Symmetrical low beam .................. 244 9 10 Index Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 62 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 66 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 62 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) ............................................... 62 Electronic brake force distribution ... 65 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) .......................................... 64 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ........................................... 64 Important safety information ........... 61 Overview .......................................... 61 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 66 Driving systems Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 321 Active Body Control ....................... 305 Active Driving Assistance package ......................................... 321 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 324 AIRMATIC ...................................... 303 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 316 Cruise control ................................ 290 Display message ............................ 366 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 292 HOLD function ............................... 302 Night View Assist Plus ................... 317 Parking Guidance ........................... 310 PARKTRONIC ................................. 306 Rear view camera .......................... 314 Spotlight function .......................... 317 Driving tips Automatic transmission ................. 276 Brakes ........................................... 287 Break-in period .............................. 266 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 300 Downhill gradient ........................... 287 Drinking and driving ....................... 286 Driving abroad ............................... 244 Driving in winter ............................. 290 Driving on flooded roads ................ 289 Driving on wet roads ...................... 289 Exhaust check ............................... 287 Fuel ................................................ 286 General .......................................... 286 Hydroplaning ................................. 289 Icy road surfaces ........................... 290 Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ................................... Pedals ............................................ Snow chains .................................. Symmetrical low beam .................. Wet road surface ........................... DVD Changer ......................................... Copy protection ............................. Fast forward/fast rewind ............... Handling ........................................ Inserting ........................................ Notes on discs ............................... Selecting a media type .................. Selecting a track ............................ Sound settings (balance, bass, fader, treble) .................................. DVD audio Operation using the on-board computer ....................................... 288 286 445 244 287 204 213 209 173 204 213 208 208 125 337 E EASY-ENTRY feature Activating (COMAND) .................... 232 Function/notes ................................ 99 EASY-EXIT feature Activating (COMAND) .................... 232 Crash-responsive ........................... 100 Function/notes ................................ 99 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 349 Function/notes ................................ 65 ECO function ...................................... 231 ECO start/stop function Deactivating/activating ................. 271 General information ....................... 270 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electronic brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Electronic Traction System see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Index Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 81 Trunk ............................................... 85 Vehicle ............................................. 81 Emergency spare wheel Storage location ............................ 424 Emergency Tensioning Devices Function ........................................... 55 Safety guidelines ............................. 41 Emissions purification Service and warranty information .... 26 Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 384 Display message ............................ 362 ECO start/stop function ................ 270 Emergency starting ........................ 437 Engine number ............................... 474 Irregular running ............................ 272 Starting problems .......................... 272 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 268 Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 269 Switching off .................................. 283 Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ................... 272 Engine emergency stop .................... 439 Engine oil Adding ........................................... 410 Additives ........................................ 478 Checking the oil level ..................... 409 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 409 Checking the oil level using the on-board computer ........................ 410 Display message ............................ 364 Filling capacity ............................... 476 Notes about oil grades ................... 478 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 409 Temperature (on-board computer) . 337 Viscosity ........................................ 478 Entering the frequency ..................... 196 Entry Deleting ......................................... 121 Saving ............................................ 123 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Deactivating/activating ................. 342 Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 64 Display message ............................ 347 ETS/4ETS ........................................ 64 Function/notes ................................ 64 Important safety information ........... 64 Warning lamp ................................. 381 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ................................................ 64 Exhaust check ................................... 287 Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 419 Exterior lighting see Exterior lighting Exterior mirror parking position Adjusting (COMAND) ..................... 232 Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 100 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 101 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 101 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 101 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 101 Storing settings (memory function) ........................................ 102 Storing the parking position .......... 101 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 389 F Factory setting (reset function) ....... Fader, setting .................................... Fast forward Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... Video DVD ..................................... Fast rewind Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... Video DVD ..................................... Favorites (COMAND) ......................... Filler cap see Fuel filler flap First-aid kit ......................................... Flat tire Changing a wheel/mounting the spare wheel ................................... MOExtended run-flat system ......... 134 125 209 226 209 226 109 424 425 429 11 12 Index Preparing the vehicle ..................... 425 Raising the vehicle ......................... 426 Floormat ............................................. 405 Freeway information ......................... 171 Front fog lamps ................................. 246 Display message ............................ 360 Switching on/off ........................... 246 Front-passenger seat Adjusting from the driver's seat ....... 94 Front windshield see Windshield Fuel Additives ........................................ 477 Displaying the current consumption .................................. 334 Displaying the range ...................... 334 Driving tips .................................... 286 Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Important safety notes .................. 477 Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 477 Problem (malfunction) ................... 283 Refueling ........................................ 280 Specifications ................................ 477 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 476 Fuel filler flap, opening/closing ....... 281 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 334 Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 476 Problem (malfunction) ................... 283 Function buttons (COMAND) ............ 109 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 438 Before changing ............................. 438 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 438 Engine emergency stop ................. 439 Fuse box in the engine compartment ................................. 439 Fuse box in the rear compartment . 438 Important safety notes .................. 437 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 405 Notes ............................................. 402 Opening/closing the garage door .. Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... Gasoline ............................................. Gear indicator (on-board computer) .......................................... Gear or selector lever (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Glove box ........................................... GPS reception .................................... Gracenote Media Database .............. 405 403 281 337 420 472 388 135 210 H Handbrake see Parking brake Harman/kardon® Logic 7® surround sound system see Surround sound (harman/ kardon® surround sound system) Hazard warning lamps ...................... 247 HD Radio™ ......................................... 199 Heading up (navigation) ................... 168 Headlamp cleaning system Notes ............................................. 480 Headlamps Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 412 Cleaning system (function) ............ 246 Fogging up ..................................... 249 see Automatic headlamp mode Head restraints Adjusting ......................................... 95 Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 95 Adjusting (rear) ................................ 95 Heating see Climate control High-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. 251 Display message ............................ 360 Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off ................................. 248 Switching on/off ........................... 247 Hill start assist .................................. 269 HOLD function Display message ............................ 368 Function/notes ............................. 302 Index Home see Home address Home address Entering and saving ....................... Selecting from the destination memory ......................................... Hood Closing ........................................... Display message ............................ Opening ......................................... Hydroplaning ..................................... J 141 143 409 375 408 289 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 68 Incident (traffic report) ..................... 158 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 33 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster lighting Interface (USB, iPod®) see Media Interface Interior lighting Ambient light (COMAND) ............... 233 Automatic control .......................... 250 Interior lighting .............................. 233 Manual control ............................... 250 Overview ........................................ 249 Reading lamp ................................. 249 see Interior lighting Intermediate stop Deleting ......................................... 146 Entering ......................................... 145 iPod® Alphabetical track selection .......... 221 Connecting to the Media Interface ........................................ 218 Selecting a category/playlist ......... 220 Supported variants ........................ 217 Jack Storage location ............................ 424 Using ............................................. 426 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 433 K Key see SmartKey KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing feature ............ 88 Locking ............................................ 73 Start/Stop button .......................... 267 Starting the engine ........................ 269 Unlocking ......................................... 73 Key positions KEYLESS-GO .................................. 267 SmartKey ....................................... 267 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 276 Manual drive program .................... 279 Knee bag .............................................. 44 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane detection (automatic) see Lane Keeping Assist Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 338 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ 58 Letter bar see Character bar License plate lamp (display message) ............................................ 360 Lighting see Lights Lights Automatic headlamp mode ............ 245 Cornering light function ................. 248 Display message ............................ 359 Driving abroad ............................... 244 Fog lamps ...................................... 246 Hazard warning lamps ................... 247 High beam flasher .......................... 247 High-beam headlamps ................... 247 13 14 Index Light switch ................................... 244 Low-beam headlamps .................... 245 Parking lamps ................................ 244 Rear fog lamp ................................ 246 Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off ................................. 344 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) ...................................... 343 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (switch) .................... 245 Turn signals ................................... 246 see Changing bulbs see Interior lighting Light sensor (display message) ....... 361 LIM indicator lamp Cruise control ................................ 291 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 295 Loading guidelines ............................ 388 Locator lighting setting (COMAND) . 234 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 81 Emergency locking ........................... 82 From inside (central locking button) ............................................. 80 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 344 Logic 7® (Harman Kardon® surround sound system) see 3D sound (Harman Kardon® surround sound system) Low-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 359 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ................................. 244 Switching on/off ........................... 245 Lubricant additives see Additives Lumbar support Adjusting ......................................... 97 Lumbar support (COMAND) .............. 238 M M+S tires ............................................ 444 Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS service interval display Malfunction message see Display messages Malfunctions relevant to safety Reporting ......................................... 29 Map (navigation) Adjusting the scale ........................ 166 Arrival time/distance to the destination ..................................... 169 City model ..................................... 170 Display ........................................... 168 Geo-coordinate display .................. 170 Heading ......................................... 168 Information in the display .............. 169 Map settings .................................. 166 Moving ........................................... 167 North orientation ........................... 168 Notes ............................................. 166 Point of interest symbols ............... 168 Road display .................................. 169 Saving the crosshair position ......... 167 Setting to the vehicle destination . . 167 Topographical map ........................ 170 Map display (also see navigation) Traffic reports ................................ 158 Massage function (PULSE) ............... 241 Matte finish (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 417 mbrace Automatic retrieval of vehicle data (service due date) .......................... 401 Call priority .................................... 399 Display message ............................ 354 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 399 Emergency call .............................. 396 Important safety notes .................. 395 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 402 MB info call button ........................ 398 Remote vehicle locking .................. 401 Roadside Assistance button .......... 397 Search & Send ............................... 400 Self-test ......................................... 396 Index System .......................................... 395 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 401 Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 75 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 81 Media Interface Active partition .............................. 222 Alphabetical track selection .......... 221 Connecting an external audio source ............................................ 218 Connection options ....................... 217 iPod® ............................................. 217 Mode ............................................. 217 Notes on USB devices ................... 222 Playback options ........................... 222 Selecting categories ...................... 220 Selecting folders ............................ 220 Selecting music files ...................... 220 Selecting playlists .......................... 220 Switching to ................................... 218 USB mass storage device .............. 217 Media list Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 208 Video DVD ..................................... 226 Memory card (audio) ......................... 337 Memory function ............................... 102 Menu item Selecting ........................................ 116 Message memory (on-board computer) .......................................... 346 Messages see Display messages Microphone, switching on/off ......... 185 Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror Mobile phone Menu (on-board computer) ............ 340 Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 75 MOExtended run-flat system ........... 429 MP3 Bit/sampling rates ......................... 213 Copyright ....................................... 213 Data medium ................................. 212 Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 209 File systems ................................... 212 Formats ......................................... 213 Mode, switching to ........................ 205 Notes ............................................. 212 Operating ....................................... 337 Pause function ............................... 207 Playback options ........................... 212 Safety notes .................................. 204 Selecting a media type .................. 208 Selecting a track ............................ 208 Sound settings (balance, bass, fader, treble) .................................. 125 Multicontour seat Front .............................................. 239 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 332 Lane recommendations ................. 153 Multifunction steering wheel Adjusting the volume ..................... 124 Operating the on-board computer . 331 Overview .......................................... 35 Using the telephone ....................... 183 Multisession CD ................................ 212 Music files Recording ...................................... 210 Music Register Copying music data ....................... 214 MUSIC REGISTER Deleting all music files ................... 216 Deleting individual music files ....... 217 Disk space information .................. 216 Folder functions ............................. 216 General notes ................................ 214 Playback options ........................... 217 Switching to ................................... 214 Music search ..................................... 209 Music storage see MUSIC REGISTER Mute ................................................... 124 N Navigation Adjusting the volume of the navigation announcements ............ 124 Alternative route ............................ 155 Basic settings ................................ 136 15 16 Index Blocking a route section affected by a traffic jam ............................... Compass function .......................... Destination memory ...................... Displaying destination information (arrival time, distance to destination) ............................... Entering/saving your home address .......................................... Entering a destination .................... Entering a destination by address .. Entering a destination using the map ............................................... Entering an intermediate stop ....... Entering a point of interest ............ Entering characters (character bar) ................................................ Freeway information ...................... General notes ................................ GPS reception ................................ Installing map software .................. Lane recommendation ................... Off-road/off-map (off-road destination) .................................... On-board computer ....................... Previous destinations .................... Repeating announcements ............ Route guidance .............................. Route overview .............................. Safety notes .................................. Selecting a destination from the destination memory ....................... Selecting a destination from the list of last destinations ................... Selecting your home address ........ Setting route options (avoiding: highways, toll roads, tunnels, ferries) ........................................... Setting the route type (short route, fast route, dynamic route or economic route) ............................ Showing/hiding the menu ............. Starting route calculation .............. Switching announcements on/off . Switching to ................................... 155 172 162 156 141 137 138 144 145 147 119 171 135 135 172 152 157 335 165 154 150 156 135 143 143 143 136 136 136 140 154 136 Traffic report .................................. Troubleshooting ............................. Night View Assist Plus Cleaning ......................................... Display message ............................ Function/notes ............................. Problem (malfunction) ................... North orientation (navigation) ......... Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ................................................ Number keypad ................................. 158 176 419 366 317 321 168 266 119 O Occupant Classification System (OCS) Faults ............................................... 50 Operation ......................................... 46 System self-test ............................... 49 Occupant safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 55 System overview .............................. 40 Octane number (fuel) ........................ 477 Odometer ........................................... 334 see Trip odometer Off-road .............................................. 157 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 337 Assistance menu ........................... 341 Audio menu ................................... 336 Displaying a service message ........ 414 Display messages .......................... 346 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 299 Important safety notes .................. 330 Menu overview .............................. 333 Message memory .......................... 346 Navigation menu ............................ 335 Operating video DVD ..................... 337 Operation ....................................... 331 RACETIMER ................................... 338 Service menu ................................. 343 Settings menu ............................... 343 Standard display ............................ 334 Telephone menu ............................ 340 Trip menu ...................................... 334 Index Opening height restriction for trunk lid .............................................. 235 Operating system see On-board computer Outside lighting Delayed switch-off (COMAND) ....... 233 Outside temperature display ........... 331 Overhead control panel ...................... 37 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 60 Own address (navigation) see Home address P Paint code number ............................ 473 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 416 Panic alarm .......................................... 60 Parcel net ........................................... 390 Parking ............................................... 283 Important safety notes .................. 283 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 101 Rear view camera .......................... 314 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Parking Guidance ........................... 310 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 350 Electric parking brake .................... 284 Parking Guidance Display message ............................ 370 Important safety notes .................. 310 Parking position Exterior mirrors (COMAND) ........... 232 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 308 Driving system ............................... 306 Function/notes ............................. 306 Problem (malfunction) ................... 310 Range of the sensors ..................... 307 Warning display ............................. 308 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp ...................................................... 46 Pause function Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 207 Video DVD ..................................... 227 Pedals ................................................. 286 Permanent four-wheel drive see 4MATIC (permanent fourwheel drive) Phone book Calling up ....................................... 189 Creating an entry ........................... 190 Deleting an entry ........................... 191 Entering characters ....................... 122 Introduction ................................... 187 Picture settings (TV, video) .............. 224 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 419 Playback options Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 212 Point of interest (navigation) Assigning a category ...................... 148 Entering ......................................... 147 Entering a point of interest using the map ......................................... 150 List ................................................. 148 ZAGAT® survey service .................. 149 Power closing feature ......................... 81 Power washers .................................. 416 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (Preventive occupant safety system) Display message ............................ 354 Operation ......................................... 51 PRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) Display message ............................ 355 Function/notes ................................ 66 Switching on/off ........................... 342 Warning lamp ................................. 385 Preventive occupant safety system see PRE-SAFE® (Preventive occupant safety system) Previous destinations (navigation) .. 165 Product information ............................ 26 Programmable button ....................... 109 Program selector button .................. 277 17 18 Index Pulling away (automatic transmission) ..................................... 269 PULSE see Massage function (PULSE) Q Qualified specialist workshop ........... 29 R RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 338 Radar sensor system Activating/deactivating ................. 344 Display message ............................ 369 Radio HD Radio™ .................................... 199 Selecting a station ................. 196, 336 Sound settings (balance, bass, fader, treble) .................................. 125 Storing stations ............................. 197 Switching on .................................. 195 Switching wavebands .................... 196 Radio-controlled devices (installing) .......................................... 406 Read-aloud function .......................... 158 Reading lamp ..................................... 249 Real-time traffic reports ................... 158 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 263 Rear fog lamp Display message ............................ 360 Switching on/off ........................... 246 Rear view camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 418 Function/notes ............................. 314 Rear-view mirror ............................... 101 Rear window blind ............................ 393 see Rear window roller sunblind see Roller sunblind Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................... 260 Rear window heating Switching on/off ........................... 260 Redialing (telephone) ........................ 184 Refueling Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Important safety notes .................. 280 Refueling process .......................... 281 see Fuel Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 402 Reporting Malfunctions relevant to safety ........ 29 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 365 Warning lamp ................................. 384 see Fuel Reset function ................................... 134 Resetting (factory settings) ............. 134 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 261 Restraint system see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Reversing lamps (display message) ............................................ 361 Road map see Map Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 27 Roller sunblind Rear window .................................. 393 Rear window (COMAND) ................ 231 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 421 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 480 Route see Route guidance (navigation) Route (navigation) Displaying the distance to the destination ..................................... 156 Route overview .............................. 156 Selecting an alternative route ........ 155 Setting route options (avoiding: highways, toll roads, tunnels, ferries) ........................................... 136 Setting the route type (short route, fast route, dynamic route or economic route) ............................ 136 Starting calculation ........................ 140 Route guidance Canceling ....................................... 153 Continuing ..................................... 153 Index Destination reached ...................... Lane recommendations ................. Off-road ......................................... Traffic reports ................................ Route guidance (navigation) ............ Route guidance (on-board computer) .......................................... Route information see Dynamic route guidance/TMC 154 152 157 158 335 335 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 55 Child restraint systems .................... 55 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 46 Overview of occupant safety systems ........................................... 40 Safety notes Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ..... 204 Operating safety ............................ 106 Video DVD mode ........................... 224 Safety systems see Driving safety systems SatRadio ............................................. 200 Displaying information ................... 204 Registering .................................... 201 Selecting a category ...................... 202 Screen see Display SD memory card Loading .......................................... 205 Seat belts Automatic comfort-fit feature .......... 55 Belt force limiters ............................ 55 Cleaning ......................................... 421 Correct usage .................................. 52 Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 55 Fastening ......................................... 53 Important safety guidelines ............. 51 Releasing ......................................... 54 Safety guidelines ............................. 41 Special seat belt retractor ............... 57 Warning lamp ................................. 378 Warning lamp (function) ................... 54 Seats Active multicontour seat .......... 97, 241 Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 94 Adjusting lumbar support ................ 97 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 95 Cleaning the cover ......................... 420 Correct driver's seat position ........... 92 Folding the backrests forward/ back ................................................. 96 Important safety notes .................... 93 Multicontour seat ............................ 97 Seat backrest display message ..... 375 Seat heating problem ...................... 98 Seat ventilation problem .................. 98 Selecting (COMAND) ..................... 239 Storing settings (memory function) ........................................ 102 Switching seat heating on/off ......... 97 Switching seat ventilation on/off .... 98 Selecting stations (radio) Using station presets ..................... 196 Using station search ...................... 196 Sending DTMF tones ......................... 187 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 418 Service see ASSYST PLUS service interval display Service interval display Displaying service messages ......... 414 Hiding service messages ............... 414 Notes ............................................. 414 Service messages .......................... 413 Service menu (on-board computer) . 343 Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 479 Capacities ...................................... 476 Coolant (engine) ............................ 479 Engine oil ....................................... 478 Fuel ................................................ 477 Important safety notes .................. 475 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) .......................................... 479 Washer fluid ................................... 480 Setting a station (radio) Via manual frequency entry ........... 196 Settings Display ........................................... 127 Menu overview .............................. 111 19 20 Index On-board computer ....................... 343 Picture (COMAND) ......................... 224 Sound settings ............................... 125 System settings ............................. 127 Setting the language COMAND ....................................... 134 Setting the night design ................... 127 Setting the text reader speed .......... 129 Setting the vehicle level ................... 305 Setting the volume Telephone calls .............................. 124 Video AUX ..................................... 230 Side impact air bag ............................. 45 Side marker lamp (display message) ............................................ 361 Side windows Convenience closing feature ............ 87 Convenience opening feature .......... 87 Important safety information ........... 86 Opening/closing .............................. 86 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 88 Resetting ......................................... 88 Sliding sunroof Important safety notes .................... 89 Opening/closing .............................. 89 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 90 Resetting ......................................... 90 SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 76 Changing the programming ............. 75 Checking the battery ....................... 76 Convenience closing feature ............ 87 Convenience opening feature .......... 87 Display message ............................ 376 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 72 Important safety notes .................... 72 Loss ................................................. 78 Mechanical key ................................ 75 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 267 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 78 Starting the engine ........................ 268 SMS message see Text message Snow chains ...................................... 445 Socket Glove box ....................................... 395 Sockets Points to observe before use ......... 394 Trunk ............................................. 395 Sound menu ....................................... 125 Sounds see Sound settings Sound settings Balance and fader .......................... 125 Calling up the sound menu ............ 125 Surround sound ............................. 126 Treble and bass ............................. 125 Spare wheel Notes/data .................................... 468 Storage location ............................ 424 see Emergency spare wheel Specialist workshop ............................ 29 Speech control see Voice Control System Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speed Limit Assist see Speed Limit Assist Speedometer Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ................. 344 Digital ............................................ 334 In the Instrument cluster ................. 33 Selecting the unit of measurement ................................ 344 see Instrument cluster SPLITVIEW ......................................... 112 Spotlight function ............................. 317 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Display message ............................ 355 Introduction ..................................... 40 Warning lamp ................................. 383 Warning lamp (function) ................... 40 Standing lamps Display message ............................ 360 Switching on/off ........................... 244 Starting (engine) ................................ 268 Station memory ................................. 197 Steering (display message) .............. 376 Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98 Button overview ............................... 35 Index Buttons (on-board computer) ...................................... 331 Important safety notes .................... 98 Paddle shifters ............................... 277 Steering wheel heating .................... 99 Storing settings (memory function) ........................................ 102 Steering wheel (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 420 Steering wheel heating Switching on/off .............................. 99 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 277 Stop function Audio DVD ..................................... 207 Video DVD ..................................... 227 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 338 Storing stations Manually ........................................ 197 Storing stations (radio) Automatically ................................. 197 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 389 Cup holders ................................... 391 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 389 Glove box ....................................... 388 Important safety information ......... 388 Parcel net ...................................... 390 Rear ............................................... 389 Rear seat backrest ......................... 390 Rear seats (between) ..................... 390 Stowage well beneath the trunk floor .................................................... 391 Summer opening see Convenience opening feature Summer tires ..................................... 444 Sun visor ............................................ 392 Supplemental Restraint System see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Surround sound see 3D sound (Harman Kardon® surround sound system) Surround sound (harman/ kardon® surround sound system) Notes ............................................. 126 Switching on/off ........................... 126 Suspension tuning Active Body Control ....................... 305 AIRMATIC ...................................... 304 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. 260 Switching between picture formats (TV, video) ............................ 224 Switching between summer time and standard time ............................. 129 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 68 Switching the hands-free microphone on/off ............................ 185 Switching wavebands (radio) ........... 196 System settings Bluetooth® ..................................... 131 Date ............................................... 128 Language ....................................... 134 Programmable button (COMAND) .. 109 Text reader speed .......................... 129 Time ............................................... 128 Time zone ...................................... 129 Voice Control System .................... 129 T TA (Traffic Announcements) see Traffic announcements Tachometer ........................................ 331 Tail lamps Display message ............................ 360 Tank see Fuel tank Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Technical data Notes ............................................. 472 Tires/wheels ................................. 466 Vehicle data ................................... 480 TELEAID Automatic retrieval of vehicle data (service due date) .......................... 401 Call priority .................................... 399 Display message ............................ 354 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 399 Emergency call .............................. 396 Important safety notes .................. 395 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 402 21 22 Index MB info call button ........................ 398 Remote vehicle locking .................. 401 Roadside Assistance button .......... 397 Search & Send ............................... 400 Self-test ......................................... 396 System .......................................... 395 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 401 Telephone Accepting/ending a call ................ 183 Accepting a call ............................. 340 Adjusting the volume for calls ....... 124 Basic menu (Bluetooth® interface) ....................................... 182 Calling (outgoing call) .................... 184 Calling voicemail ............................ 185 Conference connection .................. 185 Connecting a mobile phone (general information) ..................... 179 De-authorizing a mobile phone ...... 182 Ending an active call ...................... 185 Entering a number ......................... 184 External authorization (Bluetooth®) ................................... 181 Function restrictions ...................... 178 General notes ................................ 177 Keypad ........................................... 110 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 340 Number from the phone book ........ 341 Operating options .......................... 178 Overview of functions .................... 185 Reception and transmission volume ........................................... 183 Redialing ................................ 184, 341 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 340 Rejecting a call .............................. 183 Rejecting or accepting a waiting call ................................................. 185 Safety notes .................................. 177 Sending DTMF tones ...................... 187 Switching hands-free microphone on/off ............................................ 185 Toggling ......................................... 185 Using the telephone ....................... 183 see Bluetooth® see Call lists Television see TV Temperature Coolant .......................................... 330 Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 337 Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 337 Outside temperature ...................... 331 Setting (climate control) ................ 259 Setting (COMAND) ......................... 235 Theft deterrent locking system Immobilizer ...................................... 68 Tilt/sliding sunroof see Sliding sunroof Time Setting summer/standard time ..... 129 Setting the format ......................... 128 Setting the time ............................. 128 Setting the time/date format ........ 128 Setting the time zone ..................... 129 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 338 Tiredness assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 449 Checking manually ........................ 449 Display message ............................ 372 Maximum ....................................... 448 Notes ............................................. 447 Recommended ............................... 445 Tire pressure monitoring system Function/notes ............................. 449 Restarting ...................................... 451 Warning lamp ................................. 385 Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 464 Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... 463 Bar (definition) ............................... 462 Characteristics .............................. 462 Checking ........................................ 443 Definition of terms ......................... 462 Direction of rotation ...................... 466 Display message ............................ 372 Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... 465 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... 461 DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) ............ 462 Index GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ..................................... GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) ......................... Important safety notes .................. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... Labeling (overview) ........................ Load bearing index (definition) ...... Load index ..................................... Load index (definition) ................... Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... Maximum load on a tire (definition) ..................................... Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ....................... Maximum tire load ......................... Maximum tire load (definition) ....... Optional equipment weight (definition) ..................................... PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ..................................... Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Sidewall (definition) ....................... Speed rating (definition) ................ Storing ........................................... Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... Temperature .................................. TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... Tire bead (definition) ...................... Tire pressure (definition) ................ Tire pressures (recommended) ...... Tire size (data) ............................... Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... Tire tread ....................................... Tire tread (definition) ..................... Total load limit (definition) ............. Traction ......................................... Traction (definition) ....................... Tread wear ..................................... 463 463 463 442 463 464 458 465 461 464 463 464 464 456 464 464 464 465 443 464 463 466 462 458 465 464 464 463 466 459 443 464 465 457 465 457 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... 457 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 463 Unladen weight (definition) ............ 464 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 465 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 463 see Flat tire Tonal properties see Sound settings Top Tether ............................................ 59 Towing Important safety guidelines ........... 435 Installing the towing eye ................ 435 Removing the towing eye ............... 436 With the rear axle raised ................ 436 Towing away With both axles on the ground ....... 436 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 437 Important safety notes .................. 435 Track Selecting (CD, DVD, MP3) .............. 208 Traffic Announcements (TA) Switching off .................................. 124 Traffic jam function ........................... 155 Traffic jam message see Dynamic route guidance/TMC Traffic reports Real-time traffic report .................. 161 Switching on/off ........................... 158 Transmission see Automatic transmission Transporting the vehicle .................. 437 Treble, adjusting (sound) .................. 125 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 420 Trip computer (on-board computer) .......................................... 334 Trip meter see Trip odometer Trip odometer Calling up ....................................... 334 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 335 Trunk Emergency release .......................... 85 Important safety guidelines ............. 82 Limiting the opening angle ............. 235 23 24 Index Locking separately ........................... 85 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 84 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 83 Trunk lid Display message ............................ 375 Opening/closing .............................. 82 Power closing feature ...................... 81 Trunk lid opening height restriction .......................................... 235 Turn signals Display message ............................ 359 Switching on/off ........................... 246 TV Automatic picture shutoff .............. 224 Picture settings .............................. 224 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 81 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 80 USB see Media Interface V Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 392 Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 29 Data acquisition ............................... 30 Display message ............................ 374 Equipment ....................................... 26 Individual settings .......................... 343 Limited Warranty ............................. 30 Loading .......................................... 452 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 82 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 73 Lowering ........................................ 429 Maintenance .................................... 27 Parking for a long period ................ 285 Pulling away ................................... 269 Raising ........................................... 426 Reporting problems ......................... 29 Towing away .................................. 435 Transporting .................................. 437 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 81 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 73 Vehicle data ................................... 480 Vehicle battery see Battery (vehicle) Vehicle data ....................................... 480 see Technical data Vehicle dimensions ........................... 480 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 82 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 473 Vehicle level Active Body Control (ABC) ............. 305 AIRMATIC ...................................... 303 Display message ............................ 368 Vehicle level (display message) ....... 367 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 424 Video see Video DVD Video AUX Setting the picture ......................... 224 Video DVD Automatic picture shutoff .............. 224 DVD menu ..................................... 228 Fast forward/rewind ...................... 226 Function restrictions ...................... 225 Interactive content ........................ 229 Notes on discs ............................... 224 Operation ....................................... 224 Operation using the on-board computer ....................................... 337 Pause function ............................... 227 Playing conditions .......................... 225 Safety notes .................................. 224 Selecting ........................................ 226 Selecting a film/title ...................... 227 Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 227 Setting the audio format ................ 229 Setting the language ...................... 229 Setting the picture ......................... 224 Showing/hiding the control menu . 225 Showing/hiding the menu ............. 226 Stop function ................................. 227 Subtitles ........................................ 229 Switching to ................................... 225 Index VIN ...................................................... Voice Control System Settings ......................................... Volume, adjusting COMAND ....................................... Navigation messages ..................... 473 129 124 124 W Waiting call ........................................ 185 Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 380 Brakes ........................................... 379 Check Engine ................................. 384 Cruise control ................................ 291 Distance warning ........................... 385 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 385 ESP® .............................................. 381 ESP® OFF ....................................... 382 Fuel tank ........................................ 384 LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 295 Overview .......................................... 34 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp .................................. 46 Reserve fuel ................................... 384 Seat belt ........................................ 378 SRS ................................................ 383 Tire pressure monitor .................... 385 Warranty ............................................ 473 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 376 see Windshield washer system Weather Band Searching for a channel ................. 198 Switching on .................................. 198 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 429 Wheel chock ...................................... 426 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 425 Checking ........................................ 443 Cleaning ......................................... 416 Important safety notes .................. 442 Interchanging/changing ................ 465 Mounting a wheel .......................... 428 Removing a wheel .......................... 428 Storing ........................................... 466 Tightening torque ........................... 429 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 466 Window curtain air bag Display message ............................ 356 Operation ......................................... 46 Windows Cleaning ......................................... 417 see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 259 Infrared reflective .......................... 406 Windshield washer system .............. 412 Notes ............................................. 480 Windshield wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 253 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 252 Switching on/off ........................... 251 Winter driving Important safety notes .................. 444 Slippery road surfaces ................... 290 Snow chains .................................. 445 Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... 444 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 418 Important safety notes .................. 252 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 420 25 26 Introduction Product information Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion parts and accessories that have been approved for the type of vehicle. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well as conversion parts and accessories which have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been independently or officially approved. The use of non-approved parts could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-Benz therefore recommends that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion parts and accessories that have been approved for the type of vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approved conversion parts and accessories are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Here, you will receive advice about permissible technical modifications, and the parts will be professionally installed. Operator's Manual Notes on the Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual contains a great deal of helpful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this Operator's Manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Vehicle equipment This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. All the systems found in your vehicle are listed in the original purchase agreement of your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operating Instructions and the Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Service and vehicle operation Service and literature Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty Systems Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws) REmission Introduction Information for customers in California Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles (approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair. (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its repair. (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Maintenance The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals. Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Change of Address Notice" found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. 27 28 Introduction If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Rservice facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Operating safety Safety notes G WARNING Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle's electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components. Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle. Some safety systems only function when the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving. G WARNING Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. Such blows can be caused, for example, by running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred: Rturn on your hazard warning flashers. down carefully. Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/ wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs. Rslow Introduction Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the service booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Rservice Proper use G WARNING There are various warning stickers affixed to your vehicle. Their purpose is to alert you and others to various dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warning stickers unless the sticker clearly states that you may do so. If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers and be injured. The proper use of the vehicle requires that you familiarize yourself with the following information and rules: Rsafety notes in this Operator's Manual data in this Operator's Manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Rtechnical Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting malfunctions relevant to safety For the USA only: The following text is reproduced as required of all manufacturers according to Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966. Reporting safety defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Z 29 Introduction 30 To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to: http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building, Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain additional information about vehicle safety from: http://www.safercar.gov. Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty of Daimler AG. Data stored in the vehicle Information about electronic data acquisition in the vehicle (Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951) Your vehicle records electronic data. If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace1, data is transmitted in the event of an accident. This information helps, for example, to test vehicle systems after an accident and to continually improve vehicle safety. Daimler AG can access this data and submit it: Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner Ron the instruction of prosecuting authorities 1 The system is called TELE AID in Canada. Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its sales and service organizations Ras otherwise required or permitted by law. Please observe the mbrace1 purchase agreement for further details on the recording and transfer of data by this system. Cockpit ................................................. Instrument cluster .............................. On-board computer and COMAND ..... Center console .................................... Overhead control panel ...................... Door control panel .............................. 32 33 35 36 37 38 At a glance 31 32 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page Steering wheel paddle shifters 277 ; Combination switch 246 = Cruise control lever 291 ? Horn A Instrument cluster B DIRECT SELECT lever C Control panel for: Vehicle level Suspension tuning PARKTRONIC Swiveling the COMAND display COMAND display brightness Instrument lighting : Function Page D Overhead control panel E Automatic climate control 256 F Ignition lock Start/Stop button 267 267 G Adjusts the steering wheel Steering wheel heating H Electric parking brake I 303 304 306 On-board diagnostics socket J Opens the hood 408 K Night View Assist Plus 317 114 L Light switch 244 33 273 114 114 37 98 99 284 Instrument cluster 33 Instrument cluster Function At a glance Displays Page : Coolant temperature 330 ; Fuel gauge = PARKTRONIC 306 ? Multifunction display Speedometer 332 A Transmission position 275 B Tachometer 331 C Drive program 277 D Parking Guidance 310 Function Page Unit of measurement for the speedometer 344 F Outside temperature 331 G Additional speedometer 344 H HOLD function Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake 302 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist ATTENTION ASSIST 248 324 316 E I 66 34 Instrument cluster At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function Page : Turn signal 246 ; Electric parking brake (red) F (USA only) ! (Canada only) 379 = Electric parking brake (yellow) F (USA only) ! (Canada only) 379 Function Page C Brakes $ (USA only) J (Canada only) 379 D ESP® OFF 381 E Tire pressure monitor 385 F Check engine 384 G ABS 380 ? Seat belt 378 H SRS 383 A ESP® 381 I High-beam headlamps 247 B Distance warning 385 J Reserve fuel 384 On-board computer and COMAND 35 At a glance On-board computer and COMAND Function Page : % Back or deactivates the Voice Control System ; =; Selects a menu 9: Selects a function or scrolls through lists a Confirms selection or fades out display messages 333 = Multifunction display 332 ? ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits phone book/redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume or operates RACETIMER on AMG vehicles 8 Mute 340 340 Function A ? Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions B Swivels the COMAND display Adjusts the brightness of the instrument lighting and the COMAND display 333 114 114 C COMAND display 111 D CD and DVD player/ changer 204 COMAND controller and COMAND function buttons 108, 109 E 338 Page 36 Center console At a glance Center console Function Function button for the radio and CD/DVD/SD card ; Page Function Page C Adjusts the volume 124 109 D Programmable button 109 Back button 109 E Telephone keypad 110 = Hazard warning lamps 247 F Rear window roller sunblind 393 ? Lumbar support Multicontour seat 238 239 G Retracts the rear seat head restraints 95 A Function button for the telephone and navigation system H Selects the drive program 277 I COMAND controller 108 136 Switches COMAND on/off 123 : B Overhead control panel 37 At a glance Overhead control panel Function : Eyeglasses compartment ; p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 249 v Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 250 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 250 3 Opens/closes the sliding sunroof 89 = ? A B C 2 Page 389 Function D E Rear-view mirror F Buttons for the garage door opener G G SOS button (mbrace system) 396 | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 250 Observe the additional operating instructions. p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and the Voice Control System2 Page 249 403 38 Door control panel At a glance Door control panel Function Page : Opens the door 80 ; %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle 80 = Adjusts the seat electrically 94 ? r45= Memory function w Adjusts the frontpassenger seat from the driver’s seat D E 102 94 A c Seat heating s Seat ventilation 97 98 B 7Zª\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 100 W Opens/closes the side windows 86 C Function Page n Activates/ deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment 60 p Opens/closes the trunk lid 84 Useful information .............................. Occupant safety .................................. Children in the vehicle ........................ Panic alarm .......................................... Driving safety systems ....................... Theft deterrent locking systems ....... 40 40 55 60 61 68 Safety 39 40 Occupant safety Useful information Safety i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Occupant safety Overview of occupant safety In this section, you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle. The restraint system consists of: Rseat belts Rchild restraint systems RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors Additional protection is provided by: RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System) head restraints RPRE-SAFE® RAir bag system components with: - PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp - front-passenger seat with Occupant Classification System (OCS) The different air bag systems work independently of each other. The protective functions of the system work in conjunction with each other. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. RNECK-PRO G WARNING Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint system components or their wiring, as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems, can lead to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs), for example, could deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper with electronic components or their software. i See "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 55) for more information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraints for infants and children. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Introduction SRS consists of: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp bags Rair bag control unit (with crash sensors) REmergency Tensioning Devices Rbelt force limiters SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the effect of the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident. Rair SRS warning lamp SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. The SRS components are in operational readiness when the 6 SRS warning lamp is not lit while the engine is running . G WARNING The SRS self-check has detected a malfunction if the 6 SRS warning lamp: Rdoes not come on at all to go out approximately 4 seconds after the engine was started Rcomes on after the engine was started or while driving For your safety, Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when it is needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury. The SRS might also deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. In addition, improper work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: Call our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details. Rfails Safety guidelines for seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) and air bags G WARNING RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. Their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use seat belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. Check your national disposal guidelines. California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm. RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD that has deployed must be replaced. PRESAFE® has electrically operated reversible belt tensioners in addition to the pyrotechnic ETDs. RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear. RDo not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the seat belts. RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. RNo modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. RDo not change or remove any component or part of the SRS. RDo not install additional trim material, seat covers, badges, etc. to the: - padded steering wheel boss - knee bag covers - front-passenger air bag cover - outer side of front seat bolsters - side trim next to the rear seat backrest - roof lining trim RDo not install additional electrical/ electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. RKeep area between air bags and occupants free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). RDo not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may be thrown around in the vehicle and cause head and other injuries when the window curtain air bag is deployed. RAir bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them. Z 41 Safety Occupant safety 42 Occupant safety Safety RNever place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RFor your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the air bag unit or ETD, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RGiven the considerable deployment speed, required inflation volume, and the material of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment. If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you inform the subsequent owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the applicable section in the Operator's Manual. Air bags Important safety notes G WARNING Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence of injuries and fatalities in certain situations: Rfrontal impacts (driver's and frontpassenger front air bags and driver's knee bag) Rside impacts (side impact air bags and window curtain air bags) Rrollover (window curtain air bags) However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. When the air bags are deployed, a small amount of powder is released. The powder generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. G WARNING To reduce the risk of injuries during front air bag inflation, the driver and front-passenger must always be seated correctly and have their seat belts fastened accordingly. For maximum protection in the event of a collision, you must always be in the normal seat position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is correctly positioned on your body. Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating position and correct positioning of the hands on the steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are not wearing their seat belt, are not seated properly or are too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates with great force instantaneously: RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest. RMove the driver's seat as far back as possible, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver's chest to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches(25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If you have any difficulties, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RDo not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard. Occupant safety hold the steering wheel by the rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when the driver front air bag inflates. RAdjust the front-passenger seat as far back as possible from the dashboard when the seat is occupied. ROccupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door or the rear side trim panel where the side impact air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the side impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants. If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator's Manual. G WARNING Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. There is a possibility for a side impact air bagrelated injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines: (1) Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side impact air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should (2) (3) the side impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. and for children 12 years old and under, use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. Always wear seat belts properly. Safety ROnly 43 If you believe that, even with the use of these guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have the rear mounted side impact air bags deactivated, then deactivation can be carried out upon your written request at an authorized MercedesBenz Center at an additional cost. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call the Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100 for details. The air bags are only deployed if the air bag control unit detects the need for deployment. Only in the event of such a situation will they provide their supplemental protection. The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise, it is not possible for the air bags to provide their supplemental protection. In the event of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The driver and passengers will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover. Air bags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat Z Safety 44 Occupant safety belts regardless of whether your vehicle is equipped with air bags or not. It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. Front air bags The front air bags increase protection for the driver's and front-passenger's head and chest. : Driver's air bag ; Front-passenger front air bag = Knee bag Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box. They are deployed: Rin the event of certain frontal impacts the system determines that air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rif the seat belt is fastened Rindependently of other air bags in the vehicle If the vehicle overturns, the front air bags are generally not deployed unless the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction. Rif Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit evaluates the vehicle deceleration. In the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is exceeded within a few milliseconds. The deployment of the front-passenger front air bag is also influenced by the weight category of the front passenger, which is determined by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (Y page 46). The lighter the passenger side occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required (predicted at the start of the impact) for second stage inflation of the front-passenger front air bag. In the second stage, the front air bags are inflated with the maximum amount of propellant gas available. The front air bags are not deployed in situations where a low impact severity is predicted. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied. Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the center console is not lit, (Y page 46). Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high impact severity. Driver's knee bag Driver's knee bag =(Y page 44) provides additional protection for the driver against: Rknee injuries Rthigh injuries Rlower leg injuries Driver's knee bag =(Y page 44) deploys below the steering wheel. During a frontal impact, if the system determines that air bag deployment can offer additional protection to Occupant safety Safety that provided by the seat belt, driver's knee bag =(Y page 44) is deployed along with the driver's air bag. Driver's knee bag=(Y page 44) operates best in conjunction with a properly positioned and fastened seat belt. Side impact air bags G WARNING The pressure sensors for side impact air bag control are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or door trim panels including, for example, the addition of door speakers. Improper repair work on the doors or the modification or addition of components to the doors create a risk of rendering the side impact air bags inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the doors must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G WARNING Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the side impact air bags. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability. When deployed, the side impact air bags offer additional protection for the thorax of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms 45 Front side impact air bags : and rear side impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer seat cushions. The side impact air bags are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of seat belt use Rindependently of the front air bags Rindependently of the ETDs If the vehicle overturns, the side impact air bags are generally not deployed. They are deployed if the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that side impact air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt. Side impact air bags will not deploy in side impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. If the OCS detects that the front-passenger seat is not occupied and the front-passenger seat belt is not fastened (the belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt buckle), the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will not deploy. The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the frontpassenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Rat Z 46 Occupant safety Safety Window curtain air bags The window curtain air bags enhance the level of protection for the head, but not chest or arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The window curtain air bags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deploy in the area extending from the front door (Apillar) to the rear sidewall (C-pillar). Occupant Classification System (OCS) How the occupant classification system works The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the frontpassenger seat by means of a weight sensor. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated automatically for certain weight categories. The 42 indicator lamp shows you the current status. If the 42 indicator lamp is illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rthe Window curtain air bags : are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rindependently of seat belt use Rif the vehicle overturns and the system determines that window curtain air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rindependently of the front air bags Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in impacts with deceleration rates which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for vehicle deceleration or acceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. Rat Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly a position that is as upright as possible with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet on the floor If the front-passenger's weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on armrests), OCS may not be able to approximate the occupant's weight category. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Both the driver and the passenger should always use the 42 indicator lamp as an indication of whether or not the passenger is properly positioned. Rin G WARNING If the 42 indicator lamp lights up when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front-passenger seat, have the front passenger reposition himself or herself in the seat until the 42 indicator lamp goes out. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit will not allow front-passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS has classified the front-passenger seat occupant as weighing as much as or less than a typical 12month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front-passenger seat is classified as being empty. When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint, the 42 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty, the 42 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12month-old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult), the 42 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then, depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the frontpassenger seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the 42 indicator lamp illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. With the 42 indicator lamp out, the front-passenger front air bag is activated. When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual, the 42 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then go out, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. If the 42 indicator lamp is illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed. If the 42 indicator lamp is not illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed: Rin the event of certain frontal impacts impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold Rindependently of the side impact air bags If the front-passenger front air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be influenced by: Rif Rthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit front passenger's weight category as identified by OCS Rthe For further information, see "Air bag display messages" (Y page 357). G WARNING According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized child restraint system or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint system must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriate sized infant Z 47 Safety Occupant safety 48 Occupant safety Safety restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat: RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front-passenger seat. RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate this risk completely is never to place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the frontpassenger seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear seat. RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, make sure the 42 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the 42 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the 42 indicator lamp while driving to make sure the 42 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 42 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates. RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat: - move the seat as far back as possible - use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child - secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions RFor children larger than a typical 12-monthold child, the front-passenger front air bag can be activated or deactivated. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag also has to deploy. The OCS may have detected that the seat: Rwas empty or occupied by a person with a weight of up to or less than that of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard child restraint Rwas occupied by a small individual, such as a young teenager or a small adult Rwas occupied by a child in a child restraint system, whose weight is greater than that of a typical 12-month-old child. These are examples of when the OCS deactivates the front-passenger front air bag. Deactivation takes place although the collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the driver's air bag. Occupant safety G WARNING If the red SRS 6 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster and the 42 indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there is a malfunction in the OCS. The front passenger front air bag will be deactivated in this case. Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS: RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest. RWhen seated, a passenger should not position him/herself in such a way as to cause the passenger's weight to be lifted from the seat cushion as this may result in the OCS being unable to correctly approximate the passenger's weight category. RRead and observe all warnings in this chapter. unoccupied, the 42 indicator lamp will illuminate and not go out. G WARNING If the 4 2 indicator lamp does not illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat. For more information, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 50). G WARNING Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the OCS. The underside and rear side child restraint system must be placed entirely on the seat cushion and the backrest of the front-passenger seat backrest. If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger seat backrest. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation of child restraint systems. System self-test The 42 indicator lamp illuminates when you: the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock Rpress the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button once or twice If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the passenger seat and the OCS classifies the occupant as an adult, the 42 indicator lamp illuminates and goes out again after approximately 6 seconds. If the seat is not occupied and the OCS classifies the front passenger seat as being Rturn Z Safety If the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition lock or is in position 0, indicator lamp 42: does not light up. 49 50 Occupant safety Safety Problems with the occupant classification system Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The 42 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated. The person on the front-passenger seat: The OCS is malfunctioning. X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display (Y page 357). Rhas the weight of a typical adult Rhas been determined by the system not to be a child. G WARNING If the 42 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, the system then determines the occupant cannot be a child. Do not allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The 42 The OCS is malfunctioning. indicator lamp does not X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the illuminate and/or does child seat. not remain illuminated. X Check the installation of the child restraint system. The front-passenger X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto seat is: the seat. Runoccupied X If the 42 indicator lamp does not illuminate, have Roccupied with a the OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized weight up to or less Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the frontthan a typical 12passenger seat as long as the OCS is not functioning. month-old child in a X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction standard child display (Y page 357). restraint system G WARNING If the 42 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the frontpassenger seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Occupant safety G WARNING The PRE-SAFE® system reduces the impact of an accident on vehicle occupants, as long as their seat belts have been fastened correctly. Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRESAFE® system, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. You should therefore always drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions. PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. if BAS is activated or, in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceed and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rit adjusts the front-passenger seat if it is in an unfavorable position. air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat cushion and seat backrest of the front active multicontour seats is increased. Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and sliding sunroof are closed so that only a small gap remains. If the sliding sunroof or a side window is obstructed during closing, the closing procedure is stopped. The obstructed sliding sunroof or side window opens again slightly. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, all settings made by PRE-SAFE® can be reversed. The air pressure in the side bolsters on the active multicontour seat is reduced again. Rthe If the seat belts are not released: X Move the backrest back slightly, but only when the vehicle is stationary. The belt pretensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you adjust the seat. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when resetting the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. Seat belts Important safety notes The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. Even where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened when the vehicle is in motion. i For further information on infants and children traveling in the vehicle and on infant and child restraint systems, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 55). G WARNING Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure all of your passengers are properly restrained. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. Z Safety PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection) 51 52 Occupant safety Safety In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. The air bags can only protect as intended if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts. G WARNING Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and the seat belt is properly positioned on the body. G WARNING Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. G WARNING Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when necessary. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Correct use of the seat belts G WARNING USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY RSeat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in the event of an accident. REach occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee bag, front-passenger front air bag, side impact air bags, window curtain air bags for the side windows), Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side (side impact air bags, window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags and ETDs). RNever wear the shoulder belt under your arm, across your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The seat belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen. Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder section is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder. It should not touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder portion of the seat belt under your arm. For this purpose, you can adjust the height of the seat belt outlet. Occupant safety the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the lap belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash. RNever wear seat belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might cause injuries. RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing. RNever use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects at the same time. RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the seat belt to distribute impact forces. The twisted seat belt against your body could cause injuries. RPregnant women should also always use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen. RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is as upright as possible. RCheck your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned. RNever place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant restraints, toddler restraints, or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the seat belts. Fastening seat belts G WARNING According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seat whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized child restraint system or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see the "Children in the vehicle" section. A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. G WARNING Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear. Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the seat belt. Z Safety RPosition 53 Occupant safety 54 Safety X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 92). X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt sash guide :. X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your hips. X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. For further information on special seat belt retractors, see (Y page 57). For more information about releasing the seat belt with release button ?, see "Releasing seat belts" (Y page 54). Releasing seat belts X Press release button ?(Y page 53) and guide belt tongue ; back towards belt sash guide :. ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Consult an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger Regardless of whether the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts already, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds after every engine start. It then goes out if the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone goes out after approximately six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened. If the driver or front passenger have not fastened their seat belt after 6 seconds and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up. Runtil the driver or the front passenger have fastened their seat belts Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph(25 km/h) is exceeded once, a warning tone with increasing intensity sounds additionally for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger undo their seat belts during the journey, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and the warning tone sounds again. The warning tone ceases even if the driver or front passenger have still not fastened their seat belt after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt warning lamp stops flashing but continues to be lit. Once the vehicle is stationary, the warning tone is reactivated and the 7 seat belt warning lamp starts to flash again if the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once. The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes out if: Rboth the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. or Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belt" (Y page 378). Emergency Tensioning Device and seat belt force limiters The seat belts are equipped with ETDs and seat belt force limiters. The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. Seat belt force limiters, when triggered, help to reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags. These take on a part of the deceleration force. Thus, the force exerted on the occupant is distributed over a greater area. The ETDs can only be activated when: Rthe ignition is switched on. restraint systems are operational; see "SRS warning lamp" (Y page 40). Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied and the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the front-passenger side. The ETDs on the seats in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. The ETDs are triggered depending on the type and severity of an accident: Rthe Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end collision, the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side opposite the impact the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direction Rif, in certain situations where the vehicle overturns, the system determines that it can provide additional protection If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. G WARNING Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be replaced. For your safety, when disposing of the pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety instructions. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the frontpassenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency Tensioning Device could be triggered in the event of an accident. Automatic comfort-install feature The front seat belts have an automatic comfort-install feature. The automatic comfort-install feature reduces the retraction force of the seat belts. This results in increased seat belt comfort. Children in the vehicle Child restraint systems Important safety notes We recommend that all infants and children be properly secured in an infant or child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. Infants and children must always be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system recommended for the size and weight of the Z 55 Safety Children in the vehicle Safety 56 Children in the vehicle child. The infant or child restraint system must be properly secured in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All infant or child restraint systems must meet U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. An information label on the child restraint system indicates whether it meets these standards. This information is also provided in the installation instructions supplied with the child restraint system. Always read and follow the manufacturer's instructions when using an infant or child restraint system or booster seat. Observe all warning signs in the vehicle interior and on the infant or child restraint. G WARNING According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized child restraint system or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint system must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriate sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat: RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front-passenger seat. RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate this risk completely is never to place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the frontpassenger seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear seat. RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, make sure the 42 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the 42 indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the 42 indicator lamp while driving to make sure the 42 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 42 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates. Children in the vehicle restraint on the front-passenger seat: - move the seat as far back as possible - use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child - secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions RFor children larger than a typical 12-monthold child, the front-passenger front air bag can be activated or deactivated. G WARNING Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position the shoulder belt across the chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle: X Secure the infant or child with an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the child's age and weight. X Make sure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion. G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The children could: Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with vehicle equipment that can be operated even if the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function If children open a door, they could injure other persons or get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts. Rbe G WARNING Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment or trunk unless they are firmly secured in place. Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child's risk of injury in the event of Rstrong braking maneuvers changes of direction Ran accident Rsudden Special seat belt retractor All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt Z Safety RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child 57 Children in the vehicle 58 Safety retractor ensures the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured. Installing a child restraint system: X Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia reel. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. Activating the special seat belt retractor: X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is enabled. X Push down on the child restraint system to take up any slack. Removing a child restraint system/ deactivating the special seat belt retractor: X Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the seat belt release button and guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. seat belt lies properly across their bodies without the need for a booster seat. Install the child restraint system according to the manufacturer's instructions. The child restraint system must be installed firmly on both brackets. An incorrectly installed child restraint system can come loose in the event of an accident, causing the child to be severely or fatally injured. Child restraint systems/child restraint retaining brackets that are damaged or have suffered damage due to an impact must be replaced. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right of the rear seats. Secure non LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems using the vehicle's seat belt system. Always install child restraint systems according to the manufacturer's instructions. G WARNING Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors in the rear G WARNING Children that are too large for a child restraint must travel in seats using normal seat belts. Position shoulder belt across the chest and shoulder, not face or neck. In order to attain the correct seating position for children weighing over 41 lb (18 kg), it may be necessary to use a booster seat until they reach a height where a normal lap/shoulder Installation instructions : indicate the installation location of securing rings 2. Children in the vehicle 59 Fold upholstery cover = and the Velcro fastener upwards. X Turn installation aid ? to a vertical position to prevent upholstery cover = from folding down. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems on both securing rings ;. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when installing the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system. Top Tether Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce the risk of injury even further. The Top Tether anchorage points are located in the rear compartment behind the head restraints. X Remove respective covering cap : of the Top Tether anchorage. X Place covering cap : in a suitable place (e.g. in the glove box). Safety X X Move the head restraint upwards. Route Top Tether belt ? under the head restraint between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether belt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;. Ensure that: X RTop Tether hook = is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ; as shown. RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted. RTop Tether belt ? can move freely between the rear seat backrest and the head restraint. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Make sure that Top Tether belt ? is tight. The child restraint system with Top Tether belt ? has been removed: X Slide covering cap : onto Top Tether anchorage ;. Z 60 Panic alarm Child-proof locks Important safety notes Safety G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The children could: themselves on parts of the vehicle seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with vehicle equipment that can be operated even if the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function If children open a door, they could injure other persons or get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts. X Rinjure Rbe Override feature for the rear side windows G WARNING When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats, activate the override switch. Otherwise the children could be injured, e.g. by trapping themselves in the rear side window. To activate/deactivate: press button :. If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear side windows is deactivated. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. Panic alarm X To activate: press ! button : for at least one second. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle. Driving safety systems This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-Gen of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey. Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) RBAS (Brake Assist System) RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus*) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) RADAPTIVE BRAKE RPRE-SAFE® Brake Important safety notes G WARNING The following factors increase the risk of accidents: RExcessive speed, especially in turns and slippery road surfaces RFollowing another vehicle too closely The driving safety systems described in this section cannot reduce these risks or prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle. They cannot increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the driving safety systems described in this section must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions and keep a safe distance to other road users and objects on the street. If a driving system malfunctions, other driving safety systems may also switch off. Observe indicator and warning lamps that may come on as well as messages in the multifunction display that may appear. RWet i Please note that the driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" section (Y page 442). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. Z Safety i USA only: 61 62 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Important safety notes Safety i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of roadsurface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. G WARNING If the ABS malfunctions, other driving systems such as the BAS or the ESP® are also switched off. Observe indicator and warning lamps that may come on as well as messages in the multifunction display that may appear. If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing the steering capability and extending the braking distance. The ! warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. Braking and significantly reduces braking effectiveness. BAS (Brake Assist System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. G WARNING If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still functions, but without the additional brake boost available that the BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance may increase. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. i Observe the "Important safety notes" The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. i This device has been approved by the FCC G WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS section (Y page 61). At speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), BAS PLUS assists you when braking in hazardous situations and uses the radar sensor system to evaluate the traffic conditions. as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor system is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, altering or tampering with the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Driving safety systems With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. At speeds up to approximately 40 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also detect stationary obstacles, for example stopped or parked vehicles. Should you approach an obstacle and BAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision, BAS PLUS calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end collision. RAt speeds up to approximately 20 mph(30 km/h): should you apply the brakes forcefully, BAS PLUS will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. RAt speeds up to approximately 20 mph(30 km/h): should you apply the brakes, BAS PLUS is activated. Braking is performed as late as possible. If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. BAS PLUS is then deactivated. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on and operational, see "Radar sensor system" in the index. Rthere G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rin curves As a result, BAS PLUS cannot intervene in critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. If BAS PLUS is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. Z Safety Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 63 64 Driving safety systems ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Important safety notes Safety i See the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. G WARNING Under no circumstances should you deactivate ESP® when the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. Proceed as follows: Rwhen driving off, apply as little throttle as possible. Rwhile driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal. Radapt your speed to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid. ESP® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed. ! The ignition must be switched off if the vehicle is being towed with the front or rear axle raised. Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and damage the brake system. ! Do not tow vehicles with 4MATIC with the front or rear axle raised. i Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) G WARNING Observe "Important safety notes" (Y page 61). Traction control is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, more drive torque is also transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active if you deactivate ESP®. Deactivating/activating ESP® i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). G WARNING ESP® should not be deactivated during normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling the system will reduce vehicle stability in driving maneuvers. Do not deactivate ESP® when the emergency or spare wheel is mounted. G WARNING CL 63 AMG: ESP® should not be deactivated during normal driving. Deactivating the system results in the following: Rno restriction to the engine torque of system-supported traction control "ESP OFF" is designed for driving on closed tracks when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired and requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver who is able to handle these critical driving situations. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Rloss Driving safety systems Do not deactivate ESP® when the emergency or spare wheel is mounted. ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is started. i Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle comes to a stop. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Rin G WARNING Switch on ESP® immediately if one of the previously stated conditions is no longer met. Otherwise, ESP® cannot stabilize the vehicle if it begins to lurch or when a wheel spins. When you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. X To deactivate:(Y page 342). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. G WARNING When the å ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit, ESP® is deactivated. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å ESP® OFF warning lamp remain lit, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. When ESP® is deactivated or not operational, vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers is reduced. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP®. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. X To activate:(Y page 342). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. G WARNING If EBD has malfunctioned, the braking system remains available with full brake boosting effect. However, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Z Safety Beware of these limits if you deactivate ESP®. 65 Driving safety systems 66 Safety X Observe the notes on warning and indicator lamps (Y page 380) as well as display messages (Y page 349). ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 302) and hill start assist (Y page 269). For further information, see Driving tips (Y page 287). PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a frontal collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. At speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you when you are rapidly approaching the vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster will light up. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. If the driver and front passenger have their seat belt fastened, PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically at speeds from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) to approximately 124 mph (200 km/h). Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated driving conditions may cause unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake. To stop the braking action, you can either depress the accelerator pedal further, activate kickdown or release the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. is no longer any danger of a rear-end collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. Rthere i USA only: this device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor system is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, altering or tampering with the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: this device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. With the help of the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Driving safety systems G WARNING Even if PRE-SAFE® Brake slows the vehicle before an imminent rear-end collision, the system cannot avert a collision without the intervention of the driver. There is a risk of an accident. Brake according to the situation or take evasive action. Delayed intervention by the driver can lead to an accident. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always detect complex traffic situations properly. In these cases, PRE-SAFE(R) Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE(R) Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rin curves Rto As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot intervene in critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the onboard computer (Y page 342). After activation, the Ä symbol is displayed on the left in the instrument cluster. For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be switched on (Y page 344) and operational. Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Z Safety At speeds up to approximately 40 mph (70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also react to stationary obstacles, for example stopped or parked vehicles. If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE® Brake detects a risk of collision, the system will initially alert you both visually and acoustically. If you do not brake or take evasive action, the system will warn you by automatically braking the vehicle gently. If there is an increased risk of collision, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated (Y page 51). If the risk of collision remains at speeds of over 20 mph(30 km/h) and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic braking up to emergency braking. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an accident that can no longer be avoided. 67 68 Theft deterrent locking systems Theft deterrent locking systems i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, the emergency call system mbrace (USA only) or TELE AID (Canada only) initiates a call to the Customer Assistance Center automatically. The emergency call system initiates the call provided that: Safety Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The engine can be started by anyone with a valid SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace/ TELE AID service. Rthe mbrace/TELE AID service has been activated properly. Rthe required mobile phone, power supply and GPS are available. i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started when the starter battery is fully charged, the immobilizer may be faulty. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. Rthe X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 30 seconds. X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. X To stop the alarm using the SmartKey: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarm is switched off. Theft deterrent locking systems X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. Safety or X 69 Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. Z 70 71 72 72 79 82 86 89 Opening/closing Useful information .............................. SmartKey ............................................. Doors .................................................... Trunk .................................................... Side windows ...................................... Sliding sunroof .................................... 72 SmartKey Useful information Opening/closing i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified hot, and a child could be burned on these parts. G WARNING If a key ring is too heavy or too large, the weight acting on the key could cause it to turn in the ignition lock or catch on the steering wheel. This could cause the engine to be switched off suddenly. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large key rings to the key that is inserted in the ignition. specialist workshops (Y page 29). General notes SmartKey Important safety notes G WARNING If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, either the battery in the SmartKey is discharged, the SmartKey is faulty or the starter battery is discharged. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. They could: X Rinjure If the SmartKey is faulty, contact Roadside Assistance or a qualified specialist workshop. themselves on vehicle parts Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in operation even after the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition, such as the seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment or memory function. If children open a door, they could cause severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if they get out of the vehicle, they could injure themselves when doing so or be seriously or even fatally injured by any passing traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very Check the battery in the SmartKey and replace it if necessary (Y page 76). X Unlock the driver's door using the mechanical key (Y page 81). X Lock the vehicle (Y page 82). X Have the starter battery and the battery contacts checked at a qualified specialist workshop. SmartKey functions General notes i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. SmartKey i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. The Product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey. Locking and unlocking centrally When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in COMAND (Y page 234). If you activate the acoustic locking confirmation function, you will hear the following, depending on the date of production of the vehicle: Ran acoustic signal when locking or Rone acoustic signal when unlocking and three when locking. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 344). X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed again. X To lock centrally: press the & button. The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors trunk lid Rthe fuel filler flap Rthe KEYLESS-GO General notes i USA only: : & Locks the vehicle ; F Unlocks the trunk lid = % Unlocks the vehicle When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. The Product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey. i Canada only: Z Opening/closing Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. The Product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey. 73 Opening/closing 74 SmartKey This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. The Product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey. Important notes on the use of KEYLESSGO RThe KEYLESS-GO key can be used like a conventional key. RYou can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with those of a conventional key, e.g. unlock with KEYLESS-GO and lock with the & button. RAlways carry your KEYLESS-GO key on your person. RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together with: - electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key - metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO. RWhen locking and unlocking using KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not exceed 3 ft (1 m). RIf the vehicle is parked for more than 72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function is deactivated. Pull the outer door handle and switch on the ignition to reactivate the KEYLESS-GO function. RIf the KEYLESS-GO key is removed from the vehicle, it is possible that the system may not recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle can then not be locked or started using KEYLESS-GO. RIf the KEYLESS-GO key has been removed from the vehicle, e.g. if a passenger leaves the vehicle with a KEYLESS-GO key: - if the start/stop button is pressed or if an attempt is made to lock the vehicle with the locking button on the outer door handle, the Key Not Detected message appears in the multifunction display - when the engine is running, the red Key Not Detected message appears in the multifunction display as you pull away. Find the KEYLESS-GO key and change its position in the vehicle. Carry the KEYLESS-GO key in your shirt pocket, for example. RIf you have started the engine with the Start/Stop button, you can switch it off again by: - pressing the Start/Stop button again - inserting the KEYLESS-GO key into the ignition lock if the vehicle is stationary and the automatic transmission is in park position P. RYou could unlock the vehicle by mistake if the distance between the KEYLESS-GO key and the vehicle is less than 3 ft (1 m) and: - an exterior door handle is hit by a water jet or - you clean an exterior door handle. RBear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. SmartKey To unlock the vehicle: pull the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period (Y page 88). If you pull on the handle of the trunk lid, only the trunk of the vehicle is unlocked. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the setting of the locking system in such a way that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp (Y page 76) flashes twice. i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button locks or unlocks the vehicle. The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. Restoring the factory settings X Press the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. Mechanical key General notes If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 68). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESSGO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. Removing the mechanical key The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: pull the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: pull the frontpassenger door handle. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. Z Opening/closing X 75 SmartKey 76 X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time, remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. X Changing the battery (Y page 76) i You can obtain the battery at a qualified specialist workshop. i If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button locks or unlocks the vehicle. Opening/closing SmartKey battery Important safety notes Have the batteries changed at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Batteries contain toxic substances. Swallowing batteries can lead to serious health issues or death. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Seek medical attention immediately if a battery is swallowed. Changing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 75). G WARNING The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. Observe government disposal guidelines. California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ index.cfm. Checking the battery X Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly If battery check lamp : does not light up briefly during the test, the battery is discharged. X Press mechanical key ; into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery tray cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold cover : shut. X Remove battery tray cover :. X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. SmartKey 77 X Opening/closing Make sure that the surface of the battery is free from lint, grease and all other forms of contamination. X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover : and then press to close it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. Z 78 SmartKey Problems with the SmartKey Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the %/ & button. Opening/closing Problem If this does not work: X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 76) and replace it if necessary (Y page 76). X Lock (Y page 81) or unlock (Y page 82) the vehicle using the mechanical key. The SmartKey is faulty. X Lock (Y page 81) or unlock (Y page 82) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock KEYLESS-GO is in standby mode because the vehicle has not been or unlock the vehicle unlocked for an extended period. using KEYLESS-GO. X Pull the door handle twice and then insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the %/& button. There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the %/& button. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If this does not work: X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 76) and replace it if necessary (Y page 76). X Lock (Y page 81) or unlock (Y page 82) the vehicle using the mechanical key. You have lost a SmartKey. X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Doors Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You have lost the mechanical key. X The engine cannot be started using the SmartKey. The on-board voltage is too low. X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. X Start the engine within 30 seconds of inserting the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Repeat if necessary. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 430). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 433). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as started using KEYLESS- easily. GO. The SmartKey is in X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Doors Important safety notes G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. They could: Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts seriously or fatally injured by extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in operation even after the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition, such as the seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment or memory function. If children open a door, they could cause severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if they get out of the vehicle, they could injure themselves when doing so or be seriously or even fatally injured by any passing traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and a child could be burned on these parts. Rbe Z Opening/closing X 79 Doors 80 G WARNING Opening/closing Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment unless they are firmly secured in place. Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child's risk of injury in the event of: Rstrong braking maneuvers changes of direction Ran accident Rsudden Unlocking and opening doors from the inside possible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door closed. You could otherwise damage the door or the side window. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. The central locking/unlocking button does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. Only open the door when the traffic situation permits. If the vehicle was previously locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening the vehicle from the inside will activate the antitheft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 68). X X X Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. i When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window closes again. ! The side windows will not open/close if the battery is discharged or if the side windows have iced up. It will then not be To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. Only open the door when the traffic situation permits. If the vehicle has been locked with the central locking button: Rand the SmartKey is set to its factory setting, the entire vehicle is unlocked if a door is opened from the inside Rand the SmartKey is set to an individual setting, only the door that is opened from inside the vehicle is unlocked. If the vehicle has been locked centrally with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it is not unlocked when the release button for the central locking is used. Doors The vehicle locks automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels of the vehicle are turning at a speed of more than 9 mph (15 km/h). You could therefore be locked out when: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer. You can switch off the automatic locking function via COMAND (Y page 234). Rthe Power closing feature The power closing feature pulls the doors and trunk lid into their locks automatically even if they are only partly closed. G WARNING To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door or trunk opening when closing a door or the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are around. If danger threatens, pull the inside or outside door handle, or pull the trunk lid handle. To prevent personal injury, never activate the closing assist mechanism by tampering with the door or trunk lid latch. X Power closing feature (doors): push the door past the first detent position of the lock. The power closing feature will pull the door fully closed. X Power closing feature (trunk lid): lightly push the trunk lid closed. The power closing feature will pull the trunk lid fully closed. Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 68). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 75). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. G WARNING Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, one or more of the doors could open while the vehicle is in motion, putting you and/or others at risk. G WARNING Make sure the trunk lid is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. X Firmly turn the mechanical key counterclockwise as far as it will go to position 1 and hold it in this position. X Pull the door handle quickly. The locking knob pops up. The door is unlocked. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Pull the door handle again. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. Z Opening/closing Automatic locking feature 81 Trunk 82 Opening/closing Locking the vehicle If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the SmartKey, you can lock it by taking the following steps. If the central locking in the vehicle is malfunctioning, you cannot lock the trunk. X Open the front-passenger door. X Close the driver's door and the trunk lid. X Press down the locking knob of the driver's door inside the vehicle. X Press down the locking knob of the open front-passenger door. i Make sure that you have the SmartKey on your person and that it has not been left in the vehicle. X Close the front-passenger door. X Make sure that the doors and the trunk are locked. i If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The antitheft alarm system is not armed. operation even after the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition, such as the seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment or memory function. If children open a door, they could cause severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if they get out of the vehicle, they could injure themselves when doing so or be seriously or even fatally injured by any passing traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and a child could be burned on these parts. G WARNING Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment or trunk unless they are firmly secured in place. Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child's risk of injury in the event of Rstrong Trunk braking maneuvers changes of direction Ran accident Important safety notes G WARNING Rsudden Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. They could: Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts seriously or fatally injured by extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in Rbe Make sure the trunk lid is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. You can limit the opening angle of the trunk lid. This could be useful, for example, if there is insufficient space above the trunk lid. You can switch the Trunk Opening-height Restriction function on or off via COMAND (Y page 235). To open the trunk lid completely, a minimum clearance of 5.90 ft (1.80 m) above the ground is necessary. Trunk 83 The trunk lid can be: Ropened Ropened and closed manually from outside and closed automatically from outside and closed automatically from inside Rlocked separately Runlocked with the mechanical key Ropened with the emergency release button X Opening and closing manually Opening X Press the % button on the SmartKey. Pull the trunk lid down using recess :. If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the SmartKey (Y page 72) or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73). i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and then opens again. X Opening/closing automatically from outside Important safety notes G WARNING X Pull handle :. X Raise the trunk lid. Closing G WARNING To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are around. Make sure the trunk lid is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. To open the trunk lid completely, a minimum clearance of 5.90 ft (1.80 m) above the ground is necessary. Opening You can open the trunk lid using the SmartKey. X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the trunk lid opens. Z Opening/closing Ropened Trunk 84 Closing G WARNING Opening/closing Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following: RPress button F on the SmartKey. RPress the remote trunk opening/closing switch (on the driver's door). RPress the trunk closing switch. RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch. RPull the trunk lid handle. Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESSGO removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk opening/closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. You can close the trunk lid automatically by using either the closing button or the locking button3. Press locking button ; in the trunk lid. i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the trunk, the trunk lid will not lock. Opening/closing automatically from the inside G WARNING Maintain sight of the area around the rear of the vehicle while operating the trunk lid with the door mounted switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To interrupt the closing procedure, release the door mounted remote trunk opening/ closing switch again. Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESSGO removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk opening/closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. G WARNING Make sure the trunk lid is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. You can open and close the trunk lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. X To close: press closing button : in the trunk lid. X To close and lock simultaneously: 3 For vehicles with KEYLESS-GO only. Trunk 85 Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key) ! The trunk lid swings upwards when X To open: press remote operating switch for trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens. X To close: press remote operating switch for trunk lid : until the trunk lid is closed. If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 68). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 75). X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as the stop. Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the trunk lid. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 75). X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise from position 1 as far as it will go to position 2. The trunk is unlocked. X Turn the mechanical key back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as the stop. X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from position 1 to position 2. X Remove the mechanical key. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. Trunk emergency release You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehicle with the emergency release button. Z Opening/closing opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. Side windows Opening/closing 86 X Briefly press emergency release button :. The trunk lid unlocks and opens. The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. Trunk lid emergency release light: Remergency release button : flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened. Remergency release button : flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed. The trunk lid emergency release does not open the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged. The closing of the front door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was pulled past the resistance point and released, by either pressing or pulling the respective switch. The closing of the rear side windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch. Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the door window opening. G WARNING Do not keep any part of your body up against the window pane when opening a window. The downward motion of the pane may pull that part of your body down between the window pane and the door frame and trap it there. If there is a risk of entrapment, release the switch and pull it to close the window. Opening and closing the side windows Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING When opening or closing the door windows, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening/closing procedure. The front door windows are equipped with automatic operation and the anti-entrapment feature. If in automatic mode a front door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path, the anti-entrapment feature will stop the door window and open it slightly. The door windows operate differently when the switch is pulled. See the "Problems with door windows" section for details. : Front left ; Front right = Rear right ? Rear left The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on the front-passenger door as well as on the doors in the rear compartment on the left and right-hand sides for the respective side window. Side windows i The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 60). X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open: press the corresponding switch. X To close: pull the corresponding switch. i You can start automatic operation when opening and closing the front door windows and when opening the rear door windows. To do so, briefly press or pull the switch to beyond the point of resistance in the relevant direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. Convenience closing General notes When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose Rclose G WARNING When closing the door windows and the sliding sunroof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. If potential danger exists, proceed as follows: RRelease the & button to stop the closing procedure. To open, press and hold the % button. To continue the closing procedure after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure, press and hold the & button. i You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. the side windows the sliding sunroof Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: RRelease Convenience opening feature You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the key is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle the side windows Ropen the sliding sunroof Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat Ropen i The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the SmartKey. The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle. X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are in the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. the sensor surface on the outside door handle to stop the closing procedure. RImmediately pull on the same outside door handle and hold firmly. The door windows and the sliding sunroof will open for as long as the door handle is held but the door is not opened. Using the SmartKey i The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle. X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed. X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Z Opening/closing The switches on the driver's door take precedence. 87 Side windows Opening/closing 88 Using KEYLESS-GO If the side window opens again slightly: The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed. X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 86). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Problems with the side windows X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. Resetting the side windows You must reset each side window if: Ra front side window cannot be closed automatically Ra side window opens again slightly after being closed manually X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed. (Y page 86) X Hold the switch for an additional second. Problem: a side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. X X Remove the objects. Close the side window. Problem: a side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. G WARNING Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side windows. If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the antientrapment feature. Sliding sunroof G WARNING Pulling and holding the switch to close the window immediately after it had been blocked two times will cause the window to close without the anti-entrapment feature for as long as you hold the switch. 89 ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. Sliding sunroof Important safety notes G WARNING When opening or closing the sliding sunroof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening/closing procedure. The sliding sunroof is equipped with automatic operation and the anti-entrapment feature. If the movement of the sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure, the sliding sunroof will stop and open slightly. The sliding sunroof operates differently when the sliding sunroof switch is pressed and held. See the "Problems with the sliding sunroof" section for more details. The opening/closing procedure of the sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the sliding sunroof switch or, if the sliding sunroof switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the sliding sunroof switch in any direction. start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Operating the sliding sunroof Opening and closing i You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or frontpassenger door is opened. G WARNING The sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly, as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower Z Opening/closing ! The weather can change abruptly. It could Sliding sunroof 90 Opening/closing X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again. When raising the roof, automatic operation is only available if the sliding sunroof is in the closed position. When opening the roof, automatic operation is only available if the sliding sunroof is not raised. The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. Resetting Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear (Y page 89). X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 89). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Problems with the sliding sunroof Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. G WARNING You could be severely or even fatally injured when closing the sliding sunroof with increased closing force or if the antientrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the sliding sunroof. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. G WARNING Pressing and holding the sliding sunroof switch to close the sliding sunroof immediately after it had been blocked two times will cause the sliding sunroof to close without the anti-entrapment feature for as long as you hold the switch. ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop. 91 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Useful information .............................. 92 Correct driver's seat position ............ 92 Seats .................................................... 93 Steering wheel .................................... 98 Mirrors ............................................... 100 Memory function .............................. 102 92 Correct driver's seat position Useful information Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Correct driver's seat position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly (Y page 95). When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint. Ryou Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 98). X Check whether steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 98) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. Ryou Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 51). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 53). The seat belt should: Rfit snugly across your body routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 100) in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions. X Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings (Y page 102). Rbe Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 93). X Check whether you have adjusted seat = properly. Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 94) When adjusting the seat, make sure: Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Seats Important safety notes G WARNING In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle control, all seat, head restraint, steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before setting the vehicle in motion. G WARNING Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Never travel in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. This could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and seat belts are properly positioned on the body. G WARNING Your seat belt must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt. Observe the following points: Radjust the seat backrest until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. Radjust the seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far back as possible with the driver still able to operate the controls properly. Radjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. Rnever place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted. Failure to do so could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. G WARNING The electrically adjustable seats can be operated at any time. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. G WARNING According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see "Children in the vehicle". A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. G WARNING For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Seats 93 94 Seats Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Adjusting the seats ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! When you move the seats, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the seats and the objects. i The head restraints cannot be removed. Please contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for more information. : Head restraint height ; Seat height = Seat cushion angle ? Seat cushion length A Seat fore-and-aft adjustment B Backrest angle i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the front-passenger seat and the electrically adjustable rear seats are moved into a more favorable position. i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 102). i To ensure the largest possible range of seat settings, certain seat adjustment functions will automatically activate other seat adjustment functions. i Depending on the seat fore-and-aft setting, the head restraint height is adjusted automatically. Adjusting the front-passenger seat from the driver's seat G WARNING When adjusting the front passenger seat, make sure the seat, if occupied, is as far from the front passenger front air bag as possible. Otherwise, the passenger could be seriously or even fatally injured in the event of an accident or braking maneuver. Seats ! Do not move the front-passenger seat fully forwards if there are objects in the parcel net in the front-passenger footwell. The objects could otherwise be damaged. You can use the seat switches on the driver's side to adjust the front-passenger seat. X To activate/deactivate: press button :. If the indicator lamp in button : is lit, you can access the following functions for the front-passenger seat: Rseat adjustment heating/ventilation Rmemory function Rseat Adjusting the head restraints (Y page 94) up or down in the direction of the arrow. Rear seat head restraints G WARNING For safety reasons, always drive with the rear head restraints in the upright position when the rear seats are occupied. Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the folding operation of the head restraints. G WARNING For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non-use position and have the occupant adjust the head restraint properly. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints installed when the rear seats are occupied. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. G WARNING Make sure the rear seat head restraints engage when placing them upright manually. Otherwise their protective function cannot be ensured. The back of the head will not be supported in the event of a collision. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Rear seat occupants can be seriously injured or killed. Adjusting the head restraint height electrically X To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Make sure no one is caught or injured while the seat is being adjusted. Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO removed from the vehicle, the power seats can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 95 Seats 96 Folding back the rear seat head restraints from the front Folding the front-seat backrests forward/back Important safety notes Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button :. Folding the rear seat head restraints into position pneumatically X Press and hold button : until the head restraints are folded up. i If a rear-seat passenger inserts the seat belt into the buckle, the head restraint on the corresponding seat folds up automatically. Folding the rear seat head restraints into position manually The seat belts can only provide protection if the seat backrest is locked in the upright position. The seat backrest must therefore be locked in the upright position during the journey. Do not drive the vehicle if the seat backrest is not locked in the upright position. If the Lock Seat Backrest Front Right or Lock Seat Backrest Front Left warning message is displayed in the multifunction display, then the corresponding seat backrest is not locked. Carefully slow down and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Always ensure that there is sufficient space behind the seat backrest and fold the seat backrest back fully until it engages in the locking mechanism. The warning message is no longer displayed once the seat backrest engages in the locking mechanism. If both seat backrests are locked and the warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked by a Mercedes-Benz Center without delay. G WARNING Always ensure that no one can become trapped or injured when the seat is moving. In case potential danger exists, the procedure can be interrupted by moving the seat adjustment switch in the door control panel or by moving the release lever again. X Pull the head restraint up until it engages. Seats In order to make it convenient for passengers to get in and out of the rear compartment, the driver's or front-passenger seat: Ris automatically moved forwards when the backrest is folded forwards Ris automatically moved backwards when the backrest is folded back bolsters of the seat cushion and backrest) of the multicontour seat or active multicontour seat is increased. Adjusting the lumbar support You can adjust the lumbar support using COMAND (Y page 238). Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. X Pull seat release handle : in the direction of the arrow and fold the backrest forwards. The head restraint is lowered and the seat moves forwards. Folding back the backrest X Fold the seat backrest back until it engages. The seat moves to its original position. The head restraint is raised. The seat backrest is engaged again. Adjusting the multicontour seat You can adjust the multicontour seat using COMAND (Y page 239). Adjusting the active multicontour seat You can adjust the active multicontour seat using COMAND (Y page 241). The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the air pressure in the air chambers (the side Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Folding the backrest forwards 97 Steering wheel Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 98 Problems with the seat heating Problems with the seat ventilation The seat heating has switched itself off prematurely. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. The seat ventilation has switched off prematurely. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X X Switch off electrical consumers which you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Switch off electrical consumers which you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Steering wheel Switching on/off Important safety notes The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected. G WARNING i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. The electrical steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated at any time. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Adjusting the steering wheel X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 87). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. : To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) ; To adjust the steering wheel height Steering wheel i Other topics: EASY-ENTRY/EXIT system feature (Y page 99) Rstoring settings (Y page 102) Roperating the on-board computer (Y page 331) Steering wheel heating Switching on/off The steering-wheel heating heats the leather areas of the steering wheel. Important safety notes The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature using COMAND (Y page 232). G WARNING You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver's seat when the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature is activated. To stop steering wheel and seat movement, do one of the following: Rmove the seat adjustment switch. the steering column adjustment switch. Rpress one of the memory function position buttons or memory button M. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver's door and unintentionally activate the EASY-ENTRY/ EXIT feature. This could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Rmove X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow : or ;. Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is deactivated. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is deactivated. i The steering wheel heating is deactivated when the temperature in the vehicle interior is higher than 86 ‡ (30 †). i The steering wheel heating is switched off automatically after about 24 minutes. G WARNING Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in motion. All steering wheel adjustment must be completed before setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ! Do not activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, if the seat backrest is reclined too far backwards. This can damage the front or rear seats. You must first move the backrest to a vertical position. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors REASY-ENTRY/EXIT 99 100 Mirrors Position of the steering wheel and the driver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/ EXIT feature is active The steering wheel tilts upwards and the driver's seat moves backwards if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock the driver's door when the SmartKey is in the ignition lock or KEYLESS-GO is in position 1 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Ropen i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop. The driver's seat only moves backwards if it is not already in the rearmost position. Position of the steering wheel and the driver's seat for driving Mirrors Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror and glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. The exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low. If you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock with the driver's door closed, depending on the setting, the position of the steering wheel and the driver's seat will be changed to the previously set position. The last position of the steering wheel or seat is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off or setting is stored with the memory function. Rthe Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror or button = for the left-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp lights up in the button that has been pressed. X Press adjustment button : up, down, to the right or to the left until the exterior mirror is set to a position that provides you with a good overview of traffic conditions. Mirrors Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically X 101 Press the mirror-folding button (Y page 101) repeatedly until you hear the mirrors engage in position. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 100). G WARNING X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while the vehicle is in motion, as they may otherwise vibrate. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically When the "Automatic mirror folding" function is activated in COMAND (Y page 232): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or frontpassenger door. i The mirrors do not fold out if they have been folded in manually. Exterior mirror out of position If incident light from headlamps is prevented from striking the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for instance, by luggage piled too high in the vehicle, the mirror's automatic antiglare function will not operate. Incident light could then blind you. This may distract you from the traffic conditions and, as a result, you may cause an accident. The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antiglare mode if the ignition is switched on and incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror. The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting is switched on. Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Automatic anti-glare mirrors Memory function 102 Calling up a stored parking position setting Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side with the corresponding button (Y page 100). X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button = for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. i You can also store the parking position using memory button M :. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use adjustment button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position which allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. X Press memory button M : and one of the arrows on adjustment button ; within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button ? for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Memory function Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rseat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the backrest in the lumbar region Ractive multicontour seat: activated/ deactivated Rmulticontour seat: the side bolsters of the seat cushion and the backrest as well as the contour of the backrest in the lumbar and shoulder regions Rdriver's side: steering wheel position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides G WARNING Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while Memory function 103 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. X Adjust the seat (Y page 94). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 98) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 100). X Press memory button M and then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds until you hear an acknowledgment tone. The settings are stored in the selected storage position. X Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i If you release the storage position button, the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting functions stop immediately. The multicontour seat setting or lumbar support adjustment is still carried out. Z 104 105 106 106 108 127 135 177 195 224 230 COMAND Useful information ............................ Introduction ...................................... At a glance ......................................... System settings ................................ Navigation ......................................... Telephone .......................................... Audio .................................................. Video .................................................. Vehicle ............................................... 106 Introduction Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. COMAND i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Introduction Operating safety General notes G WARNING Making alterations to electronic components can cause malfunctions. Radio, satellite radio, amplifier, DVD changer, navigation module, phone and voice control are networked together. If one component is not functional or if it has been incorrectly removed/replaced, this could impair the operation of other components. This could seriously jeopardize the operational safety of your vehicle. We recommend that you always have maintenance work on electronic components carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G WARNING In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident, the driver should enter system settings while the vehicle is at a standstill, and operate the system only when permitted by road, weather and traffic conditions. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your car covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. COMAND supplies you with information to help you select your route more easily and guide you conveniently and safely to your destination. For safety reasons, we encourage the driver to stop the vehicle in a safe place before answering or placing a call, or consulting the COMAND screen to read navigational maps, instructions, or downloaded information. G WARNING While the navigation system provides directional assistance, the driver must remain focused on safe driving behavior, especially attention to traffic and street signs, and should utilize the system's audio cues while driving. The navigation system does not supply any information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic regulations or traffic safety rules. Their observance always remains in the driver's personal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover all areas nor all routes within an area. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Introduction Change or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. ! Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. G WARNING This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 8 inches (20 cm) and more between the radiator and a person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs.) Correct use malfunctions can seriously jeopardize the operational safety of your vehicle. i Only have repairs or changes to electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Daimler recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i Protection against theft: this device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Function restrictions For safety reasons, some COMAND functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because you will either not be able to select certain menu items or because COMAND will display a message to this effect. To protect the integrated hard drive against damage, COMAND deactivates it at very high temperatures. The following functions will be temporarily unavailable: RNavigation RVoice Control System book RMUSIC REGISTER RAddress Observe the following information when using COMAND: Rthe Rall safety notes in this manual road traffic regulations i Work improperly carried out on electronic components or systems (e.g. radio, DVD changer) and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Even systems that have not been modified could be affected because the electronic systems are connected. Electronic Z COMAND G WARNING 107 108 At a glance Rthe telephone keypad in the glove box (USB, additional USB, jack plug and iPod® connection) Ra remote control for the front passenger Rcordless headphones for the front passenger You can use COMAND to operate the following main functions: At a glance Rconnections COMAND operating system Overview Rthe navigation system audio function with radio and satellite radio modes, disk (audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode), memory card (MP3 mode), MUSIC REGISTER, Media Interface and audio AUX Rthe telephone and the address book Rthe video function with video DVD and video AUX modes Rthe system settings You can call up the main functions: COMAND Rthe Rusing the corresponding function buttons or Rusing the main function bar in the COMAND display COMAND controller Function Page : COMAND display 112 ; COMAND controller and function buttons 108 Telephone keypad 110 = Components of COMAND COMAND consists of: Rthe COMAND display/SPLITVIEW DVD changer Rthe COMAND controller Rthe COMAND function buttons Rthe You can use the COMAND controller to select the menu items in the COMAND display. You can call up menus or lists, scroll through menus or lists and exit menus or lists. At a glance The COMAND controller can be: Function buttons Rpressed The COMAND function buttons allow you to select a main function directly. briefly or pressed and held W Rturned clockwise or counter-clockwise cVd Rslid left or right XVY Rslid forwards or back ZVÆ Rslid diagonally aVb 109 In the instructions, operating sequences are described as follows: Press the R button. Audio mode is activated. X Select Audio by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears. Back button : Function button for roller sunblind ; Function button for the radio and the last audio source used = Back button ? Lumbar support/multicontour seat A Function button for telephone and navigation system B Switches COMAND on/off C Volume control D Programmable button (Y page 109) Example: X To select the radio or CD menu directly: press R button ; once or twice. : Back button X To exit the menu: press back button : briefly. COMAND changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode. Assigning the programmable button (favorites) i You can also exit a menu by sliding XVY or ZVÆ the COMAND controller. X To switch to the basic display: press and hold back button :. COMAND changes to the basic display of the current operating mode. : Programmable button Z COMAND X At a glance 110 You can assign the following predefined functions to the h programmable button: Telephone keypad RECO: you can activate or deactivate the ECO start/stop function. Driver's Seat: you can switch the massage function for the driver's seat on and off. RMassage, Front Passenger's Seat: you can switch the massage function for the front-passenger seat on and off. RMassage, Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat: you can switch the massage function for the driver's and frontpassenger seats on and off. RDisplay OFF: you can switch the COMAND display off or on. RTow-away Alarm: you can arm or deactivate the tow-away alarm. RInterior Motion Sensor: you can arm or deactivate the interior motion sensor. RTow-away Alarm and Interior Motion Sensor: you can arm or deactivate the towaway alarm and the interior motion sensor. RRepeat Navigation Command: you can have the most recent recommendation by the navigation system repeated. X To assign the programmable button: select Vehicle by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select System and press W to confirm. X Select Favorites Button and press W to confirm. The list of predefined functions appears. The # dot in front of the list entry indicates the current setting. COMAND RMassage, X To change the setting: turn cVd the COMAND controller and select the desired function. X To store the setting and exit the menu: press W the COMAND controller. : Telephone keypad ; Folding cover At a glance 111 COMAND display COMAND Display overview The COMAND display shows the function currently selected and its associated menus. The COMAND display is divided into several areas. The radio display is shown in the example. : Status bar ; To call up the audio menu = Main function bar ? Display/selection window A Radio menu bar B Air-conditioning function bar Status bar : shows the current settings for radio and telephone operation. The main functions navigation, audio, telephone and video feature additional menus. This is indicated by triangle ;. The following table lists the available menu items. Main function bar = allows you to call up the desired main function. In the example, the Audio main function is set to radio mode and display/selection window ? is active. Radio menu bar A allows you to operate the radio functions. The air-conditioning functions can be operated in air-conditioning function bar B. Menu overview The table lists the menus available after calling up the main navigation, audio, telephone, video or system function in the main function bar. Z COMAND 112 At a glance Navi Audio Mode Telephone Video Vehicle FM/AM radio Video DVD ECO Map orientation Sat radio AUX Multicontour seat/lumbar settings Point of interest symbols on the map Disc Video off Rear window blind Traffic symbols on the Memory card map EASY-ENTRY/ EXIT system Text information on map MUSIC REGISTER Exterior lighting delayed switch-off O Topographical map Media Interface Interior lighting delayed switch-off O City view USB Ambient lighting O Freeway information AUX O Automatic mirror fold-in function O Volume reduction Audio off O Locator lighting SIRIUS service O Automatic locking Map version O Interior motion sensor O Tow-away alarm O Trunk lid opening height restriction SPLITVIEW SPLITVIEW allows you to simultaneously use different COMAND functions on the frontpassenger side and on the driver's side. Depending on the viewing angle of the display (from the driver's seat or from the frontpassenger seat), you will see two different displays. At a glance Please bear the following in mind RYour vehicle may be equipped with SPLITVIEW, depending on its date of production. The use of SPLITVIEW is currently not permitted in the following states: AL, AZ, CO, IL, LA, MA, MD, NH, PA, VA, VT, WA, WI, and WV or in the Canadian provinces of Manitoba, Newfoundland, New Brunswick, and Prince Edward Island. It is the driver's responsibility to observe ALL regional legally prescribed regulations. If your vehicle is registered in a state or province in which SPLITVIEW is not approved, this function must be deactivated. Please contact an authorized specialist dealer to check whether SPLITVIEW is approved in your state or province. RVolume adjustment for the cordless headphones can be carried out on the headphones. Before putting on the headphones, make sure that the volume has not been set too high. RThe remote control can be used for the volume adjustment of corded headphones. RYou can only use media from the driver's and front-passenger sides separately if the media are from different sources. Example: on the driver's side, an audio CD is being played by the DVD changer. This means that on the front-passenger side, the DVD changer cannot be used to play a different disc type, for instance a video DVD. However, other media can be used at the same time on the front-passenger side, including radio, memory card, MUSIC REGISTER, Media Interface, USB or AUX. RIf you use the same medium on both sides, settings for this medium can be carried out from either side. RThere must be intervisibility between the headphones and the display so that COMAND can optimally transmit music and speech via the infrared signal on the frontpassenger's headphones. For this reason, please also observe that the headphones have left and right sides, and use them correctly. ROnly entertainment functions, i.e. audio and video, can be used separately via SPLITVIEW. RThe multifunction steering wheel can only be used for functions which relate to the driver's side. Switching SPLITVIEW on/off X To switch on SPLITVIEW: select Vehicle from the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The "Vehicle" menu appears. X Select SPLITVIEW ON. SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the display, and display ; switches to SPLITVIEW OFF. X To switch off SPLITVIEW: select Vehicle from the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The "Vehicle" menu appears. X Select SPLITVIEW OFF. Display ; switches to SPLITVIEW ON. i If COMAND has already been switched on, you can also use the remote control to Z COMAND For example, the "Navi" function can be used from the driver's side while the "Video" function is used on the front-passenger side. Use the remote control to operate COMAND from the front-passenger side with SPLITVIEW. 113 At a glance 114 switch SPLITVIEW on and off (Y page 115). COMAND The SPLITVIEW screen remains on for approximately 30 minutes after the SmartKey has been turned to position 0 in the ignition lock. After this time or after the SmartKey has been removed, the settings on the frontpassenger side are saved for approximately 30 minutes longer. After this period, reactivation on the front-passenger side means that the settings from the driver's side will be used. Setting the brightness : Brightness of the instrument cluster Swiveling the COMAND display and setting the brightness lighting ; Brightness of the COMAND display You can swivel the COMAND display4. The buttons are located beside the COMAND display. Brighter or dimmer: Swiveling i If Night View Assist Plus is activated, only X Turn control : or ; clockwise or counterclockwise. the brightness of the multifunction display is adjusted with control :. Display design When the default settings are selected, the display automatically switches between day design and night design. You can change these settings using COMAND (Y page 127). : To swivel the display to the left ; To swivel the display to the right Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the COMAND display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth. The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean the display screen, when necessary, with a commercially available microfiber cloth and cleaning agent for TFT/LCD displays. Then, dry the surface with a dry microfiber cloth. 4 Not with SPLITVIEW. At a glance Remote control Overview You can use the remote control to operate the COMAND display and SPLITVIEW. B Mute C To adjust the volume D To set the station, skip track, fast forward/rewind, for example E To select a station from presets, select a track, enter directly, enter a phone number, for example. F To exit a menu (back) X Point the remote control at the corresponding screen and execute the functions by pressing the corresponding buttons. i The remote control's function may be restricted depending on the angle at which it is pointed at the respective screen. Selecting the screen for the remote control X Turn thumbwheel = until the desired display is highlighted in the window. Switching the button lighting on/off X Press button ; on the remote control. Depending on the previous status, the button lighting is switched on or off. i If you do not use the remote control for about 15 seconds, the button lighting switches off automatically. Mute X : To switch the screen on/off (SPLITVIEW only) ; To switch the button lighting on/off = To select the screen for remote control operation (COMAND or SPLITVIEW can be selected) ? To select a menu or menu item A To confirm a selection or setting Press button B on the remote control. The sound is switched on/off. Adjusting the volume X Press one of buttons C on the remote control. The volume of the currently selected audio or video source changes. For COMAND, you can also adjust the volume for phone calls and navigation messages. Z COMAND Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or abrasive cleaning agents. These could damage the display surface. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage. 115 At a glance 116 Selecting a menu/menu item and confirming your selection COMAND X Press the =;9: buttons to select the menu/menu item and press the 9 button to confirm. At a glance 117 Functions with the E and F button You can use the remote control to execute the same functions as the COMAND control panel. Mode Function Audio mode Selects a station using the station search function (Y page 196) Selects a track by skipping to a track (Y page 208) Fast forward/rewind (Y page 209) Video mode Selects a scene or chapter (video DVD mode) (Y page 227) Functions of the number keypad You can use the remote control to execute the same functions as the COMAND control panel. Mode Function Audio mode Selects stations via the station presets (Y page 196) Sets stations by entering the frequency manually (Y page 196) Stores stations manually (Y page 197) Selects a track (Y page 208) Selects a data medium via the media list (Y page 208) Telephone mode Telephone number entry (Y page 184) Character entry Enters characters (direct entry) (Y page 120) Operating COMAND Selecting a main function Initial situation You would like to change from the telephone menu to the vehicle settings, for example. X Slide ZV the COMAND controller and switch to the main function bar. X Select Vehicle in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The "Vehicle" menu appears. : "Vehicle" menu ; Display/selection window Z COMAND Fast-forward/rewind (video DVD mode) (Y page 226) At a glance 118 Calling up the menu of a main function Selecting a menu item The following example describes how to select a station from the station presets in radio mode. X COMAND X Press the R function button. Select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The station preset memory appears. : To call up the audio menu ; Main function bar If one of the main functions navigation, audio, telephone or video is switched on, triangle : appears next to the entry. You can now select an associated menu. The following example illustrates how to call up the audio menu. X Press the R function button. or X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Audio menu appears. : Selection bar X Select a station by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The station is set. Example of operation Initial situation You would like to switch from the vehicle function to the radio function and select a station from the station list, for example. The following operating example describes how to: Rcall up the audio function on radio mode Rset a station. Rswitch : Current audio operating mode ; Main function bar = Audio menu The # dot indicates the current audio mode. X Select another audio mode, e.g. Radio, by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. At a glance Switching to radio mode Option 1 X Press the R function button. The radio display appears. i Repeated pressing of this function button switches between radio and the most recently active audio source. Option 2 X Select Audio again by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Audio menu appears. : Current audio operating mode ; Main function bar = Audio menu X Press W the COMAND controller and confirm Radio. The radio basic display appears with the waveband last selected. X To set the station: if the display/selection window is activated in the radio display, turn cVd or slide XVY COMAND controller. Entering characters in navigation mode (entering a city) General information Character entry is explained in the following sections using NEW YORK as an example for entering a city. If you want to use the address entry menu (Y page 137) to enter a city, a street or a house number, for example, COMAND provides either a list with a character bar (option 1) or a selection list (option 2). Z COMAND Calling up the audio function X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The basic display of the current audio operating mode, e.g. audio CD, appears. 119 At a glance 120 You can enter the characters using either the character bar or the number keypad. In the selection list, you select an entry to copy it to the address entry menu. COMAND Option 1: city list with character bar X Call up the city list with character bar (Y page 137). The alphabetically sorted city list shows the first available entries. Entering characters using the character bar X Select N by turning COMAND controller cVd and confirm with W. D Currently selected character E Character bar F To cancel an entry G List The list G shows all available town names beginning with N. The list entry that is best suited to previous user entries is always highlighted in the first position =, NANTICOKE in the example. All characters that have been entered are displayed in black, the letter N in the example :. The letters that are added automatically by COMAND are displayed in gray ;, ANTICOKE in the example. Character bar E shows the letters still available for selection in black C. These can be selected; in the example, the letter O is highlighted D. Which characters remain available depends on the characters already entered by the user and on the data stored in the digital map. Characters that are no longer available are shown in gray B. X Select E, W, space, Y in order and confirm each with W. : N character entered by user ; ANTICOKE characters automatically = ? A B C added by COMAND List entry that most closely resembles the current entry by the user To switch to the selection list To delete an entry Characters not currently available Characters currently available Entering characters using the number keypad X Press the telephone keypad's number key p twice in quick succession, to enter the letter N. The character appears at the bottom of the display when the key is pressed. The first available letter is highlighted. At a glance once = M Rpress twice = N Rpress three times = O X Wait until the character display goes out. The entries matching your input are shown in the list. It is also possible to switch the city list to the selection list at any time during character input. X Rpress X Enter E, W, space, Y with the corresponding keys. i The space is entered using number key 9. Further functions in the list with character bar X To delete characters: select F by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To delete an entry: select F and press and hold W the COMAND controller until the entire entry has been deleted. X To switch the character set: select B and press W to confirm. X To cancel an entry: select the & symbol in the bottom left of the character bar and press W to confirm. or X Press the % back button. The address entry menu appears. X To accept the first list entry: press and hold W the COMAND controller until the address entry menu appears. The accepted list entry is shown there. Slide W the COMAND controller repeatedly until the city list appears as a selection list. or X Select ¬ in the character bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Option 2: city list as selection list COMAND either shows the selection list automatically or you can call up the selection list from the list with character bar. The example shows the selection list after the city NEW YORK has been entered. The entry is highlighted automatically. X Confirm NEW YORK with COMAND controller W. The address entry menu appears. You can now enter a street, for example. Calling up the list as a selection list Select the desired city from the selection list. If there are several entries for a city or if several cities of the same name are stored, then ¬ is highlighted in the character bar. X Press W the COMAND controller. Z COMAND You see which characters you can enter with that key. Each time the key is pressed, the next character is selected. Example: key p: 121 122 At a glance i You will find further information in the "Destination entry" section (Y page 137). Entering characters in the address and the phone book COMAND Introduction The following section describes how to enter characters in the phone book/address book when creating a new entry. Creating a new entry in the phone book X Call up the input menu with data fields (Y page 190). Entering characters The example describes how to enter the surname Schulz. X Select S by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. S is entered into the data field. All characters are shown in black and can always be selected in the character bar. The character bar offers characters corresponding to the respective data field (letters or digits). : To switch the character bar to upperPhone book: input menu with data fields : Selected data field with cursor ; Character bar Creating a new entry in the address book X Call up the input menu with data fields (Y page 190). case/lower-case letters ; To switch the character bar from upper/ lower-case letters to digits = To change the language of the character bar ? To delete a character/an entry X Select c and confirm by pressing W the COMAND controller. The letter c is added to S in the data field. X Repeat the process until the name has been entered in full. X Input menu with data fields : Selected data field with cursor ; Character bar To enter a phone number: select the digits one by one in the corresponding data field by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Switching data fields If you want to enter a first name after you have entered a surname, for example, proceed as follows to switch between the data fields: At a glance Option 1 X Select 4 or 5 in the character bar and press W to confirm. The input menu shows the data field selected. X To change the language of the character bar: select B and press W to confirm. X Select the language by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. To reposition the cursor within the data field: select 2 or 3 and press W to confirm. COMAND X : Cursor in the next data field ; To store an entry = 4 and 5 icons to select a data field Option 2 X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the character bar disappears. X Select the data field by sliding ZVÆ and press W to confirm. Storing an entry X Select ¬ in the character bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The entry is stored in the address book. Further functions available in the character bar X To switch the character bar to upper/ lower-case characters: select * or E and press W to confirm. X To switch the character set: select p and press W to confirm. The character set switches between upper/lower-case letters and digits. 123 : Cursor (repositioned) ; 2 and 3 icon to reposition the cursor X Delete the character/entry (Y page 191). Basic functions of COMAND Switching COMAND on/off X Press the u function button on the center console. i If you switch off COMAND, playback of the current audio or video source will also be switched off. You cannot switch off COMAND while making a call via COMAND. You can also make phone calls using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel when COMAND is switched off (Y page 331). Z At a glance COMAND 124 Mute Adjusting the volume Switching audio and video sources on/off X Press the 8 button on the multifunction steering wheel. The sound from the respective audio or video source is switched on or muted. i When the sound is off, the system displays the , symbol in the status line. When you change the audio or video source, or adjust the volume, sound automatically switches on again. Adjusting the volume for the audio or video source i Even if the sound is switched off, you will still hear traffic and navigation system announcements. Switching off Traffic program and navigation announcements completely X Traffic program: press the 8 button until the . message disappears from the status bar of the display. A confirmation tone sounds. X Navigation announcements: during an announcement, press the 8 button on the multifunction steering wheel. Switching Traffic program and navigation announcements on again X Traffic program: press and hold down the 8 button until the . display appears in the status bar. A confirmation tone sounds. X Navigation messages: select the y symbol in the navigation menu bar and press W to confirm. i The navigation announcements are activated again if you switch COMAND off and on again or start a new route guidance. X To adjust: turn thumbwheel :. or X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. The volume of the currently selected audio or video source changes. You can also adjust the volume for the following: Rtraffic announcements announcements Rphone calls RVoice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) Rnavigation Adjusting the volume for navigation announcements During a navigation announcement: X Turn thumbwheel :. or X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. Adjusting the volume for phone calls You can adjust the volume for hands-free mode during a telephone call. X Turn thumbwheel :. or X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. At a glance 125 Adjusting the sound settings X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You can now set the treble and bass or the balance and fader for radio mode. To set the treble : Last setting selected ; Current setting X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The setting is stored and you exit the menu. Adjusting balance and fader With the Balance function, you can control whether the sound is louder on the driver's or front-passenger side. The Fade function is used to control whether the sound is louder in the front or the rear of the vehicle. X Select Balance/Fader in the sound menu by turning cVd and press W to confirm. Adjusting treble and bass X Select Treble or Bass in the sound menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. An adjustment scale appears. : Current setting X Select a setting by sliding ZVÆ or XVY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The setting is stored and you exit the menu. Z COMAND Calling up the sound menu You can make various sound settings for the different audio and video sources. This means that it is possible to set more bass for radio mode than for audio CD mode, for example. You can call up the respective sound menu from the menu of the desired mode. The example describes how to call up the sound menu in radio mode. X Press the R function button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last waveband. 126 At a glance Surround sound General information If your vehicle is equipped with the harman/ kardon® Logic 7® surround sound system, you can set the optimum surround sound for every passenger. The harman/kardon®Logic 7® surround sound system is available for the following operating modes: (FM only) radio Raudio CD Raudio DVD (MLP, dts, PCM and Dolby Digital audio formats) RMP3 (including SD memory card) RMedia Interface Rvideo DVD (PCM, dts and Dolby Digital audio formats) RAUX Because some DVDs contain both stereo and multichannel audio formats, it may be necessary to set the audio format (Y page 211). Dolby Digital Rradio COMAND Rsatellite dts Switching surround sound on/off Example: switching on surround sound for radio mode X Press the R function button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last waveband. i The Logic7® ON function enables playback of, e.g. stereo recordings with a surround sound experience for every passenger. It enables optimum playback of music and films on CD, audio DVD or video DVD with multichannel audio formats, such as MLP, dts or Dolby Digital. This results in sound characteristics like those intended by the sound engineer when the original was recorded. i If you select LOGIC7® OFF, the sound system plays the tracks as stored on the medium. Due to the design of the passenger compartment, an optimum audio experience cannot be guaranteed for all passengers. i Discs which support the audio formats mentioned have the following logos: X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select 3D Sound and press W to confirm. System settings 127 System settings Display settings Switching the display on/off : Current setting Select Vehicle by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Display OFF by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X X Select the Logic7® ON or Logic7® OFF setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Depending on your selection, surround sound is switched on or off and the menu is exited. X To exit the menu without saving: press the % back button or slide XVY the COMAND controller. i Please bear the following in mind: For an optimum audio experience on all seats when Logic7® is switched on, balance and fader should be set to the center of the passenger compartment. You will achieve the best sound results by playing high-quality audio and video DVDs. MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least 128 kbit/s. Surround-sound playback does not function for mono signal sources, such as AM radio mode. If radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel, you should switch off Logic 7®, as it may otherwise switch between stereo and mono and cause temporary sound distortions. On some stereo recordings, the sound characteristics may differ from conventional stereo playback. To switch on the display: press W or cVd turn the COMAND controller. Display design Your COMAND display features optimized designs for operation during daytime and night-time hours. You can customize the design to suit your personal preferences by manually selecting day or night design or opt for an automatic setting. X Select Vehicle by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Display and press W to confirm. X Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Automatic by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The # icon indicates the current setting. Z COMAND X COMAND 128 System settings Design Explanation Day Mode The display is set permanently to day design. Night Mode The display is set permanently to night design. Automatic The display design changes depending on the brightness around the vehicle. Setting the time X Select Vehicle in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Time and press W to confirm. i In the Automatic setting, COMAND evaluates the readings from the automatic vehicle light sensor and switches between the display designs automatically. Time settings General information If COMAND is equipped with a navigation system and has GPS reception, COMAND automatically sets the time and date. You can also adjust the time yourself in 30-minute increments, but the date cannot be changed. i If you set the time in 30-minute increments, any time zone settings and settings for changing between summer and standard time are lost (Y page 129). i The following navigation system functions require the time, time zone and summer/ standard time to be set correctly in order to work properly: Rroute guidance on routes with timedependent traffic guidance Rcalculation of expected time of arrival : Setting the time ; Current date (set automatically by COMAND) X Set the time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Setting the time/date format X Select Vehicle in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Format and press W to confirm. The # symbols show the current settings. System settings Meaning DD/MM/YYYY Day/Month/Year (date format) HH/MM Hours/Minutes (time format) You can set the 24-hour or the AM/PM format. X Set the format by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Setting the time zone and switching between summer and standard time Text reader settings Setting the text reader speed X Select Vehicle by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select System and press W to confirm. X Select Text Reader and press W to confirm. X Select Set text reader speed and press W to confirm. A list appears. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Vehicle in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Time Zone and press W to confirm. You will see a list of time zones. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select the time zone and press W to confirm. X To switch automatic changeover on/ off: select Automatic Daylight Savings Time or Automatic Daylight Savings Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The # dot indicates the current setting. Voice Control System settings Opening/closing the help window In addition to the audible instructions, the help window will show you other information during voice control operation and the individualization process. X Select Vehicle in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Voice Control by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Help Window and press W to confirm. You have switched the help window on O or off ª. Z COMAND Abbreviation 129 System settings 130 X Select Start New Individualization and press W to confirm. You see and hear a prompt asking whether you would like further information. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select No, the first part of individualization begins. You will be asked whether you would like to train digits or voice commands. If you select Yes, you will see and hear information on the individualization process. The first part of individualization then begins automatically. X To close the display: press W the COMAND controller. You will be asked whether you would like to train digits or voice commands. COMAND Individualization Introduction You can use the individualization function to fine tune the Voice Control System to your voice and therefore improve voice recognition. This means that other users' voices will not be recognized as easily. For this reason this function can be switched off. Individualization comprises two parts and takes approximately 5 minutes. It consists of training the system to recognize a certain number of digit sequences and voice commands. Starting new individualization Individualization can only be started when the vehicle is stationary. Before starting, switch off all devices or functions which could interfere, such as the radio or the navigation system. After starting the session, the system guides you through the training with spoken instructions. X Select Vehicle in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Voice Control and press W to confirm. At the end of the first part, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to begin the second part. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select No, individualization will be canceled. The data from the first part is stored automatically. If you select Yes, the second part will begin. Individualization is completed at the end of the second part. You will see a message to this effect. The data from the second part is stored automatically. System settings 131 Bluetooth® settings General information about Bluetooth® Bluetooth® technology is the standard for short-range wireless data transmission of up to approximately 10 meters. Bluetooth® allows, for example, the exchange of vCards. Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes, individualization will be canceled. The data from the part during which you exited is not stored. If you select No, the current part begins again. Deleting existing individualization data X Select Vehicle by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X X Select System and press W to confirm. Select Voice Control and press W to confirm. X Select Delete Individualization and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to delete. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select No, the process will be aborted. If you select Yes, the individualization is deleted. You will see a message to this effect. COMAND Canceling the first or second part of individualization X Confirm Cancel by pressing W the COMAND controller. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to cancel. Requirements for a Bluetooth® connection You can connect mobile phones and notebooks to COMAND. To do so, the following conditions need to be met: RBluetooth®-capable devices, e.g. mobile phones, must comply with a certain profile in order to be connected to COMAND. Every Bluetooth® device has its own specific Bluetooth® name. RBluetooth® must be activated in COMAND and on the respective Bluetooth® device; see the separate operating instructions. Rthe Bluetooth® device must be "visible" to COMAND in order for COMAND to find and display it. For the setting procedures, please see the operating instructions for the Bluetooth® device. i Once a mobile phone has been connected, reception and transmission volume may change. Z System settings 132 Activating/deactivating Bluetooth® X COMAND Select Vehicle in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Bluetooth by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Bluetooth activated and press W to confirm. This switches Bluetooth® on O or off ª. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Bluetooth by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Search for Bluetooth Devices and press W to confirm. X Select Update and press W to confirm. COMAND searches for Bluetooth® devices within range. After a short while, the Bluetooth® device list appears. Connecting Bluetooth® devices General information Before using your Bluetooth® device with COMAND for the first time, you will need to connect it. Connecting comprises: for a Bluetooth® device Rsubsequently authorizing it Rsearching i A maximum of 15 devices can be available for selection from the device list. More detailed information on suitable mobile phones and on connecting Bluetooth®capable mobile phones to COMAND can be found on the Internet at http:// www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer Relations on 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada). Searching for Bluetooth® devices X Activate Bluetooth® (Y page 132). X Select Vehicle in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Example of display: Bluetooth® device list : Currently connected # and authorized device (Y icon) ; Device not within range but previously authorized (L appears in gray) = Newly detected device in range, not yet authorized Ï The Bluetooth® device list shows all devices within range and all previously authorized devices, whether or not they are in range. If the Bluetooth® device list is already full, you will be requested to de-authorize a device. If COMAND does not detect your Bluetooth® device, external authorization may be necessary (Y page 133). Authorizing a Bluetooth® device (registering) X In the Bluetooth® device list, select not yet authorized device = by turning cVd the COMAND controller. System settings Select Options by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Authorize and press W to confirm. or X Press W to confirm the selected device. The input menu for the passcode appears. The passcode is any one to sixteen-digit number combination which you can choose yourself. You must enter the same number combination in COMAND and in the Bluetooth® device to be authorized (see mobile phone operating instructions). i Some mobile phones require a passcode with four or more digits. i If you want to reauthorize a device following de-authorization (Y page 134), you can select a different passcode. X To enter a passcode in COMAND: press the number keys in sequence. ¬ can be selected after the first number has been entered. or X X Select the digits one by one by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. To confirm an entry in COMAND: select ¬ using the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X X Enter the same passcode into the Bluetooth® device (see the operating instructions for the respective device). The device is authorized. External authorization If COMAND does not detect your Bluetooth® device, this may be due to particular security settings on your Bluetooth® device. In this case, you can test if your Bluetooth® device can find COMAND. The Bluetooth® device name of COMAND is "MB Bluetooth". X Select Update. X Select Options by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select External Authorization and press W to confirm. X Start the Bluetooth® scan process on the Bluetooth® device (see separate operating instructions of the respective device). X Select COMAND ("MB Bluetooth"). i The order in which the passkey is entered depends on the mobile phone. X Enter the passkey on the Bluetooth® device when prompted. X Confirm the Do you want to authorize XX? question in COMAND with Yes. X Enter the passkey in COMAND. Displaying the details of a Bluetooth® device X In the Bluetooth® device list, select the desired device by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Select Options by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select SEND on the telephone keypad. Z COMAND X 133 System settings 134 X Select Details and press W to confirm. The detailed display for this device appears. X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller. COMAND De-authorizing (de-registering) a Bluetooth® device Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends deauthorization in both COMAND and the Bluetooth® device, e.g. the mobile phone. Subsequent authorization may otherwise fail. X In the Bluetooth® device list, select the authorized device by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Select Options by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select De-authorize and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to de-authorize this device. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes, the authorization for the device will be revoked. If you select No, the process will be aborted. i If a Bluetooth® device has been deauthorized and is out of range, when a new search is carried out it will not appear in the Bluetooth® device list. System language settings This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation messages. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. When you set the system language, the language of the Voice Control System will change accordingly. If the selected language is not supported by the Voice Control System, "English" will be selected. X Select Vehicle by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select System and press W to confirm. X Select Language and press W to confirm. The list of languages appears. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select the language by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND loads the selected language and sets it. Reset function You can reset COMAND to the factory settings. Amongst other things, this will delete all personal data (e.g. station presets, address book entries, entries in the destination memory and in the list of previous destinations in the navigation system). Resetting is recommended before selling or transferring ownership of your vehicle, for example. X Select Vehicle in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Reset and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to reset. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select No, the process will be aborted. If you select Yes, another prompt appears asking whether you really wish to reset. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes, a message will be shown. COMAND is reset and restarted. If you select No, the process will be aborted. Navigation Introduction Safety notes G WARNING For safety reasons, only enter a destination when the vehicle is stationary. When the vehicle is in motion, a passenger should enter the destination. Study manual and select route before driving. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. COMAND calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following: RTraffic lights RStop and right-of-way-signs RLane merging RParking or stopping prohibited areas ROther road and traffic rules and regulations RNarrow bridges G WARNING COMAND may give incorrect navigation commands if the data in the digital map does not correspond with the actual road/traffic situation. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor all routes within an area. For example, if the traffic routing has been changed or the direction of a one-way road has been reversed. For this reason, you must always observe applicable road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over the navigation commands generated by the system. G WARNING Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. General information Operational readiness of the navigation system The navigation system must determine the position of the vehicle before first use or whenever operational status is restored. Therefore, you may have to drive for a while before precise route guidance is possible. GPS reception Correct functioning of the navigation system depends, amongst other things, on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages. Entry restriction On vehicles for certain countries, there is a restriction on entering data. The restriction is active from a vehicle speed of over approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). As soon as speed falls below approximately 2 mph (3 km/h), the restriction becomes inactive. When the restriction is active, certain entries cannot be made. This will be indicated by the fact that certain menu items are grayed out and cannot be selected. The following functions, for example, may therefore not be available while the vehicle is in motion: Rentering the destination city and street a destination via the map Rentering points of interest in the vicinity of a city or via a name search Rediting entries Rusing the number keypad for direct entry Rentering Z COMAND Navigation 135 Navigation 136 Switching to navigation mode X Press the S function button once or twice. or Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. In both cases, you will see the map either with or without the menu shown. COMAND X "Route guidance inactive" means that no destination has been entered and that no route has been calculated. Showing/hiding the menu X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND controller over the map. The Full Screen menu item is shown. X Confirm the Full Screen menu item shown by pressing W. The map can be seen in the full-screen display. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller when the map is shown in fullscreen. Basic settings Route mode Map showing the menu; route guidance inactive : Current vehicle position Setting route type and route options You can select the following route types: RFast Map without the menu; route guidance inactive : Current vehicle position ; Map orientation selected = Map scale selected "Route guidance active" means that you have entered a destination and that COMAND has calculated the route. The display then shows the route, changes of direction and lane recommendations. Navigation announcements guide you to your destination. 5 Traffic reports are not available in all countries. Route: COMAND calculates the route with the shortest (minimized) journey time. RDynamic Route: same route type as Fast Route. In addition, COMAND takes traffic reports into account during route guidance5. Thus, the navigation system is able to guide you around a blocked section, for example. If a faster route is determined due to a received RDS-TMC traffic announcement, the navigation system changes the route. If possible, it will bypass blocked roads. REco Route: the ECO route is an economical route that takes traffic announcements into account (see dynamic route). RShort Route: COMAND calculates the route with the shortest possible (minimized) route distance. In addition to route types, route options can also be set. Navigation You can select the following route options: If you change the route type and/or the route options while route guidance is inactive (no destination has been entered yet), COMAND uses the new setting for the next route guidance. RUse RMinimize X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Mode and press W to confirm. i The route calculated may, for example, include ferry connections, even if the Minimize Ferries route option is switched on. In some cases, e.g. when calculating particularly long routes, COMAND may not be able to take all the selected route options into account. A note then appears in the COMAND display. X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND controller. Destination entry Introduction to destination entry G WARNING For safety reasons, only enter a new destination when the vehicle is stationary. You could otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. The following destination entry options are available: : To select the route type ; To set route options X Select a route type and press W to confirm. The ä icon indicates the current setting. X Select the route option(s) and press W to confirm. The route options are switched on O or off ª, depending on the previous status. Rentering a destination by address Rentering a destination from the destination memory Rentering a destination from the list of last destinations Rentering a destination using the map Rentering an intermediate stop Rentering a point of interest i If you change the route type and/or the route options while route guidance is active (the route has been calculated), COMAND will calculate a new route. Z COMAND Carpool Lanes highways RMinimize Toll Roads RMinimize Tunnels RMinimize Ferries RMinimize Motorail Trains If you select route options with a tick, the corresponding types of roads will be avoided in the route guidance where possible. X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. 137 Navigation 138 Entering a destination by address Introduction When entering an address as the destination, you have the following options: X Select Address Entry and press W to confirm. The address entry menu appears. If you have previously entered a destination, this will be shown in the display. Rentering the state/province, city/ZIP code and street the state/province, city/zip code and center Rentering the state/province, city/zip code, street and house number Rentering the state/province, city/zip code, street and intersection Rentering the state/province, street, city and house number Rentering the state/province, street, house number and city Rentering the state/province, street, intersection and city COMAND Rentering i You can only enter those cities, streets, zip codes etc. that are stored in the digital map. This means that for some countries, you cannot enter zip codes, for example. Example: entering an address The following is a step-by-step example of how to enter an address. The destination address is as follows: New York (state) New York City 40 Broadway You can of course enter any country, city, street and house number desired and enter, for example, your home address (My address). Calling up the address entry menu X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. Address entry menu Depending on the sequence in which you enter the address and on the data status of the digital map, some menu items may not be available at all or may not yet be available. Example: after you have entered the state/ province, the No., Center, Intersection, Save and Start menu items are not yet available; the Zip Code menu item is not available if the digital map does not contain ZIP codes. Selecting a state/province X Select State/Prov. in the address entry menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu with the available lists appears. The state/province in which the vehicle is located is selected by default. Navigation States/Provinces (U.S.) RProvinces (Canada) X To select a list: turn cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The list of selected states/provinces appears. X To select a state/province: turn cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The address entry menu appears again. The state/province selected has now been entered. 139 RLast RStates Option 1: city list with character bar X Enter NEW YORK CITY. Instructions for entering characters can be found in the "Entering characters in navigation mode (entering a city)" section (Y page 119). X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection. The address entry menu appears again. The city has now been entered. Entering a street name X Select Street in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the street list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). Option 1: street list with character bar X Enter BROADWAY. Instructions for entering characters using city input as an example can be found in the "Entering characters in navigation mode (entering a city)" section (Y page 119). Option 2: city list as selection list Option 2: street list as selection list Z COMAND Entering the city X Select City in the address entry menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the city list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). City list Navigation 140 COMAND Street list X Select a street by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection. The address entry menu appears again. The street has now been entered. Entering the house number It is not possible to enter a house number until a street has been entered. X Select No. in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The character bar appears. X Enter a house number. Instructions for entering characters using city input as an example can be found in the "Entering characters in navigation mode (entering a city)" section (Y page 119). X Confirm the entry with W. The address entry menu appears again. The house number has now been entered. Ambiguity of city names If several cities share the same name, you can also directly input or select a street name. COMAND then selects the city where the respective street is found. X Enter a city as described above (Y page 138). X Select ALL. X Enter or select the street name. X Select the appropriate city. If you know the city well, you can continue directly after selecting the city from the list. Starting route calculation You can now have COMAND calculate the route to the address entered or save the address first, e.g. as your home address (My address) (Y page 141). COMAND checks whether the destination is unambiguous. If the destination is ambiguous, further information is requested to define the destination unambiguously, e.g. an area of city or a zip code. Address entry menu with destination address : Destination address ; To start route calculation Navigation In the address entry menu, confirm Start by pressing W. If no other route has been calculated, route calculation starts immediately (Option 1). If another route has already been calculated (route guidance is active), a prompt appears (option 2). Option 1 – no route guidance active: route calculation starts. While route calculation is in progress, an arrow will indicate the direction to your destination. Below this, you will see a message, e.g. Fast route is being calculated. Once the route has been calculated, route guidance begins. If the vehicle is traveling on a non-digitized road, the system displays the linear distance to the destination, the direction of the destination and the Street Unknown message. In this case, the display will be grayed out. Option 2 – route guidance is already active: if route guidance is already active, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to terminate the currently active route guidance. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes, COMAND will stop route guidance and start route calculation for the new destination. If you select No, COMAND will continue with the active route guidance. i Route calculation takes a certain amount of time. The time depends on the distance from the destination, for example. COMAND calculates the route using the digital map data. The calculated route may differ from the ideal route, e.g. due to roadwork or incomplete map data. Please also refer to the notes about the digital map (Y page 172). X Option 1: enter the address, e.g. a city, street and house number (Y page 138). X Once you have entered the address, select Save in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Save as "My Address" and press W to confirm. COMAND stores your home address as My Address in the destination memory. X Option 2: proceed as described under "Option 1". A prompt appears asking whether the current home address should be overwritten. X Select Yes and press W to confirm. After selecting Yes, the Save successful message appears. COMAND X Entering a ZIP code Entering a ZIP code will delete a previously entered city. X Select Zip Code in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You see the list of zip codes with the character bar. X 141 Enter a ZIP code. Instructions for entering characters using city input as an example can be found in the "Entering characters in navigation mode (entering a city)" section (Y page 119). Entering and saving your home address You can either enter your home address for the first time (option 1) or edit a previously stored home address (option 2). Z Navigation 142 COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the center list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). Option 1: center list with character bar X COMAND : Digits entered by the user ; Digits automatically added by the system Enter a center. Instructions for entering characters using city input as an example can be found in the "Entering characters in navigation mode (entering a city)" section (Y page 119). = List entry most closely resembling the characters entered so far ? To switch to the list without the character bar A To delete the entire entry: press and hold; to delete the last character: press briefly B Available characters C Selected character D Unavailable characters E Character bar Option 2: center list as selection list F To cancel an entry G List X X Confirm the entry with W. If COMAND is able to assign the ZIP code unambiguously to a specific address, the address entry menu appears again. The ZIP code appears in place of the city's name. If COMAND cannot assign the ZIP code unambiguously to a specific address, the address entry menu also appears again. The ZIP code is automatically entered. For a more precise location, you can now enter, for example, the street, a city, a center or a POI. X Select a center by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection. The address entry menu appears again. The center selected has been entered. X Start route calculation (Y page 140). Start route calculation (Y page 140). Entering a center Entering a center will, for example, delete a previously entered street. X Select Center (center) in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the Navigation Option 1: intersection list with character bar X Enter an intersection. Instructions for entering characters using city input as an example can be found in the "Entering characters in navigation mode (entering a city)" section (Y page 119). : List entry most closely resembling the characters entered so far ; List X Select an intersection by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection. The address entry menu appears again. The intersection selected has been entered. X Start route calculation (Y page 140). Selecting a destination from the destination memory (e.g. My address) Introduction The destination memory always contains an entry named "My address". You may wish to assign your home address to this entry, for example (Y page 141), and select it for route guidance. This entry is always located at the top of the list in the destination memory. X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. X Select From Memory and press W to confirm. X Select My Address by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection. "My address" has been entered. X To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. = Character bar Option 2: intersection list as selection list Entering a destination from the list of last destinations X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. Z COMAND Entering an intersection name Entering an intersection will delete a previously entered house number. X Select Intersection (intersection) in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the intersection list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). 143 Navigation 144 X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. X Select From Last Destinations and press W to confirm. on the same street: call up an address destination from the last destinations. X Select Change by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. All destination entry functions are available. X Edit/enter the destination as described for destination entry (Y page 137). Entering a destination using the map COMAND Calling up the map X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. X Select Via Map and press W to confirm. You see the map with the crosshair. "Last destinations" list : Last destination X Select the desired destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. The destination address selected has been entered. X To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. Once the route has been calculated, route guidance begins (Y page 150). i Further information on the "Last destinations" memory can be found on (Y page 165). X To navigate to another street in the same city or to another house number : Current vehicle position ; Crosshair = Details of the crosshair position ? Map scale selected Display = depends on the settings selected in "Map information in the display" (Y page 169). The current street name can be shown, provided the digital map contains the necessary data, or the coordinates of the crosshair if the geo-coordinate display is Navigation Entering an intermediate stop Moving the map and selecting the destination X To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller. Introduction When route guidance is active, you can enter an intermediate stop. Intermediate stops can be predefined destinations from the following categories that COMAND offers for selection: X RMercedes-Benz To set the map scale: as soon as you turn cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar appears. X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set. Turning clockwise zooms out from the map; turning counter-clockwise zooms in. X To select a destination: press W the COMAND controller once or several times. You will see either the address entry menu with the destination address or, if COMAND is unable to assign a unique address, a selection list. Service Center RHospital RGas Station Lot RRestaurant However, you can also enter destinations other than the predefined ones. To do this select the menu item Other. You can use the intermediate stop function to influence route guidance to the main destination. When you have reached your intermediate stop, COMAND automatically recalculates the route to the main destination. RParking Entering predefined destinations X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X X Select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If the destination is within the limits of the digital map, COMAND attempts to assign the destination to the map. If the destination can be assigned, you will see the address entry menu with the address of the destination. If not, you will see the entry Destination from Map. To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. X Select Stopover and press W to confirm. Option 1: no intermediate stop has been entered yet. X Select a category; see option 2. Option 2: an intermediate stop has already been entered. X Select Change Stopover and press W to confirm. Z COMAND switched on and the GPS signal is strong enough. 145 Navigation 146 COMAND X To select a category: select a category by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. COMAND first searches in the selected category for destinations along the route. If there are no destinations available there, COMAND searches for destinations within a radius of up to 100 km of the vehicle position. If COMAND finds destinations, a list appears on the right-hand side of the display. The currently selected point of interest is highlighted on the left-hand side of the map. The intermediate stops are listed according to increasing distance from the current vehicle position. They are displayed in the form of a name and their position in relation to the route and your direction of travel. If COMAND does not find any destinations, you will see a message to this effect. X X X Selection Step Address Entry X Enter a destination by address (Y page 138). From Memory X Select a destination from the destination memory (Y page 143). From Last Destinations X Select a destination from the list of last destinations (Y page 143). From POIs X Enter a point of interest (Y page 147). Confirm OK by pressing W. Select a different category. X Select the intermediate stop by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. X To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. Entering another destination as an intermediate stop X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. X Select Stopover and press W to confirm. X Select Other and press W to confirm. Select Address Entry, From Memory, From Last Destinations or From POIs. X To start route calculation: once you have entered a destination, select Start and press W to confirm. Deleting an intermediate stop If an intermediate stop has already been entered, you can delete it. X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. X Select Stopover and press W to confirm. Navigation Select Delete Stopover and press W to confirm. COMAND deletes the intermediate stop and recalculates the route to the main destination. Entering a point of interest Initiating point of interest entry X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select From POIs and press W to confirm. A menu appears. Entering a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination Entering a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination is only possible when route guidance is active. X Select Destination Area from the menu and press W to confirm. X Continue with assigning the point of interest category (Y page 148). Entering a point of interest in the vicinity of the current position X Select Current Position and press W to confirm. X Continue with assigning the point of interest category (Y page 148). Entering a point of interest in the vicinity of a specific city Option 1 X Select Other City in the menu and press W to confirm. X If desired, select the state/province (Y page 137). X To enter a city: select City and press W to confirm. Proceed as described in the "Entering a city" section (Y page 137). X After entering the city, select the point of interest category (Y page 148). Option 2 X Enter an address in the address entry menu, e.g. a city, street and house number (Y page 137). X Select POI and press W to confirm. X Select the point of interest category (Y page 148). Entering a point of interest using name search This function allows you to access all the points of interest available on the digital map. X Select By Name from the menu and press W to confirm. You will see a list of further selection options. X Select the desired option and press W to confirm. X Enter the name using the character bar. Entering a point of interest using the phone number search This function gives you access to all points of interest that have a phone number. X Select By Telephone Number and press W to confirm. You will see a list of phone numbers. Z COMAND X 147 Navigation 148 X Enter the phone number using the character bar. X Assigning a point of interest category Introduction The categories and points of interest available depend on the distance from the vehicle position you have set for the point of interest. COMAND Rpoint of interest in the vicinity of the destination: Alphabetically sorted categories, as well as points of interest in the vicinity of the target destination and sorted by distance are available. Rpoint of interest in the vicinity of the current position: Alphabetically sorted categories are available, as well as points of interest in the vicinity of the vehicle position arranged by distance. Rpoint of interest within a given city: If you have entered only the state/province and the city, the system will return alphabetically sorted categories and points of interest within the city limits. If you have entered more than the state/ province and the city, the system will return alphabetically sorted categories and points of interest sorted by distance, all in the vicinity of the address you entered. Rpoint of interest using name search: An alphabetically sorted list of all points of interest is available. The list sorts points of interest with the same name and in the same category according to distance, starting with those nearest to you. Selecting a category X Select a main category by turning cVd the COMAND controller. Confirm the entry with W. If the selected main category does not contain any sub-categories, the point of interest list appears. If the selected main category contains subcategories, a list of the subcategories appears with the input speller. X Select a category by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Confirm the entry with W. The point of interest list appears. It contains the points of interest available in the sub-category that are within the search radius. i Search radius means: COMAND searches within a radius of 100 km. If COMAND does not find any points of interest within this radius, it extends its search range to approximately 200 km. If COMAND finds one point of interest within this radius, it finishes the search. i If you select the ALL list item, the point of interest list contains all points of interest for all subcategories in the Restaurant main category which lie within the search radius. Point of interest list Introduction The illustration below shows an example of the point of interest list for the Restaurant main category in the vicinity of the current position. i Depending on the point of interest selected, COMAND uses different reference points in determining the linear distance to the destination: Rvicinity of current position: the linear distance is the distance of the point of Navigation 149 Selecting a point of interest X Select a point of interest by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The complete address of the point of interest selected is shown. X X To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. X To store an address in the destination memory: select Save and press W to confirm. You can now select storage options (Y page 163). X To show the detailed view: select Details and press W to confirm. X To make a call: select Call and press W to confirm (only available if the point of interest contains a telephone book entry and a telephone is connected to COMAND). COMAND switches to telephone mode (Y page 183). X To call up the map: select Map and press W to confirm. X You can move the map and select the destination (Y page 144). Select the entry with the Z icon by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The ZAGAT evaluations appear. 1 ZAGAT ratings 2 To display details X To show a description: select Details and press W to confirm. ZAGAT® Survey service Entries with the Z icon contain additional ZAGAT information. ZAGAT rates restaurants, for instance, in regard to the quality of the food, furnishing, service, and provides an average pricing level as well as a general description. ZAGAT example description Z COMAND interest from the current vehicle position. Rvicinity of destination: the linear distance is the distance from the destination entered to the point of interest. Navigation 150 Selecting a point of interest using the map You can select points of interest that are available in the selected (visible) section of the map. X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. COMAND X : Highlighted point of interest X Slide ZV the COMAND controller forwards and thereby activate the display window. The map with highlighted point of interest : is shown. X To highlight the next point of interest: select Next in the menu bar by turning cVd and sliding YVX the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To highlight the previous point of interest: select Previous in the menu bar by turning cVd and sliding YVX the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To display details of a point of interest: select Details in the menu bar by turning cVd and sliding YVX the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Route guidance General notes G WARNING COMAND calculates the route to the destination without taking into account the following, for example: RTraffic lights RStop and right-of-way signs RLane merging RParking or stopping prohibited areas ROther road and traffic rules and regulations RNarrow bridges COMAND may give incorrect navigation commands if the data in the digital map does not correspond with the actual road/ traffic situation. For example, if the traffic routing has been changed or the direction of a oneway road has been reversed. For this reason, you must always observe applicable road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over the navigation commands generated by the system. Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated (Y page 140). COMAND guides you to your destination by means of navigation commands in the form of audible navigation announcements and route guidance displays. The route guidance displays can only be seen if the display is switched to navigation mode. If you do not follow the navigation announcements or if you leave the calculated route, COMAND automatically calculates a new route to the destination. If the digital map contains the corresponding information, the following applies: Rwhen selecting a route, COMAND tries to avoid roads that only have limited access, Navigation e.g. roads closed to through traffic and nonresidents. Rroads that have time restrictions (e.g. closed on Sundays and public holidays) are avoided for route guidance. Change of direction Introduction Changes of direction have three phases: Rpreparation phase phase Rchange-of-direction phase 151 before the change of direction with the request Please turn right in 900 ft. The announced distance to the next change of direction depends on the type of road and its permissible speed limit. The display is now split into two sectors. In the left half, you see the normal map view. The right half shows an enlarged section of the area around the intersection (Crossing Zoom) or a 3D image of the road's course with the route indicating the next maneuver. COMAND Rannouncement Preparation phase COMAND prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. Based on the example display below, the change of direction is announced with a message. You see the fullscreen map. Example display: announcement phase : Next road ; Point at which the change of direction = ? Example display: preparation phase : Next road ; Route = Current vehicle position (the tip of the triangle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel) ? Current road The display in ? depends on the setting selected under "Text information on the map" (Y page 169). Announcement phase COMAND announces the imminent change of direction. With reference to the following example display, the announcement is given A B takes place (light blue dot, shown in both the left and right displays) Graphic representation of the distance to the next change of direction Change of direction (turn right here) Distance to the next change of direction Route (highlighted in blue, shown in both the left and right displays) i The filled-in section of visual display for distance = gets shorter, the nearer you get to the announced change of direction. Change-of-direction phase COMAND announces the imminent change of direction. In the example, the Now turn right announcement is made 100 ft. before the change of direction. The display is split into two halves, as in the announcement phase. Z 152 Navigation COMAND Example display: change-of-direction phase : Current vehicle position: the tip of the triangle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel ; Graphic representation of the distance to the next change of direction = Distance to the next change of direction Once the change of direction is completed, COMAND automatically switches back to fullscreen display. Lane recommendations Overview On multilane roads, COMAND can display lane recommendations for the next change of direction. The corresponding data must be available in the digital map. COMAND displays lane recommendations B, based on the next two changes of direction. The number of lanes applies to the point at which the next change of direction is required. Example display : Point of the next change in direction (light blue circle) ; Point of the change of direction after next = Next change of direction (in this case, turn off to the right) ? Graphic representation of the distance to the next change of direction A Distance to the next change of direction B Possible lane (light blue) C Recommended lane (dark blue) D Lane not recommended (gray) E Current vehicle position: the tip of the triangle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel i The multifunction display also shows lane recommendations. Only the recommended lanes are displayed here. (Y page 335). Navigation 153 Display and description of lane recommendations The colors used in the lane recommendation display vary depending on whether day or night design is switched on. Day design Night design Recommended lane C Dark blue In this lane, you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lanes. Light blue Possible lane B Light blue In this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direction without changing lanes. Dark blue Lane not recommended D Gray In this lane, you will not be able to complete the next change of direction without changing lane. Gray COMAND Lane Display in the multifunction display The lane recommendations are also shown in the multifunction display. You will find further information in the "On-board computer" section (Y page 335). Using car pool lanes COMAND displays car pool lanes if you have selected this option in the route options (Y page 136). If this is the case, COMAND checks whether there are any car pool lanes on the route. If there are, they are taken into account during route calculation. Route guidance will then include car pool lanes. Car pool lanes may only be used under certain conditions. Please observe the relevant legal requirements. Example: display, car pool lane : Identification marking on the road ; Identification marking in COMAND Canceling or continuing route guidance Canceling route guidance X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Z Navigation 154 X Select Cancel Route Guidance and press W to confirm. COMAND Continuing route guidance X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Continue Route Guidance and press W to confirm. COMAND calculates the route. Destination or area of destination reached When you reach your destination, COMAND displays a checkered flag and route guidance is automatically ended. For certain points of interest (e.g. airports), the Destination Reached display is shown as well as the checkered flag. Navigation announcements Repeating navigation announcements G WARNING Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. i Audible navigation announcements are muted during a telephone call. If you have missed an announcement, you can call up the current announcement at any time. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X In the navigation menu bar, confirm RPT with W. Switching navigation announcements on/off X To switch off: during the announcement, press the 8 button on the multifunction steering wheel. You will briefly see the message: The driving instructions have been muted. X To switch on: press W the COMAND controller. X In the + navigation menu bar, press W to confirm. i COMAND automatically switches the navigation announcements back on when: Ryou have a new route calculated. start the engine again after having left the vehicle. Ryou Reducing volume during a navigation announcement The volume of an active audio or video source can be automatically reduced during a navigation announcement. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Audio Fadeout and press W to confirm. The function is switched on O or off ª, depending on the previous status. Setting the volume manually X Set the volume during a navigation announcement. or X In the map display when the menu is shown, select + and adjust the volume. Navigation Avoiding a section of the route blocked by a traffic jam X This function blocks a section of the route ahead of you. You can set the length of the blocked route section. If possible, COMAND calculates a detour around the blocked section of the route. X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. Select Alternative Route and press W to confirm. You see the selected route. The display now shows a split-screen view. On the left-hand side, one or more alternative routes are shown from start to destination. The current route is highlighted dark blue; other alternative routes appear light blue. To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Detour and press W to confirm. X To block a section of the route: select More or Less repeatedly and confirm using W until the desired section has been selected. : Distance, expected arrival time and i The total length of the section that can be = Displays the selected route settings COMAND X blocked is defined by the digital map. The menu items are available accordingly. expected journey duration ; Displays incidents which are on the route X To select the next or previous alternative route: select Next or Previous and press W to confirm. Possible alternative routes are shown in the following order: Current Route, Fast Route, Eco Route, Short Route and Alternative Route. X To select the original route: select Back a corresponding number of times and press W to confirm. Selecting an alternative route X With the "Alternative route" function, routes other than the original one can be calculated. X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. To start route guidance using the selected alternative route: select Start and press W to confirm. COMAND accepts the alternative route. i The change of route mode in the X To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. X To delete the blocked section: select Delete while the message is shown and press W to confirm. COMAND calculates the route without the block. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. 155 alternative route menu only applies to the current route guidance. For example, if the original route was a short route, the next route will also be calculated as a short route. This is also the case if a dynamic route is selected in the alternative route menu. Z Navigation 156 Displaying destination information COMAND Prerequisite: you have entered a destination (Y page 137) and possibly an intermediate stop (Y page 145). X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Info in the menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Destination information is displayed. If a telephone number is entered for the address displayed, you can also select and call the number using COMAND. X To call the destination: select the telephone number using the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To close the destination information: slide XVY the COMAND controller or press the % back button. Example display: route overview : Marked route sections At the top of the display, you will see information about the highlighted route section, for example the distance to be driven on the road and road designation. The highlighted route section is marked in white with a red border on the map. X To view the next or previous route section: select Next or Previous and press W to confirm. i If the first or last route section is highlighted, you cannot select Previous or Next. Route overview You can use the overview of the route to move along the route section by section and to see details of the route sections. You have entered a destination (Y page 137) or a point of interest (Y page 147) and possibly an intermediate stop (Y page 145). X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Route Info and press W to confirm. X To zoom in or out of the map: select N or M and press W to confirm. X To close the route overview: select Back and press W to confirm. Where am I? You can view your current position whether or not route guidance has been interrupted. : Current position ; Next intersection or exit = Most recent intersection or exit ? Current street X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. Navigation X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Where am I? and press W to confirm. 157 Off-road G WARNING The COMAND navigation system may direct you to off-road routes that your vehicle may not be capable of traversing through without damaging your tires, wheels or vehicle. It is the driver's sole responsibility to determine the suitability of the route. Off-road routes may be of varying conditions and their appropriateness for use may be affected by various factors such as time of day, time of year and immediate weather conditions that cannot be judged or taken into consideration by the COMAND system. Route guidance to a destination that is not on a digitized road COMAND can guide you to destinations which are within the area covered by the digital map, but which are not themselves recorded on the map. These destinations are known as off-road destinations, which you can enter using the map, for example. In these cases, COMAND guides you for as long as possible with navigation announcements and displays on roads known to the system. Example display: route guidance to an off-road destination : Off-road destination ; Off-road route section (dashed blue) = Current vehicle position (the tip of the triangle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel) ? Off-road (no street names available) If the vehicle reaches an area which is not part of the digital map, the display appears as a split-screen view. On the right-hand side, an arrow appears which points to off-road destination :. You will hear the announcement: "Please follow the arrow on the display". Route guidance from an off-road location to a destination If the vehicle position is within the area covered by the digital map, but the map does not contain any information about that location, the vehicle is in an off-road location. COMAND is also able to guide you to a destination even from an off-road location. At the start of the route guidance, you will see the Street unknown message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The direction arrow shows the linear direction to the actual destination. The continuous blue line on the map starts at the street which you left last. As soon as the vehicle is back on a road known to the system, route guidance continues in the usual way. Z COMAND Important safety note Navigation COMAND 158 Off-road during route guidance Due to roadworks, for example, there may be differences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle position on the digital map and thus considers the vehicle to be in an off-road position. In the display, you will see the Street unknown message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The arrow shows the compass heading to the last road you were driving on. As soon as the system can assign the vehicle position to the map again, route guidance continues in the usual way. Route guidance on roads that are not completely digitalized COMAND attempts to avoid roads that have not been completely digitalized. If the vehicle's position or the destination is located in an area that has not been completely digitalized, then no active route guidance is performed. Instead, the map shows a dashed route along the roads and the target direction is shown with an arrow. You hear the announcement: "You will enter an area, where turn-by-turn guidance can not be provided. Please follow the arrow on the display". Once these roads have been left, regular route guidance is resumed. navigation system. Traffic messages and map symbols can then be shown in the COMAND display. COMAND uses high quality traffic data. Nevertheless, there may be differences between the traffic reports received and the actual road and traffic conditions. Switching traffic reports on/off X To switch on: set the route type to Dynamic Route6(Y page 136). X To switch off: select the Fast Route or Short Route route type (Y page 136). i COMAND calculates a new route if you change the route type setting with route guidance active. If you change the route type setting when route guidance is inactive, COMAND uses the new setting for the next route guidance. Real-time traffic reports on the map COMAND can show certain traffic incidents on the map. The incidents are shown on the map at a scale from 1/16 mi to 20 mi. X Set the map scale (Y page 166). Traffic reports Prerequisite i The SatRadio mode described below requires optional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Service. Further details on SatRadio are available in the "SatRadio" section (Y page 200). COMAND can receive traffic reports via SatRadio and incorporate them in the 6 Traffic reports are not available in all countries. 12 Icon display for the section of route 3 4 5 affected Icon for incident on the route Current position and direction of travel Map scale Navigation 159 i COMAND uses corresponding icons to COMAND highlight the entire section of the affected route, regardless of how long the incident actually is. The icons are placed on the side of the road affected by the incident. Z 160 Navigation Icon for real-time traffic reports COMAND Icon Description Traffic reports in the map display Warning (red) A warning appears, for example, relating to lost cargo. Caution (yellow) A warning appears, for example, relating to roadwork that does not affect the flow of traffic. Slow-moving traffic This appears at the beginning of a traffic jam (average speed 25 - 45 mph) if route guidance is active and the route leads through an area of congested traffic. Yellow car icons may appear in conjunction with this icon. Traffic jam on the route This appears at the beginning of a traffic jam (average speed 5 - 20 mph) if route guidance is active and the route leads through an area of congested traffic. Red car icons may appear in conjunction with this icon. Blocked route section Appears at the beginning of a blocked route on the route section if route guidance is active and the route leads through the blocked section. The XXXX icons may appear in conjunction with this icon. Yellow line with arrows Incidents Possible traffic blocks (e.g. roadwork) Appears on the side of the road affected (direction of travel) Green line with arrows Unimpeded traffic flow No delays Only appears on the side of the road (direction of travel) on which traffic flow is unimpeded Slow-moving traffic (stop/start traffic) (yellow vehicle) High volume of traffic, average speed 40 – 72 km/h (25 – 45 mph). In order to indicate the volume of traffic, more than one symbol may appear. Traffic jam on the route (stop/start traffic) (red vehicle) Very high volume of traffic, average speed 8 – 32 km/h (5 – 20 mph). XXXX Blocked route section Unusable section of road. In order to indicate the length of the blocked section, more than one symbol may appear. Navigation 161 Displaying real-time traffic reports X If necessary, switch to navigation mode and show the menu (Y page 136). X Select Traffic in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. traffic reports have been received yet. traffic reports are available. X To cancel the search: select Cancel. X To close the message window: select OK. 1 State or province recognition 2 Road affected If there are any traffic reports, a list is shown. The content of the list varies depending on whether route guidance is active or not. X Rno Rno List of traffic reports i A traffic report may refer to an area or a region, e.g. if visibility is impaired due to fog. To read a traffic report: select a road, an area or a region. X To show a traffic report: select a road, an area or a region and press W to confirm. You will find an example of a traffic report below. X To exit the list: slide XVY the COMAND controller once or several times. Example: traffic report X To show the traffic report list: select Display All Messages by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The list shows all the roads, areas or regions for which traffic reports are available. 1 Country code 2 Road, area or region affected by traffic reports 3 Direction 4 Report 1 of 8 for the road affected 5 Last exit/intersection before the affected route section starts Z COMAND If you see the No traffic messages. message: This means that: Navigation 162 without starting route guidance (Y page 141). 6 Report text C First exit/intersection after the affected route section ends X To scroll within a report or to access the next report: turn cVd the COMAND controller. Adopting an address book entry as a home address X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To return to the list of messages: press W or slide XVY the COMAND controller. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select From Memory and press W to confirm. X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the destination memory list appears as a selection list. X Select My Address by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND Showing icon information Example display : Affected section of freeway ; Icon for an event X To show the next/previous incident: select Next or Previous (if available) and press W to confirm. X To show the detailed view: select Details and press W to confirm. X To scroll the map: select Map and press W to confirm. You can move the map (Y page 144) to enable further traffic reports to be displayed. Destination memory Home address (My address) Entering the home address via address entry X Enter the home address as a destination, e.g. as a city, street and house number (Y page 137). Then, save the home address i If you have not yet entered any characters, the My Address entry is automatically highlighted in the selection list. If no home address has been stored yet, you can now assign an address book entry. If a home address already exists, it is displayed and you can alter it. i If you select New Entry, you are also offered the option of entering the home address for the first time. You can then Navigation X To enter the home address for the first time: select Assign Address Book Entry and press W to confirm. X Select Home or Work and press W to confirm. X To change the home address: select Change and press W to confirm. X Select Assign Address Book Entry and press W to confirm. i If you select New Entry, you are also offered the option of changing the home address by entering an address. You can then save the home address without starting route guidance. X Select Home or Work and press W to confirm. In both cases, you will see the address book either with the character bar or as a selection list. X To select an address book entry: proceed as described in the "Searching for an address book entry" section (Y page 189). X To confirm the selection: press W the COMAND controller. If no home address has been stored, COMAND saves the entry. You will see a message and then the address menu with the selected address. Start is highlighted automatically. If a home address has already been stored, you will see a prompt asking you whether the My Address entry should be overwritten. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes, COMAND overwrites the destination. You will see a message and then the address menu with the selected address. Start is highlighted automatically. If you select No, the list will reappear. Selecting the home address for route guidance X Proceed as described in the "Selecting a destination from the destination memory" section (Y page 143). Storing a destination in the destination memory Note This function also stores the destination in the address book. After destination entry X The destination has been entered and is shown in the address entry menu (Y page 140). X Select Save by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You can now select storage options. During route guidance X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Save Destination and press W to confirm. You can now select storage options. From the list of previous destinations X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select From Last Destinations and press W to confirm. The list of last destinations appears. Z COMAND save the home address without starting route guidance. 163 Navigation COMAND 164 X Select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The destination address is shown. X Select Save and press W to confirm. You can now select storage options. Selecting storing options X To save the destination without a name: select Save without Name and press W to confirm. COMAND stores the destination in the destination memory and uses the address as the destination name. X To save the destination as My address: select Save as "My Address" and press W to confirm. COMAND stores the destination in the destination memory as My Address. If the entry already contains navigable data (symbol L), a prompt appears asking you whether the entry should be overwritten. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes, the entry is overwritten. If you select No, the process will be aborted. X To save the destination with a name: select Save with Name and press W to confirm. X Select a category, e.g. Home, and press W to confirm. The input menu appears with data fields and the character bar. Example display: saving a destination with a name : Selected data field with cursor ; Character bar X Proceed as described under "Entering characters using the character bar" in the "Entering characters in navigation mode (entering a city)" section (Y page 137). X Then, select ¬ and press W to confirm. COMAND stores the destination under the name entered. Assigning a destination to an address book entry An address with complete address data that is suitable for navigation can be assigned to a pre-existing address book entry. You can then later start route guidance to this address straight from the address book (Y page 192). X Select Assign Address Book Entry and press W to confirm. X Select a category, e.g. Home, and press W to confirm. You will see the address book either with the character bar or as a selection list. X To select an address book entry: proceed as described in the "Searching for an address book entry" section (Y page 189). COMAND stores the data if the address book entry selected does not yet contain navigable address data. If the selected address book entry already contains navigable address data, a prompt Navigation will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite the existing data. Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes, COMAND stores the data. Deleting a destination or the home address from the destination memory X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select From Memory and press W to confirm. You will see the destination memory list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). X X corresponding address book entry does not contain any further data, such as telephone numbers, COMAND deletes the entire address book entry. Option 1: destination memory list with character bar: proceed as described in the "Entering characters using the character bar" section (Y page 119). Option 2: destination memory list as selection list: select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You see the address data of the selected entry. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete the destination. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes, COMAND deletes the destination. You will see a message to this effect. If you select No, the process is aborted. Previous destinations Introduction COMAND automatically stores the previous destinations for which the route calculation has been started. If the memory is full, COMAND deletes the oldest destination. You can also save a destination from the list of previous destinations in the destination memory. It will be stored there permanently. Storing a destination permanently in the destination memory X Proceed as described in the "From the list of previous destinations" section (Y page 163). Storing the vehicle position in the list of previous destinations X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Store Vehicle Position and press W to confirm. COMAND stores the current vehicle position as a destination in the list of previous destinations. i If the navigable address data for the destination being deleted is also assigned to an address book entry, COMAND will also delete this data from there. If the Z COMAND X 165 Navigation 166 Storing the crosshair position in the list of previous destinations Route guidance not active A crosshair appears on the map if you have moved the map manually. You can store the crosshair position as a destination in the list of previous destinations. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. COMAND X X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Save Crosshair Position and press W to confirm. Route guidance is active X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the entry should be deleted. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes, the entry is deleted. If you select No, the process is aborted. Map operation and settings Note Company logos displayed on the map are trademarks of the respective companies and used solely for the purpose of indicating the location of these companies. The use of such logos on the map does not indicate approval of, support of or advertising by these companies for the navigation system itself. Setting the map scale X Select Save Destination and press W to confirm. Deleting one of the previous destinations X X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND controller and, when the Full screen menu item is shown, press W. X To call up the scale bar: as soon as you turn cVd the COMAND controller, scale bar = appears. X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set. : Set map scale as a number with unit Select From Last Destinations and press W to confirm. The list of last destinations appears. ; Currently set map scale as indicated by Select the desired destination and press W to confirm. The destination address appears. Unit of measurement : in the COMAND display depends on the selection made for the instrument cluster. the needle on the scale bar = Scale bar Navigation Showing the crosshair X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND controller and, when the Full screen menu item is shown, press W. X To move the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller. A crosshair appears on the map. If you slide it again, the map moves in the corresponding direction under the crosshair. Setting the map to the vehicle position, intermediate stop or destination position Centering the map on the vehicle position X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Vehicle Position Map and press W to confirm or, if the crosshair is shown, press the % back button. This hides the crosshair. Centering on an intermediate stop This function requires that a route to an intermediate stop has been calculated. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. Map with crosshair : Current vehicle position X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Stopover Map and press W to confirm. The crosshair is centered on the destination. ; Crosshair = Details of the crosshair position ? Map scale selected Display = may be the name of a street, for example, provided the digital map contains the necessary data. Or it may show the geocoordinate position of the crosshair if the Geo-coordinates display is switched on (Y page 170). Hiding the crosshair and centering the map on the vehicle position or destination X Press the % back button. The crosshair disappears and the map is set to the vehicle position. or X Set the map to the vehicle position; see the explanation below. Centering on the destination This function requires that a route to a destination has been calculated. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Destination Map and press W to confirm. The crosshair is centered on the destination. Z COMAND Moving the map 167 Navigation 168 Map display X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Map Orientation and press W to confirm. A # dot indicates the current setting. X Select North Up, Heading Up, Bird'seye View or 3-D Map by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND controller. The map orientation changes accordingly. Setting the map orientation COMAND Map orientation : Current map orientation The following display modes are possible: North orientation (the map view is displayed so that north is always up). R¤ Orientation in direction of travel (the map is displayed so that the direction of travel is always up; the orange point of the icon points north). R¤ Bird's-eye view (the map is displayed so that the direction of travel is always up; the map projection reproduces the curvature of the earth and the orange point of the icon points north). R¤ 3D map (the map is displayed in the direction of travel with elevation and terrain modeling. The orange point of the icon points north). R0 Setting the point of interest icons in the map You can set the points of interest you wish to have displayed as symbols on the map. Points of interest are, for example, gas stations, hotels, cinemas and restaurants. The following settings are possible: RStandard Example display: Bird's-eye view : Current crosshair position ; Current map orientation X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. Symbols Symbol display determined by the factory settings. RPersonal Symbols You can determine the symbols yourself. RNo Symbols The map does not show any symbols. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. Navigation X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Text Information on Map and press W to confirm. A # dot indicates the current setting. X Select POI Symbols on Map and press W to confirm. X X Select Standard Symbols, Personal Symbols or No Symbols. If you select Personal Symbols, the list of points of interest appears. Select Arrival Time/Distance, Current Street, Geo-Coordinates or None and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND controller. X To switch the icon display on/off: select a point of interest by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous state of the symbols, they will either be shown O or hidden ª. You can switch on the symbol displays for more than one point of interest. i The list shows all symbols that are contained on the digital map across all countries. However, not all points of interest are available in all countries. As a result, certain point of interest symbols may not be displayed on the map, even if the symbol display is switched on. X To exit the menu: press the % back button. Map information in the display Showing text information During route guidance, you can have map information displayed at the bottom edge of the display. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The main area is active. X Select Navi again and press W to confirm. The navigation menu opens. 169 COMAND Arrival time/distance to the destination Arrival time/distance display switched on : Icon for destination ; Distance to the destination = Icon for estimated time of arrival ? Estimated time of arrival You can only see this display during route guidance. While scrolling the map (Y page 167), you will see additional data, e.g. road names, depending on the crosshair position, if the digital map supports this data. Road display Road display active : Road names or numbers, e.g. for highways Z 170 Navigation Geo-coordinate display Switching the topographical map on/ off The topographical map uses different colors to depict elevation. The color key generally reflects the topography's dominant vegetation or the ground's perceived color when seen from the air, for example: Geo-coordinate display active : Current height above average sea level, rounded COMAND ; Current vehicle position: latitude coordinates = Current vehicle position: longitude coordinates ? Number of GPS satellites currently being used There must be sufficient GPS reception for all displays to be shown. If this is not the case, the display will be grayed out. Height display : may vary from the actual value, because the navigation system uses the GPS signals for the calculation. While scrolling the map (Y page 167), you will see the geo-coordinates of the crosshair position. Height display : and number of satellites used ? are not displayed. Rgreen for lowland or brown for hills Rgray or white for mountains X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. Ryellow X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Topographical Map and confirm with W. Depending on the previous state, switch the option on O or off ª. Switching the city model on/off When the city model is switched on, the map shows buildings as 3D models. i The city model is only shown in the "3D map" map orientation. It is available for map scales 50 m and 100 m. The data required for displaying buildings is not available for all cities. "None" menu option X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select City (3D) and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous state, switch the option on O or off ª. Display switched off : Current map orientation i During the "Move map" function you can see additional information depending on the position of the crosshair, such as a road name, if the digital map supports this data. Navigation ; Buildings = Important buildings Showing the map data version X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Map Version and press W to confirm. The map data version number is shown. Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Traffic information on the map If you subscribe to the SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Service, traffic information can be displayed on the map. You can select three categories for the display. X To switch the displays on/off: press W the COMAND controller to show the menu. X X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Traffic Information On Map and press W to confirm. X Select a category and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous state, switch the option on O or off ª. RTraffic incidents Road sections are illustrated with a yellow line and arrows. Warning messages or traffic incidents are represented on the map by appropriate symbols and/or yellow/red arrows. Explanation of symbols (Y page 158). RSpeed & Flow Road sections are represented by yellow or red car icons. Green arrows: free-flowing traffic Yellow car icons: congested traffic, average speed 25 - 45 mph Red car icons: traffic jam, average speed 5 – 20 mph RFree Flow Road sections are illustrated with a green line and arrows. Additional settings Freeway information When driving on highways, you can have the nearest gas stations, rest areas, etc., as well as your current distance from them, shown on the right-hand side of the display. X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. Z COMAND : Hills 171 Navigation 172 X X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Highway Information and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous state, switch the option on O or off ª. Compass function You can display the current compass direction heading in which the front of the vehicle is facing. COMAND SIRIUS XM service Displaying SIRIUS XM service information You can display the SIRIUS XM service information. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. : Current compass heading X ; geo-coordinates X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select SIRIUS Service and press W to confirm. Registering for the SIRIUS XM traffic report service X Call the traffic report provider's phone number shown on the screen. i You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS XM Radio website at http://www.sirius.com (USA) or http://www.siriuscanada.com (Canada). Once the connection has been established: X Follow the instructions of the operator. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. If registration is not included when purchasing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account. In the compass view, you can see the current direction of travel, the current height above sea level and the coordinates of the vehicle position, for example. X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Compass and press W to confirm. X To exit the display: confirm Back by pressing W or press the % button. Installing new map software The digital maps generated by the map software become outdated in the same way as conventional road maps. Optimum route guidance can only be provided by the navigation system in conjunction with the most up-to-date map software. Information about new map software versions can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Navigation G WARNING Never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces. The exhaust gases contain toxic carbon monoxide. Breathing in exhaust fumes is a health hazard and can lead to unconsciousness or death. Displaying information on the map version currently in use X To activate navigation mode: press the S function button once or twice. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Map Version and press W to confirm. Notes on handling DVDs ROnly hold DVDs by the edge. RHandle DVDs carefully to prevent reading errors. RAvoid getting scratches, fingerprints and dust on DVDs. RUse a commercially-available cleaning cloth to clean discs. When cleaning CDs, you should wipe in straight lines from the center outwards rather than in a circular motion. RPlace DVDs back in their cases after use. RProtect DVDs from heat and direct sunlight. Map software copy protection Map software for COMAND is subject to a charge. The map software has just one activation code which is usable in one vehicle only, and is not transferable. You can obtain the six-digit activation code from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If you have lost the activation code, or if COMAND does not accept the activation code that you have received, contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Your vehicle is supplied with map software at the factory. Depending on the country, map software for your region is either pre-installed (Europe/USA) or the map software is supplied as a DVD (all other countries). You do not require an activation code for the map software that is provided with your vehicle. If the map software on your vehicle has been installed at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, this also does not necessitate entry of the activation code. Installation process X Load the map software DVD in the DVD drive (Y page 204). COMAND checks the DVD and shows a corresponding message in the display. Map software is not compatible with the navigation system You will see a message that the map software cannot be installed. X To confirm the message: press W. COMAND ejects the DVD. X Take the DVD out of the slot. X Insert a DVD which is compatible with the vehicle’s navigation system. Z COMAND You can install new map software yourself which, depending on the scope, may consist of one or more DVDs. The installation process can take between 10 and 120 minutes, depending on the scope of the map software. If the radio is switched on before you start the installation process, you can still adjust the volume. You can also use COMAND to operate automatic climate control and to cancel the process. Other functions are not operational. If possible, carry out the installation when the vehicle is stationary. The DVD read speed is higher when the vehicle is stationary than when it is in motion, so less time is required. If the starter battery is not sufficiently charged, COMAND may end the process automatically in order to protect the battery. Therefore, let the engine idle during the installation process. 173 174 Navigation COMAND Map software is not compatible with the current system software You will see a message that the system software and the map software are not compatible. X To confirm the message: press W. COMAND ejects the DVD. X Take the DVD out of the slot. X Have the system software updated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If an activation code is required for the map software, a prompt appears in the display requesting the code to be entered. The map software cannot be installed until the system software has been updated. Map software compatible with the navigation system and the current system software COMAND checks whether the map data on the DVD is already installed. Map data is already installed You will see a message that the map data is already installed and a prompt will appear asking you whether you wish to continue with the map software installation. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the existing map data is overwritten. If you select No, COMAND automatically ejects the DVD and the installation of the map software is canceled. X Take the DVD out of the slot. Map data is not installed yet In the display, you will see a comparison of the version statuses of the map software DVD and the map software installed in COMAND. A prompt then appears asking whether the map software installation should be carried out. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the map data is installed. If you select No, COMAND automatically ejects the DVD and the installation of the map software is canceled. X Take the DVD out of the slot. X Enter the activation code and confirm the entry with !. The map software is installed. If you enter an incorrect activation code, the prompt to enter the activation code appears again. If the activation code is entered incorrectly three times, the prompt asking you to enter the activation code appears after a time delay. The time delay increases every time the activation code is entered incorrectly, from five minutes up to a maximum of five hours. Installing map data Just before the copying process starts, COMAND restarts the system. While the installation is running, you will see a message to this effect and a progress bar. X To cancel the installation process: eject the DVD. X Take the DVD out of the slot. i If you interrupt the installation process, the navigation system will not be operational. You can continue an interrupted installation process at a later date. X Installation process with multi-DVD map data: once the content of the first DVD has been installed, a message appears Navigation 175 COMAND prompting you to insert the second DVD. Follow the instructions on the display. X To allow the installation to run to the end without Canceling: take no further action. When the installation process is successfully completed, you will see a message to this effect. X To confirm the message: press W. COMAND ejects the DVD. X Take the DVD out of the slot. The installation is complete. When the installation process is not successfully completed, you will see a message to this effect. X To confirm the message: press W. COMAND ejects the DVD. X Take the DVD out of the slot. Z 176 Navigation COMAND Problems with the navigation system Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions COMAND is unable to continue route guidance after the journey has been interrupted. Route guidance is canceled if you interrupt the journey for more than two hours. "Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle and switching off COMAND. "Continuing route guidance" refers to switching COMAND back on and driving on. X Continue route guidance (Y page 153). COMAND determines the vehicle's position. Depending on the driving situation, this may take some time. Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of the vehicle's location. When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with navigation announcements and route guidance displays. COMAND is unable to COMAND has to redetermine the position of the vehicle if the determine the vehicle's vehicle has been transported (e.g. by ferry, by motorail or after position. towing). X Start the vehicle and pull away. COMAND determines the vehicle's position. Depending on the driving situation, this may take some time. Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of the vehicle's location. When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with navigation announcements and route guidance displays. The Navigation function unavailable message appears. COMAND has an integrated hard drive on which the digital map is stored. To protect the hard drive from damage, COMAND switches it off at very high temperatures. The navigation system will then be temporarily unavailable. X Let the vehicle and COMAND cool down. X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again. If an area of the hard disk has a malfunction, COMAND can no longer access the map data in this area, for example when calculating a route. X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again. The navigation system will be operational again until it has to access the faulty area of the hard drive once more. The message will then reappear. X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Telephone Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You see a message informing you that the DVD containing the digital map is incompatible with the system software. The DVD containing the digital map cannot be used for the update. X To confirm the message: press W the COMAND controller. The installation of the map software has failed. The DVD is dirty or scratched. X Clean the DVD. X X Eject the DVD. Have the system software updated at an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Restart installation. There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle interior. X Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down. X Restart installation. COMAND's integral hard drive is faulty. X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Telephone General notes Introduction COMAND, in conjunction with a Bluetooth®capable mobile phone, enables you to make calls via the Bluetooth® interface. Using the Bluetooth® interface and a suitable mobile phone, you can use the hands-free system, import contacts from the mobile phone and receive vCards. More detailed information on suitable mobile phones and on connecting Bluetooth®capable mobile phones to COMAND can be found on the Internet at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) for the USA or on 1-800-387-0100 for Canada. Safety notes G WARNING A driver's attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the mobile phone while driving, please use the handsfree device and only use the mobile phone when weather, road, and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular mobile phone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Z COMAND X 177 178 Telephone Call disconnection while the vehicle is in motion A call may be disconnected if: COMAND Rthere is insufficient network coverage in certain areas. Ryou move from one transmitter/receiver area (cell) into another and no channels are free. Ryou use a SIM card which is not compatible with the network available. Ryou are using a mobile phone with "Twincard" and the mobile phone with the second SIM card is already logged into the network. Operating options You can operate the telephone by: Rusing the COMAND controller: turn cVd. slide XVY or ZVÆ. press W. Rthe 6 or ~ button on the telephone keypad on the center console Rthe 6 or ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel Rusing the Voice Control System (see the separate Voice Control System operating instructions) Unless otherwise indicated, the descriptions and illustrations in this section refer to COMAND and the telephone keypad. This also means that to carry out the functions described here, you must always be in the Telephone menu. The fastest way to access the Telephone menu is to press the S function button. Function restrictions You will not be able to use the telephone, will no longer be able to use the telephone, or you may have to wait before using it, in the following situations: Rwhen the mobile phone is switched off Rwhen the "Bluetooth®" function is switched off in COMAND Rwhen the "Bluetooth®" function is switched off on the mobile phone the mobile phone is not logged into a mobile phone network Rif i The telephone automatically tries to log on to a network. If no network is available, you will not be able to make a "911" emergency call. If you attempt to make an outgoing call, the NO SERVICE message will appear for a short while. Rif you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock during an active conversation in hands-free mode, the conversation may be continued for up to 30 minutes. After that time, it will be interrupted. You can prevent this interruption by switching to "private call" ("private mode") on the mobile phone before deactivating COMAND (see mobile phone operating instructions). If you wish to switch off COMAND during an active conversation in hands-free mode, the following message will appear: You cannot shut off COMAND until you have finished your telephone call 911 emergency call G WARNING The 911 emergency call system is a public service. Using it without due cause is a criminal offense. The following requirements must be fulfilled for a 911 emergency call: Rthe Ra mobile phone must be switched on. network must be available. Telephone valid and operational SIM card must be inserted in the mobile phone. Rthe mobile phone is connected to COMAND via Bluetooth®. If you cannot make an emergency call, you must arrange rescue measures yourself. X Enter numbers using the number keypad (Y page 184). X Press the 6 button. The telephone makes the connection. X Wait for the emergency call center to respond and then describe the emergency. i If no SIM card has been inserted in a GSM phone or if there is no service available for a CDMA phone, the NO SERVICE message appears in COMAND. In this case, an emergency call can only be transmitted via the mobile phone itself and not via COMAND. Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface Conditions On the mobile phone For telephony via COMAND's Bluetooth® interface, a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone is required. i Not all mobile phones available on the market are equally suitable. More detailed information on suitable mobile phones and on connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with COMAND can be found on the Internet at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer Relations on 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada). The battery of the mobile phone should always be kept sufficiently charged in order to prevent malfunctions. In preparation for telephoning via the Bluetooth® interface, you should check the following items on your mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions): X Hands-Free Profile The mobile phone must support HandsFree Profile 1.0 or above. i Certain displays and functions (e.g. signal strength display, conference connection) are available, depending on the supported version of the Hands-Free Profile. X Bluetooth® visibility On certain mobile phones, the device itself must be made "visible" for other devices, as well as activating the Bluetooth® function (see the mobile phone operating instructions). X Bluetooth® device name Every Bluetooth® device has its own Bluetooth® device name. This device name is freely definable, but can be identical for all devices from the same manufacturer. It is therefore recommended that you change this name so that you can easily recognize your mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions). X Switch on the mobile phone and enter the PIN when prompted to do so (see the mobile phone operating instructions). X Activate Bluetooth® functions and, where necessary, Bluetooth® visibility on the mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions). In COMAND X Activate the Bluetooth® function in COMAND (Y page 132). Connecting a mobile phone General information Before using your mobile phone with COMAND for the first time, you will need to connect it. Z COMAND Ra 179 Telephone 180 When you authorize a new mobile phone, it is connected automatically. Connecting comprises: for a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone Rsubsequently authorizing it You can connect up to 15 mobile phones. Rsearching Searching for a mobile phone To call up the telephone menu: press the S function button once or twice. X Select Data/Connections in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND X X Select Bluetooth Telephones and press W to confirm. X Select Update and press W to confirm. COMAND searches for Bluetooth® telephones within range and adds them to the Bluetooth® telephone list. The duration of the search depends on the number of Bluetooth® telephones within range and their characteristics. Example of display: Bluetooth® telephones list : Currently connected # and authorized mobile phone Ñ ; Mobile phone not within range but previously authorized (Ñ symbol appears in gray) = Newly detected mobile phone in range, not yet authorized Ï The Bluetooth® telephones list shows all mobile phones within range and all previously authorized mobile phones, whether or not they are in range. i If the Bluetooth® telephones list is already full, you will be requested to de-authorize a mobile phone (Y page 182). If COMAND does not find your mobile phone, external authorization (Y page 181) may be necessary. Authorizing (registering) a mobile phone X In the Bluetooth® telephones list, select the not yet authorized mobile phone by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Select Options by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Authorize and press W to confirm. or X Press W to confirm the selected mobile phone. The input menu for the passcode appears. The passcode is any one to sixteen-digit number combination which you can choose yourself. You must enter the same number combination in COMAND and in the Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone (see the operating instructions of the mobile phone). i Some mobile phones require the input of a four-digit passcode or longer number combinations. If you want to reauthorize a mobile phone following de-authorization, you can select a different passcode. X To enter a passcode in COMAND: press the number keys in sequence. ¬ is available for selection after the first number has been entered. or X Select the digits one by one by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To confirm an entry in COMAND: select ¬ using the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Select SEND on the telephone keypad. X Now enter the same passcode in the mobile phone. To make entries on the mobile phone: if the Bluetooth® connection is successful, you will be requested to enter the passcode (see mobile phone operating instructions). X Enter the same passcode on the mobile phone that you entered in COMAND. i After entering the passcode, you may also need to enter a confirmation in your mobile phone to connect calls. Please check your mobile phone display. If the Error during authorization process message appears on the COMAND display, you may have exceeded the allowed time. Repeat the procedure. The mobile phone is connected to COMAND (authorized). You can now make phone calls using the COMAND hands-free system. External authorization If COMAND does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone. In this case, you can test if your mobile phone can find COMAND. The Bluetooth® device name of COMAND is MB Bluetooth. Observe the following: some mobile phones require that you reconnect to COMAND after you have entered the passcode (see the mobile phone operating instructions). The mobile phone cannot otherwise be authorized. X Press the S function button on the COMAND controller once or twice. X Select Data/Connections in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Bluetooth Telephones and press W to confirm. X Select Update. X Select Options by sliding VY and press W to confirm. X Select External Authorization and press W to confirm. X Start the Bluetooth® search on the mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions). X Select COMAND (MB Bluetooth) on the mobile phone. i The order in which the passkey is entered depends on the mobile phone. X Enter the passkey on the mobile phone when prompted. X Confirm the Do you want to authorize XX? question in COMAND with Yes. X Enter the passkey in COMAND. Connecting another mobile phone If you have authorized more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones. i You can only switch to another authorized phone if you are not currently making a call. X Select the mobile phone in the Bluetooth® telephones list by turning cVd the Z 181 COMAND Telephone Telephone 182 COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The selected mobile phone is searched for and connected if it is within Bluetooth® range and if Bluetooth® is activated. Only one mobile phone can be connected at any one time. The currently connected mobile phone is indicated by the # dot in the Bluetooth® telephones list (Y page 179). COMAND Displaying details X Select Data/Connections in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Bluetooth Telephones and press W to confirm. X Select the desired mobile phone in the Bluetooth® telephones list. X Select Options by sliding VY and press W to confirm. X Select Details and press W to confirm. The following information concerning the selected mobile phone is shown: RBluetooth® name RBluetooth® address Requipment class, e.g. telephone, computer Ravailability Rauthorization status X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller. De-registering (de-authorizing) a mobile phone Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends deauthorizating in both COMAND and the mobile phone. Subsequent authorization may otherwise fail. X To call up the telephone menu: press the S function button once or twice. X Select Data/Connections in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Bluetooth Telephones and press W to confirm. X Select the desired mobile phone in the Bluetooth® telephones list. X Select Options by sliding VY and press W to confirm. X Select De-authorize and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to de-authorize this device. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the device will be deleted from the Bluetooth® telephones list. If you select No, the process will be aborted. i Before re-authorizing the mobile phone, you should also delete the device name MB Bluetooth from your mobile phone's Bluetooth® list. Basic telephone menu (Bluetooth® interface) X To call up the telephone menu: press the S function button once or twice. If the mobile phone is ready for use, the following display appears: Telephone 183 the USA) or Customer Relations on 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada). i Incorrect settings may have a significant impact on the quality of calls. X X ; Signal strength of mobile phone network = ? A B C È Receiver icon ¡ or ¢ To display the COMAND phone book To display call lists Character bar with characters for phone number entry Bluetooth® name of the currently connected mobile phone X Select Bluetooth Telephones and press W to confirm. X Select an authorized mobile phone from the list by turning cVd. X Select Options by sliding VY and press W to confirm. X Select Reception Volume or Transmission Volume and press W to confirm. i Displays : and ; are shown, depending on the mobile phone connected. Bars ; display the current signal strength of the mobile phone network. If all bars are filled, you have optimum reception. If all bars are empty, there is very poor reception or none at all. Receiver icon = shows whether a call is active/being connected ¡ or not ¢. X To set the volume on scale: select by sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Reception and transmission volume Once the mobile phone has been authorized, you can optimize the transmission and reception volume settings. Find information on the optimal setting for your mobile phone on the Internet at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (for Telephone operation Incoming call Rejecting or accepting a call When there is an incoming call, you see a corresponding window in the display. Z COMAND Example display: telephone basic menu (Bluetooth® interface) : Network provider icon Press the S function button. Select Data/Connections in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Telephone 184 Making a call Entering a telephone number using the telephone keypad X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 182). COMAND X To reject: select Reject by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X X Press the ~ button on the telephone keypad or on the multifunction steering wheel. To accept: confirm Accept by pressing W. or X Press the 6 button on the telephone keypad. or X Press the 6 or ? button on the multifunction steering wheel. Once you have accepted the call, you can use hands-free mode. The call volume can be adjusted (Y page 124). For more information, see the "Functions available during a call" section (Y page 185). The display shows the phone number or the name and phone number (if the entry is stored in the address book) or shows the Unknown (phone number withheld) message. X Enter all the digits of the phone number using the telephone keypad. X To make a call: press the 6 button on the telephone keypad or on the multifunction steering wheel. Entering a telephone number using the telephone basic menu X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 182). X Select the digits one by one by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To make a call: select SEND from the telephone basic menu and press W to confirm. or X Redialing X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 182). X Press the 6 button on the telephone keypad. or X Select SEND from the telephone basic menu and press W to confirm. In both cases, the calls dialed list appears. The most recently dialed number is at the top. X To select a call: select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. i You can also accept a call as described above when COMAND is showing the display of a different main application. The display switches to the telephone display after a call is accepted using the COMAND controller or the telephone keypad. After the call is finished, you see the display of the previous main application again. Press the 6 button on the telephone keypad or on the multifunction steering wheel. Telephone using the on-board computer (Y page 341). Calling voicemail This function is only available if it is supported by the mobile phone network provider. You can only call voicemail if the voicemail number is stored as preset 1 on the SIM card. X Press and hold the 4 button on the telephone keypad. or X Use the COMAND controller to select 1 and confirm until dialing commences. Connecting a call to an entry in a call list or in the COMAND phone book X Open a call list and select an entry (Y page 193). or X Call up the COMAND phone book and select an entry (Y page 189). Functions available during a call Overview A To send DTMF tones (not possible with all mobile phones) B To end a call Switching the hands-free microphone on/ off This function is also available during an active phone call. X To call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 182). X To switch off: select Mike OFF and press W to confirm. or X Press the 8 button on the multifunction steering wheel. If the microphone is switched off, the display shows the Q symbol and the The microphone is turned OFF message appears for a short period. X To switch on: select Mike ON and press W to confirm. or X Press the 8 button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Q symbol disappears. You will briefly see the The microphone is ON message. Ending an active call X Select ~ in the telephone basic menu and press W to confirm. or X Press the ~ button on the telephone keypad or on the multifunction steering wheel. Telephone operation with a single call : Person you are calling ; Icon for active telephone connection = NEW to call other parties7 ? To switch hands-free microphone on/off 7 Call waiting, toggling and conference connections with several people These functions are only available if they are supported by the mobile phone network provider. Furthermore, they are only available if the mobile phone supports HFP 1.5 or higher. This function is only available if the telephone supports HFP1.5 and above. Z COMAND i The redialing function is also available 185 Telephone 186 COMAND You can be called by more than one person (call waiting) while you are making a telephone call. In the same way, you can call another party while already on the phone with someone. You can either toggle between these two conversations or interconnect them to create a conference call. You can simultaneously switch back and forth between two parties or conduct a conference call with up to five others. Call Waiting8 If you are on the telephone and you receive another call, the call waiting display will appear. You also hear a tone. X To reject: select Reject and press W to confirm. or X Press the ~ button on the telephone keypad or on the multifunction steering wheel. X To accept: select Accept and press W to confirm. or X Press the 6 button on the telephone keypad or on the multifunction steering wheel. This will put the active call on hold. You now have two calls. The accepted call is active and the first call is on hold. i If your mobile phone does not support HFP 1.5 or above, then the call which was active is canceled as soon as the second call is accepted. Calling additional parties You can call a second person while on the phone with someone else. This action puts the previous call on hold. 8 X Select NEW from the telephone basic menu and press W to confirm. or X X Select SEND on the telephone keypad. Enter the phone number manually (Y page 184) or via the phone book (Y page 192) or from the call lists (Y page 193). Switching between two parties (toggling) If you have added another party to your previously active call, the telephone menu then looks like this: : Active party ; Party on hold X To switch to the other party: select ; by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Select SEND on the telephone keypad. or X Press the 6 button on the multifunction steering wheel. Interconnecting to create a conference You can interconnect calls which are active and those which are on hold. This permits several parties to hear one another and speak with one another. This function is only available if Call Waiting has been activated on the mobile phone. Telephone ; Party on hold = To interconnect parties by creating a : To transmit individual characters using the character bar ; To transmit a phone book entry as a character string conference connection X To interconnect parties by creating a conference connection: select Conference= by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Sending DTMF tones This function is not supported by all mobile phones. Answering machines or other devices can be controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote query functions. If you would like to listen to the messages on your answering machine, for example, select the corresponding number. X Select DTMF from the telephone basic menu during a conversation. X To transmit individual characters: once a connection has been established to the answer phone, select the desired characters in the character bar and press W to confirm. or X To send a phone book entry as a DTMF sequence: select Name by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select the desired phone book entry and press W to confirm. The entry is sent as a DTMF character string. X To switch back to the call display: select B. i You can also send DTMF tones by pressing the corresponding button on the telephone keypad or using the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions). Using the phone book and address book The COMAND phone book is an extract of those entries from the address book which contain at least one telephone number. Z COMAND : Active party 187 188 Telephone The address book organizes and stores entries that are entered from different sources (mobile phone, SD memory card, Bluetooth® import, COMAND phone book, navigation). You can use these entries to make telephone calls and for navigation. COMAND Importing contacts automatically If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND via the Bluetooth® interface, the contacts (phone book entries) of the mobile phone are automatically imported into COMAND's phone book. Depending on the mobile phone, this process may take some time. Depending on the mobile phone used, only the phone book entries in the mobile phone or these entries and the phone book entries from the SIM card are imported. The automatically imported contacts (phone book entries) can be recognized in COMAND by the Ã/0 symbol. They are only available in COMAND if the corresponding mobile phone is connected to COMAND via the Bluetooth® interface. Importing contacts manually i The stored phone book and the vCards remain in COMAND, even if you use COMAND with another mobile phone. The entries can be viewed without a mobile phone. For this reason, delete the phone book before selling or transferring ownership of your vehicle. Existing contact data can be imported from the memory card manually. X To import data: load the memory card. X Select Data/connections in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Download Contacts and press W to confirm. X Select From Memory Card and press W to confirm. X Select Add or Overwrite and press W to confirm. If the data has been imported, the Import successful message is displayed. If the COMAND phone book memory is full, this message appears in the display: Memory full. Contacts could not be imported completely. i After the data has been imported, COMAND has to process it. The entries are only visible in the address/phone book when this is completed. Receiving vCards via Bluetooth® You can receive vCards from devices (such as a PC) which support the transmission of vCards via Bluetooth®. This requires the device to be authorized in COMAND. PCs must be authorized via the Bluetooth® device list (Y page 132). Received vCards are imported into the address book. Please bear the following in mind: RBluetooth® must be activated in COMAND and on the Bluetooth® device (N operating instructions of the device). Rthe Bluetooth® device must be able to send vCards via Bluetooth® (N operating instructions of the device). Rthe Bluetooth® device in the vehicle must be switched on. Telephone 189 i If you switch to another main function, e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, the reception of vCards will be terminated. X X Start data transfer on the external Bluetooth device (N operating instructions of the device). The data on the vCards is automatically transferred to the address book. The number of vCards received is displayed. X To cancel reception: press W. or X Press the % back button on the center console. Calling up contacts/details You can call up contacts with the list or by using the character bar. Phone book/address book basic display : List Ç Entry with navigable data \ Entry with voice tag; see the separate operating instructions for the Voice Control System Æ Address book entry à Mobile phone entry 0 SIM card entry ® Entry imported via Bluetooth® ¯ Entry imported via memory card G Entry with multiple phone numbers ; Two-line character bar B To change the language of the characters p To select the character set F To delete your selection ¬ To confirm your selection % Back Calling up contacts from a list X Phone book: select Name in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Address book: select Data/Connections in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Address Book and press W to confirm. Z COMAND Select Data/Connections in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Download Contacts and press W to confirm. X Select Via Bluetooth and press W to confirm. This interrupts the Bluetooth® connection between COMAND and your active mobile phone. In turn, COMAND is ready to receive vCards from another Bluetooth® device. Telephone 190 X To switch from the character bar to the list: slide ZV the COMAND controller until the character bar is hidden. or approximately 2 mph (3 km/h), the function becomes available again. i You can enter address data directly into the address book. If you store contacts in the phone book, these are also saved in the address book. X Select ¬. X To call a contact: select by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. i Automatically imported contacts cannot be edited. They have to be saved first before being copied to the COMAND address book. i The phone book is also available via the COMAND on-board computer (Y page 341). Calling up contacts using the character bar X Phone book: select Name in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Address book: select Data/Connections in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Address Book and press W to confirm. X To select a character: select by sliding ZVÆ or XVY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Repeat this procedure until COMAND automatically switches over to the list. You determine the first letter of the entry you are looking for with the first character you enter. If there are similar entries, the next character which is different will be displayed and offered for selection. X Call up the contact (Y page 189)9. X Select Options by sliding VY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select New Entry or Edit and press W to confirm. The input menu with data fields appears. i You can also use the telephone number keypad to enter characters. Creating new contacts/changing contacts i In certain countries, this function stops being available from a vehicle speed of more than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). As soon as the speed falls below 9 Only available with the "Change contact" function. : Entry mark (cursor) ; Data field = Two-line character bar B To select the language Telephone p To select the character set */E To select uppercase and lowercase letters % Back F To delete your selection ¬ To confirm your selection ? Preset phone category 191 Deleting contacts X Enter the respective data in the data fields. To enter data in the data field: select the respective characters from character bar =. X To move the cursor in the data field: select the respective characters from character bar =. X To change data fields: slide ZV the COMAND controller until the character bar is hidden. X Slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press Æ in the character bar. X To cancel data entry: select the % symbol in the character bar and press W to confirm. If one of the data fields contains data, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to store the entry. X To save data entry: select the ¬ symbol in the character bar and press W to confirm. The entry is created in the phone book and in the address book. X To delete a group of contacts: select Data/Connections in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Delete Contacts and press W to confirm. You can select and delete the following types of contact here: RInternal Contacts from Memory Card RImported via Bluetooth RDelete All X Confirm the selection by pressing W. A prompt appears asking whether the data should be deleted. X Select Yes and press W to confirm. RImported X To delete an individual contact: select the entry (Y page 189). X Select Options by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the data should be deleted. X Select Yes and press W to confirm. i Automatically imported contacts cannot be deleted (Y page 188). Z COMAND X Telephone COMAND 192 Calling a number stored in an entry Starting route guidance to an entry Using the phone book X Select Name in the telephone basic menu by sliding VY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Call up the contact (Y page 189). X Contact with multiple telephone numbers (with the G symbol): press W. or X Press SEND on the telephone keypad. A list of all telephone numbers is opened. X Select the desired number by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Press W. or X Press SEND on the telephone keypad. The number is dialed. X Contact with one telephone number (without the G symbol): press W. or X Press SEND on the telephone keypad. The number is dialed. i This function is available as soon as you i You can also use the phone book in the X on-board computer to make a call (Y page 341). Using the address book Select Data/Connections in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Address Book and press W to confirm. X Call contact (Y page 189) and press W to confirm. X Select the telephone number by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X have stored a destination in the destination memory (Y page 163). COMAND also stores the destination in the address book with the complete navigable address data. In this case, navigation can be started without any further data input. If the contact entry contains a postal address, e.g. as a result of importing a vCard, the system can also navigate to this address. If the data is incomplete or unclear, COMAND asks the user to enter the relevant address data. After the entry has been completed and navigation has been started, COMAND replaces the existing address with the navigable address if necessary. X Search for an address book entry using the ¤ symbol. X Confirm the entry by pressing W. Telephone numbers and addresses are displayed. X Select the address data field. X Press the COMAND controller. or Select Options by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Navigate and press W to confirm. X Select Start and press W to confirm. Voice tags i Voice tags are entered via the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions for the Voice Control System. Adding or changing a voice tag i You can add one voice tag per address book entry. Telephone X Deleting a voice tag X Search for an address book entry with a voice tag. X Select Options by sliding VY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Voice Name and press W to confirm. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A deletion prompt appears. Listening to a voice tag X Search for an address book entry with a voice tag. X Select Options by sliding VY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Voice Name and press W to confirm. X Select Listen and press W to confirm. You will hear the voice tag. received in COMAND or if the call lists have been imported from the telephone. Opening the call list and selecting an entry X To call up the telephone menu: press the S function button. X Select Call lists in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Select Calls received or Calls Dialed and press W to confirm. The corresponding list appears. i The list of calls made can also be opened by pressing the SEND button in the menu or on the telephone keypad as long as no phone numbers have been entered in the basic menu. The list of calls made can also be opened in the on-board computer. Example display: list of calls made : To close the list ; Telephone number/name if known Using call lists Introduction COMAND displays calls received (including missed calls) and made during phone operation in lists. i The respective menu item can only be selected if calls have already been made or = To call up options (e.g. save) X Select an entry by sliding VÆ the COMAND controller. X To dial a phone number: press the 6 button. or X Press W to confirm. Z COMAND Search for an address book entry with or without a voice tag (¦ symbol). X Select Options by sliding VY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Voice Name and press W to confirm. X Select Add or Edit and press W to confirm. Subsequent operation is voice-controlled. The Voice Control System guides you through the menus. 193 Telephone COMAND 194 Incoming calls which you could not or did not want to answer are marked with a symbol in front of the name or phone number. Phone category Display (phone book and address book) Storing a phone number which has not yet been stored Car ^ Landline ¬ Introduction For incoming calls from a person who is not in the address book, COMAND displays the phone number in the call list. You can save this entry. Preferred O Storing as a new entry in the address book X Open a call list and select an entry (Y page 193). X Select Options by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Save Number and press W to confirm. X Select New Entry and press W to confirm. i If you have not entered the phone number in a number and telephone category, the ; icon will appear in the display. X Select Next (save) and press W to confirm. An input menu with data fields is shown. The data field for the telephone number is filled in automatically. X Select a category for the number, e.g. Home, and press W to confirm. X Select a category for the phone, e.g. Cellular Phone Number, and press W to confirm. Display (phone book and address book) : Data fields for surname, first name and Not Classified No symbol = Phone category Home 6 Number category Work \ company ; Number category ? The data field for the telephone number is filled in automatically. A Two-line character bar X Phone category Display (phone book and address book) Not Classified No symbol Mobile Phone ¢ Pager ¨ Proceed as described under "Entering characters" in the "Entering characters in the address and phone books" section (Y page 122). Audio X Search for the desired entry (Y page 189). Press W when you have finished searching. X Select a category for the number, e.g. Home, and press W to confirm. X Select a category for the phone, e.g. Cellular Phone Number, and press W to confirm. X Select Next (save) and press W to confirm. COMAND stores the data if there are fewer than five numbers assigned to the entry you are searching for. You will see a message to this effect. If five numbers are stored for the entry you are searching for, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite one of the existing numbers. X Audio Radio mode General information i Portable electronic devices in the vehicle may seriously impair radio reception. Switching to radio mode Option 1 X Press R the function button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last waveband. Option 2 X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If radio mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If another audio mode is switched on, you can now switch to radio mode in the audio menu. X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. The audio menu appears. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes, a selection list with the five existing numbers appears. If you select No, the process will be aborted. X Select the number to be overwritten in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND overwrites the selected number with the new data. Example display: audio menu : Current audio operating mode ; Main function bar = Audio menu X Select FM/AM radio by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Z COMAND Adding a phone number to an address book entry X Open a call list and select an entry (Y page 193). X Select Options by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Save Number and press W to confirm. X Select Add and press W to confirm. The search menu for address book entries appears. 195 Audio 196 Selecting a station Selecting a station using the station search function X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/selection window in the radio display is active. Station search scans up or down and stops at the next station found. COMAND Using the multifunction steering wheel Example display, FM radio : Display window with station settings X Press = or ; to select the Audio menu. ; Frequency of the selected station X Press 9 or : briefly. = Name of the selected station ? Display bar for frequency setting A Sound settings B Waveband C Station information Selecting stations via the station presets X Quick setting: press a number key, e.g. l. X D Preset functions E Radio functions Switching wavebands X Select FM, AM or WB in the radio display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Waveband submenu is opened. Directly in the station presets: select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press W the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active. The station preset memory appears. The # dot indicates under which preset the currently selected station is stored. X Select a station by turning cVd and pressing W to confirm or press a number key, e.g. l. Using the multifunction steering wheel X Press = or ; to select the Audio menu. X Press 9 or : briefly. 1 The waveband submenu (the # dot shows the waveband currently set) X Select a waveband and press W to confirm. You will hear the last station played on the selected waveband. Selecting stations by entering the frequency manually X Option 1: press the Ä button. X Option 2: select Radio in the radio display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Audio Select Enter Frequency and press W to confirm. Irrespective of the option chosen, an input menu will appear. X Enter a frequency using the number keys. COMAND tunes in to the frequency entered. Waveband Frequency AM (MF) 530 – 1700 kHz FM (VHF) 87.7 – 107.9 MHz WB (Weather Band) Weather report channels i You can only enter currently permitted Example display: station presets X Select a preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press and hold W until you hear a tone. The station is stored under the preset. Storing stations manually There are twenty presets available for the FM and AM wavebands. X Quick save: press and hold a number key, e.g. l, until you hear a tone. The station is stored. Storing stations automatically This function automatically stores stations with adequate reception under the presets. The search starts at the lowest frequency. COMAND stores any stations found, beginning with preset 1. The storing process ends once the highest frequency has been reached or once ten stations have been found. Any stations stored manually under the presets will be lost. COMAND may not occupy all memory slots when storing. X Option 1: press W the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active. The station preset memory appears. X X numbers. i If you enter a frequency in the FM or AM wavebands which is outside the frequency range, COMAND tunes in to the next lower frequency. Storing stations Directly in the station presets: press W the COMAND controller when the display/ selection window is active. or X Select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. In both cases, the station presets appear. The # dot indicates under which preset the currently selected station is stored. Option 2: select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The station preset memory appears. X Irrespective of the option, select Autostore and press W to confirm. In both cases, COMAND searches for stations that can be received. You will see a message to this effect. The available stations are automatically stored in the preset positions. X To cancel storing: select Cancel and press W to confirm. Z COMAND X 197 Audio 198 Weather Band Switching on X Select the currently set waveband FM or AM by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select WB from the menu and press W to confirm. COMAND X Select a channel by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press a number key on the telephone keypad, e.g. 4, at any time. Displaying station information : Display window with the channel setting ; Currently received channel = Channel list ? Weather Band switched on A Sound settings Searching for a channel X Quick select: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/ selection window is active. Channel search scans up or down and stops at the next channel found. This function is only available for analog FM and digital AM/FM programs (HD Radio). Information relevant to the current station is shown below the main function bar. X Select Radio in the radio display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Using the multifunction steering wheel X Press = or ; to select the Audio menu. X Press 9 or :. Selecting a channel from the channel list X Select Channel by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The channel list appears. X Select Show Station Info by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch Show Station Info on O or off ª. Audio Displaying program information For further information on HD Radio, visit http://www.hdradio.com. i Please note that sub-programs and program information shown in the illustrations are dependent on the program broadcast by the respective radio station. The program contents may vary. The subprograms and programs shown in the illustrations in this manual may therefore differ from the sub-programs and programs broadcast by radio stations. Switching on HD Radio i As HD Radio stations are broadcast in the AM/FM wavebands, operating HD Radio is very similar to operating analog AM/FM radio. This section describes only those functions that differ from standard FM radio functions. HD Radio Important notes The "HD Radio" section provides detailed information on the following: Rspecial functions available exclusively for HD Radio when compared with analog AM and FM radio Rselecting an HD Radio station Rdisplaying program information Operating analog FM/AM radio is described in the "Radio" section (Y page 195). You can deactivate HD Radio for the selected frequency in the radio submenu. i Optional HD Radio equipment is required to make use of the HD Radio functions described here. Registration is not required. i HD Radio functions offer: Rdigital transmission on the same wavebands as analog AM/FM. The analog AM/FM stations remain in the same position when selecting a station. Rthe ability to broadcast several program streams over a single AM/FM frequency (e.g. HD1, HD2 etc.) Rclear, interference free reception Ron FM stations: CD quality sound; on AM stations: analog FM station sound quality Ra wide range of data services, text-based information – name of artist, name of song etc. – on the display. X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select FM/AM Radio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears. X Select Radio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. HD Radio is deactivated if the c check box is empty. Z COMAND This function is only available for analog FM and digital AM/FM programs (HD Radio). Information relevant to the current station is shown in the display window. X Select Info in the radio display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Information on the currently selected station is displayed. The contents and purpose of the information depend on the HD Radio station. 199 200 Audio You hear the analog program of this frequency. As soon as you change to another HD Radio frequency, the HD Radio is reactivated. COMAND HD Radio display 1 Display/selection window with frequency display 2 Preset number 3 Name of the selected station with HD icon and program number 4 Station frequency 5 Sound settings 6 FM, AM or WB radio 7 Program information 8 Station presets 9 Radio functions Switching wavebands See "Switching wavebands" in the radio mode section (Y page 196). Selecting a station You can select an HD Radio station in the same way as selecting a standard FM radio station. After setting an HD Radio frequency, you will briefly hear the analog station until the digital data has been decoded. You will then be listening to digital radio and be able to switch to a sub-program (-HD2). See "Selecting stations" in the Radio mode section (Y page 196). Storing stations See "Storing stations" in the Radio mode section (Y page 197). Displaying program information X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. The audio menu appears. X Select HD Radio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Info in the HD Radio display by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Information on the currently selected station is displayed. The contents and purpose of the information depend on the HD Radio station. Satellite radio Important notes This section provides detailed information on the following topics: Rselecting a channel and program category functions Rsound settings Rmemory i The satellite radio mode described below requires optionally available satellite radio equipment and registration with a satellite radio provider. i Note that the categories and channels shown in the illustrations depend on the program content offered by the provider. The program contents may vary. The illustrations and descriptions in these operating instructions may therefore differ from the channels and categories offered by the provider. Audio i You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS XM Radio website at http://www.sirius.com (USA) or http://www.siriuscanada.com (Canada). Once the connection has been established: X i SIRIUS XM Radio offers more than 130 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sport, news and entertainment. SIRIUS XM Radio employs a fleet of highperformance satellites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Details are available from the SIRIUS XM Service Center and at http://www.sirius.com (USA) or http://www.siriuscanada.com (Canada). Registering satellite radio X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Sat. Radio and press W to confirm. Follow the instructions of the service staff. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. If the activation is completed successfully, the No Service message appears in the display, followed by the satellite radio main menu. i If registration is not included when purchasing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account. If the satellite receiver is not installed or is not installed correctly, the Device not available message will appear. Switching on satellite radio mode Notes Important notes on registration, see "Registering satellite radio" (Y page 201). Switching on satellite radio mode X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If satellite radio mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If another audio mode is switched on, you can now switch to satellite radio mode in the audio menu. X Service information screen 1 Provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM) 2 SIRIUS XM ID of your satellite receiver X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. The audio menu appears. X Select Sat. Radio and press W to confirm. The No Service message appears when starting up or if no signal is being received. Call the phone number of your satellite radio provider shown on the screen. Z COMAND Satellite radio mode may be temporarily unavailable or interrupted for a variety of reasons. These reasons include environmental or topographical conditions as well as other issues beyond the control of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Operation may also be impaired in certain locations (e.g. tunnels, multi-storey car parks or within as well as close to buildings). 201 202 Audio If the satellite receiver is not installed or is not installed correctly, the Device not available message will appear. COMAND Once COMAND receives the signal, the satellite radio display appears. The station last selected is played. Satellite radio main menu 1 Satellite radio main display 2 Preset 3 Channel name 4 Selected category/channel number 5 Sound settings 6 Category list 7 Channel information (in brief) 8 Channel information (in detail) 9 Channel preset list a SatRadio menu Channel information 7 can be viewed in detail (Y page 204). Changing the category Satellite radio stations are sorted into various categories. You can choose between the different categories, such as news/talk shows, sports or country, if they are available. The category list is sorted alphabetically. Selecting a category X To call up the category list: select Category by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The category list appears. X To select a category: select a category by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. The category selected is shown in the display. You hear the station last selected for this category. The All Channels category is at the top of the category list. This category is sorted by channel number and allows you to browse all available channels. Selecting a channel Channel search X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/selection window in the SatRadio display is active. COMAND searches in both directions (ascending and descending) and stops at the next channel found in the selected category. Using the multifunction steering wheel X Press = or ; to select the Audio menu. X Press and hold 9 or :. SatRadio menu X Select Sat. Radio in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The SatRadio menu appears. Entering channel numbers directly Option 1 X Press the Ä button. An input menu appears. Audio X X Select Sat. Radio in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Enter Channel and press W to confirm. An input menu appears. X To enter a channel: irrespective of the option, press the corresponding number keys on the control panel one after the other. COMAND sets the selected channel. i You can only select currently permitted digits. Selecting a channel from the SatRadio channel list X Select Sat. Radio in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Channel List and press W to confirm. The channel list appears. X Select a channel by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Memory functions Storing channels i There are ten presets available. X Press W the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active. or X Select Presets in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. In both cases, the channel presets appear. The R dot in front of a preset position indicates that the currently selected channel is stored there. Select a preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press and hold W until you hear a tone. or X Press and hold a number button, e.g. 4, until you hear a tone. The channel is stored under the preset. Storing channels automatically This function automatically stores channels with adequate reception in the preset memory. Channels stored manually in the preset memory will be overwritten. X Option 1: press W the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active. X Select Autostore in the presets by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Option 2: select Presets in the submenu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Autostore and press W to confirm. In both cases, COMAND searches for channels that can be received. You will see a message to this effect. The available channels are automatically stored in the preset positions. X To cancel storing: select Cancel and press W to confirm. Selecting a channel from the preset list X To call up the channel list: select Presets by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The channel preset list appears. X To set a channel: select a preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press a number key, e.g. 4. Z COMAND Option 2 203 Audio 204 Using the multifunction steering wheel X COMAND Press = or ; to select the Audio menu. X Press 9 or : briefly. Displaying information X Select Info in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Information on the currently received program is displayed. X To return to the SatRadio main display: slide XVY the COMAND controller. Displaying service information The provider's customer service center is available by phone at any time to answer any general questions or questions on the versions available. X Select Sat. Radio in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Service and press W to confirm. The provider's details appear. X To return to the SatRadio main display: slide XVY the COMAND controller. Channel list updates When receiving a new channel list, the display shows the Updating channel... message. The station last selected is switched to mute until the update has been completed. Satellite radio mode is not available during this process. Once the update has been completed, the satellite radio main menu appears. The station last selected is played. Sound settings You will find details on the sound settings in the "At a glance" section (Y page 125). Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode Important safety notes G WARNING COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser product. You must not open the casing. If you open the casing, or if the casing is faulty or damaged, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This may damage your eyes, or those of others. COMAND does not contain any parts that can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, all maintenance work must be carried out by qualified aftersales technicians. G WARNING Only when the vehicle is stationary should you: Rload a disc a disc There is a risk of being distracted from the road and traffic conditions if this is done while the vehicle is in motion. Reject Inserting/ejecting CDs/DVDs DVD changer The DVD changer has a fixed magazine with six trays. Magazine tray status =: RIndicator lamp off: magazine tray is empty. RIndicator lamp constantly lit: magazine tray is loaded. Audio To load a single magazine tray: press respective button =. X Remove any CD/DVD which may be in slot :. X Wait until the indicator lamp for button = which has been pressed flashes quickly. X Insert the CD/DVD to be loaded into slot :. If the CD/DVD has been inserted properly and it is a permissible type, the last CD/ DVD loaded will be played. X Remove the CD/DVD from slot :. The DVD changer switches to the next loaded magazine tray and ejects the CD/ DVD. X Repeat the last step until the magazine is empty. Loading and removing SD cards i Not all SD memory cards are designed for the temperatures which may be reached in the vehicle. Due to the wide range of SD cards available on the market, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee playback for all brands of SD memory card. X To load all six magazine trays: press button ;. The DVD changer checks the load status of all magazine trays and switches to the first empty tray. X Wait until the indicator lamp for the respective button flashes quickly. X Insert a disc into slot :. The DVD changer switches to the next empty magazine tray. X Repeat the last two steps until all trays are loaded. If the CD/DVD has been inserted properly and it is a permissible type, the last CD/ DVD loaded will be played. i If you remove one disc while playing another disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback. Playback continues once the disc has been removed. X To remove a disc: press respective button =. X Remove the CD/DVD from slot :. If the CD/DVD is not removed from slot :, it will be automatically drawn in again after a short while. X To remove all discs: press button ?. The DVD changer ejects the CD/DVD from the tray currently in use. X To load an SD card: press the SD card into slot :. The tapered side must point towards the right. If the SD card contains MP3 tracks, COMAND will play them back. X To remove the SD card: press the SD card into slot : as far as it will go and then release it again. X Pull out the card. Activating audio CD/DVD or MP3 mode Option 1 X Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 204) or an SD card (Y page 205) or connect a USB device (Y page 217). COMAND loads the medium inserted and starts to play it. Z COMAND X 205 Audio COMAND 206 Option 2 X Press the R function button once or twice. C Graphic time and track display X F Media selection Select an audio medium from the media list (Y page 208). Option 3 X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The last active audio source is now activated. If another audio source is switched on, you can now switch to disc mode in the audio menu. D Sound settings E Current playback option G Music search H Recording (saving) music I CD functions Example display: audio DVD mode X Select Audio by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears. X Select Disc, Memory Card, MUSIC REGISTER, Media Interface or USB and press W to confirm. This switches to the desired audio source. : Disc type Select an audio medium from the media list (Y page 208). A Track time X Example display: audio CD mode ; Track name = Disc number ? Disc name (only if stored on the disc) B Graphic time and track display C Sound settings D Current playback option E Media selection F Music search G Stop function H Pause function I Audio DVD mode : Disc type ; Track number = Disc number ? Disc name (only if stored on the disc) A Track name (only if stored on the disc) B Track time Example display: MP3 mode : Disc type Only in audio DVD mode X To pause playback: switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 205). X Select Ë by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Ë display changes to Ì. X To continue playback: select Ì and press W to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted. The Ì display changes to Ë. ; Disc number = File or track name (ID3 tags) Stop function ? Disc or directory name A Current playback option This function is only available in audio DVD mode. B Track time X C Graphic time and track display X D Sound settings E Media selection F Music search G Artist (ID3 tags) H MP3 functions Pause function In audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode X To pause playback: briefly press the 8 button on the multifunction steering wheel. X To continue playback: briefly press the 8 button on the multifunction steering wheel again. Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 205). To interrupt playback: select É by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Ë display changes to Ì. É remains highlighted. X To continue playback: select Ì and press W to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted. X To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press W to confirm. or X Select É and confirm by pressing W twice in rapid succession. Ì is highlighted. X To restart playback: select Ì and press W to confirm. Playback starts at the beginning of the DVD. Z 207 COMAND Audio 208 Audio Selecting CD/audio DVD/MP3 discs MUSIC REGISTER, position 3 Selecting via the media list X In CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode: select Media by sliding VÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The media list appears. The # dot indicates the currently selected medium. Media Interface, position 4 USB, position 5 X Select the data medium by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. i If you select a video DVD, the system COMAND switches to video DVD mode (Y page 224). Selecting a track using the number keypad X Press a number button, e.g. n, when the display/selection window is active. The medium at the corresponding position in the media list is loaded and then played. Media list The media list shows the discs currently available. Media list (when equipped with a DVD changer) Magazine trays, positions 1 to 6: readable data media are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3 DVDs, audio DVDs and video DVDs. Memory card, position 7 MUSIC REGISTER, position 8 Media Interface, position 9 USB, position 10 i If a disc cannot be read, an entry appears after the display in the magazine tray. Equipped with a single DVD drive DVD drive, position 1: readable data media are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3 DVDs, audio DVDs and video DVDs. Memory card, position 2 Selects a track Selecting by skipping to a track X To skip forwards or back to a track: slide XVY or turn cVd the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active. The skip forward function skips to the next track. Skipping backwards restarts the current track (if it has been playing for more than 8 seconds) or starts the previous track (if the current track has only been playing for a shorter time). If you activate the Medium Mix or Track List Mix playback option (MP3 mode only), the track order is random. X On the multifunction steering wheel: switch COMAND to audio CD, audio DVD or MP3 mode (Y page 205). X Press = or ; to select the Audio menu. X Press the 9 or : button on the multifunction steering wheel. Audio Fast forward/rewind X While the display/selection window is active, slide XVY and hold the COMAND controller until the desired position has been reached. Music search On the multifunction steering wheel: switch COMAND to audio CD, audio DVD or MP3 mode (Y page 205). X Press = or ; to select the Audio menu. X Press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired track has been reached. You can use the following characteristics to search music: RKeyword search RPlaylist RArtists RAlbums RTracks RGenres RYear X In audio mode, select Search by sliding VÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A selection list appears. X Select the desired characteristic by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If you hold down 9 or :, the system runs through the list more quickly. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function. If track information is stored on the audio drive or data storage device, the multifunction display shows the number and name of the track. For the search, the media inserted is scanned and the music track data is stored in a COMAND database. A medium that has already been scanned is not scanned again if another search is carried out. The scanning process may take some time for media with a large capacity. The search can be carried out after the scanning process is finished. Selecting a track using the number keypad X Press the Ä button on the number keypad. A numerical entry field appears. The number of positions offered corresponds to the number of tracks on the CD/DVD. Only numbers that correspond to a track number on the CD/DVD can be entered. X Enter the desired track number using the number keys. Selecting a folder i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracks in alphabetical order. X This function is only available in MP3 mode. X Switch on MP3 mode (Y page 205). X Select Search by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Folder by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the tracks in the folder. Z COMAND Selecting by track list X In audio mode, select Search by sliding VÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Current Track List. or X Press W the COMAND controller in audio mode when the display/selection window is active. X Select Current Track List by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select the track by turning cVd and press W to confirm. 209 Audio 210 ? Title selection A To start the copying process B Name of the copied data C Cancel procedure without copying files D Media position in the media list X COMAND X Select a track by turning cVd and press W to confirm. The track is played and the corresponding folder is now the active folder. Copying music files from audio CDs to the hard disk Audio files can be copied from CD to COMAND's hard disk. X Select Audio by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Switch on CD/audio DVD or MP3 mode (Y page 205). X Select a medium (Y page 208). The audio CD is played. X To copy all music tracks: select REC by sliding VÆ and turning cVd and confirm with W. Select START by sliding VÆ and turning cVd and confirm with W. All music tracks from the audio CD are copied to COMAND's MUSIC REGISTER as MP3 files. X To copy individual music tracks: select Track Select. by sliding VÆ and turning cVd and confirm with W. The track list appears. X Select individual tracks by turning cVd and confirm with W. X Select START by turning cVd and confirm with W. The selected music tracks from the audio CD are copied to COMAND's MUSIC REGISTER as MP3 files. If the audio CD contains CD text or Gracenote® data, this will be used for naming when the tracks are copied. The data is then copied to the MUSIC REGISTER in the following structure: artist/album/track. The copied titles can then be selected and played using the music search in the MUSIC REGISTER. X To delete music files:(Y page 217). Gracenote Media Database : Audio source ; Destination = Total length of all tracks from the audio source Introduction This function is only available in audio CD mode. There is a version of the music recognition software from Gracenote®, Emeryville, California, USA on the hard disk. You will recognize this by the logo which can be seen in the bottom right-hand corner of certain audio displays. Audio 211 X Updating Gracenote® music recognition technology and the Gracenote Media Database The digital data on the Gracenote Media Database becomes obsolete due to the release of new CDs. Optimum functionality can only be attained with up-to-date Gracenote® music recognition technology. Information about new versions can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have your music recognition software updated there with a DVD, or you can update it yourself. i The Gracenote Media Database is updated in conjunction with the navigation system's digital map (Y page 172). Setting the audio format Selecting Gracenote® data to be displayed If the inserted CD does not contain any Gracenote® data, the Gracenote Media Database menu item is shown in gray and cannot be selected. You can only set the audio format in audio DVD mode. The number of audio formats available depends on the DVD. The content of an audio DVD is called an "album", and this can be divided into up to nine groups. A group can contain music in different sound qualities (stereo and multichannel formats, for example), or bonus tracks. Each group can contain up to 99 tracks. If an audio DVD only contains one audio format, the "Group" menu item(s) cannot be selected. X Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 205). X Select DVD-A by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Z COMAND Many audio CDs contain CD text. COMAND uses the information contained therein to display the artist, album and track name. If the audio CD does not contain any CD text information, COMAND can use the Gracenote Media Database to identify unknown audio tracks when running in audio CD mode. This is only possible if the relevant information is saved in the Gracenote Media Database and if the "Gracenote Media Database" function is activated. If this is the case, COMAND will display the corresponding data such as artist, album and track name in the relevant displays and lists. If COMAND accesses the Gracenote Media Database when reading an audio CD, you will see the following message: Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 205). X Select CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Gracenote Media Database by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Switch the function on O or off ª. Audio 212 X Select Group by turning cVd and press W to confirm. The list of available groups appears. The # dot indicates the group currently selected. X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND controller or press the % button. Playback options The following options are available to you: COMAND RNormal Track Sequence The tracks are played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.). In MP3 mode, the track order is determined by the order in which the tracks are written to the MP3 data carrier when it is created. Alphabetical order is the most common. Once all the tracks in a folder have been played, the tracks in the next folder are played. RMedium Mix All the tracks on the medium are played in random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.). RTrack List Mix (MP3 mode only) All the tracks that are listed in the current track list are played in random order. X To select options: switch on audio CD/ DVD or MP3 mode (Y page 205). X Select CD, DVD-A or MP3 by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option selected. X Select an option by turning cVd and press W to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options except "Normal track sequence", you will see a corresponding display in the display/ selection window. See the example of the display in audio CD mode (Y page 205). i The "Normal track sequence" option is automatically selected when you change the medium you are currently listening to or when you select a different medium. If an option is selected, it remains selected after COMAND is switched on or off. Notes on MP3 mode Permissible discs RCD-R and CD-RW RDVD+R and DVD+RW RDVD-R and DVD-RW RSD memory card: RUSB stick RiPod® RMP3 player Permissible file systems RISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDs RUDF for audio and video DVDs RFAT16 or FAT32 for storage media Multisession CDs For multisession CDs, the content of the first session determines how COMAND will process the CD. COMAND plays only one session and gives priority to the audio CD session. If possible, use COMAND to play only CDs which have been written in one session. File structure of a data carrier When you create a disc with compressed music files, the tracks can be organized in folders. A folder may also contain subfolders. A disc can contain a maximum of 255 folders. Each folder can contain a maximum of 255 tracks and 255 subfolders. The disc may contain no more than eight directory levels. Files beyond the eighth level will not be recognized by the system. Track and file names When you create a disc with compressed music files, you can assign names to the tracks and folders. COMAND uses these names accordingly for the display. Folders which contain data other than MP3 or WMA tracks are not displayed by COMAND. If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root directory itself, the root directory will also be treated as a folder. COMAND will then show the name of the root directory as the folder name. You must observe the following when assigning track names: Rtrack names must have at least 1 character. Rtrack names must have the extension "mp3" or "wma". Rthere must be a full stop between the track name and the extension. Example of a correct track name: "Track1.mp3". i COMAND does not support ID3 tags. Permissible formats COMAND supports the following formats: RMicrosoft Windows Media Audio V2, V7, V8 and V9 (WMA) Permissible bit and sampling rates COMAND supports MP3 files of the following types: Rfixed and variable bit rates from 32 kbit/s to 320 kbit/s Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz COMAND supports WMA files of the following types: Rfixed bit rates from 5 kbit/s to 384 kbit/s Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz COMAND does not support WMA files of the following types: RDRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted files i Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least 44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a noticeable deterioration in quality. This is especially the case if you have activated a surround sound function. Notes on copyright MP3 or WMA tracks that you create or play back are generally subject to copyright protection in accordance with the applicable international and national regulations. In many countries, reproductions, even for private use, are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make sure that you know about the applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with these. If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your own compositions and recordings, or if the copyright holder has granted you permission, these restrictions do not apply. Notes on CDs/DVDs Discs with copy protection are not compatible with the audio CD standard and therefore may not be able to be played by COMAND. There may be playback problems when playing copied discs. There is a wide range of data carriers, disc-writing software and writers available. This variety means that there is no guarantee that the system will be able to play discs that you have copied yourself. There may be playback problems if you play CDs that you have copied yourself with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB. CDs of this type do not conform to the currently applicable standards. i On many DVD audio discs, the last track does not contain any music and COMAND then switches to the next disc. This is normal system behavior and does not mean that there is a malfunction. ! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. They could peel off and damage the drive. The drive is designed to hold discs which comply with the EN 60908 standard. Therefore, you can only use discs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm. Z 213 COMAND Audio Audio 214 If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio data on the other), they cannot be ejected and can damage the drive. Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm, even with an adapter. Only use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm. i COMAND is able to play back audio CDs COMAND in multichannel audio format. MUSIC REGISTER General notes You can store music files in MP3 or WMA format in the MUSIC REGISTER. The memory has a capacity of approximately 7 GB. ! Retain the original music files in a secure location. An error in COMAND might result in the loss of the music files stored in the MUSIC REGISTER. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data. Switching to MUSIC REGISTER Example display: MUSIC REGISTER : Type of data carrier: MUSIC REGISTER ; Track number = Track name ? Track time A Graphic time and track display B Current playback settings (no symbol for "Normal track sequence") C Sound settings D Media selection E Current folder F Search functions G Data carrier position in the media list H To call up the MUSIC REGISTER menu X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If MUSIC REGISTER was the last mode selected, it is now switched on. If another audio source is switched on, you can now switch on the MUSIC REGISTER in the audio menu. X Select Music Register and press W to confirm. Copying music data to the MUSIC REGISTER Introduction You can copy music files from discs in the DVD changer, the single DVD drive, the memory card or the COMAND USB, as long as they are in MP3 and/or WMA formats. i While copying, several functions will not be available. If this is the case, you will see a message to this effect. 1. Selecting a data medium X Select Audio by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears. Audio X Select Music Register and press W to confirm. X Select Copy Music Files and press W to confirm. 3. Starting the copying process COMAND : To copy from a memory card ; To copy to the MUSIC REGISTER = Memory requirement, see "Calling up memory space info" (Y page 216) : Data medium selected X To select a disc: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd and press W to confirm. The data medium is loaded. 215 ? To start the copying process A Name of the data carrier from which data is being copied and storage location B To cancel copying of music files 2. Selecting music files X Select All Music Files. This function copies all music files on the selected data carrier. The symbol in front of All Music Files is filled in. X Select Continue. The copying menu appears. C Data carrier position in the media list Folders can also be selected individually. X To select individual folders: select the corresponding folder by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd and press W to confirm. A tick in front of the entry highlights the selection. ! Under no circumstances should you X Select Start and press W to confirm. Copying begins. The progress bar indicates the status of the copying procedure. X To exit without copying files: select Back and press W to confirm. remove the memory card while you are copying data from it. This will generate unusable data in the MUSIC REGISTER. : Progress bar i It may take some time for the copying process to be completed, depending on the Z Audio 216 amount of data. The time required may vary depending on the data source. If there is not enough memory space, you will see a message to this effect. X To cancel copying: select Cancel. Music files are stored in the MUSIC REGISTER up until the point of cancellation. Deleting all music files COMAND This function deletes all music files from the MUSIC REGISTER. ! The deletion procedure may take several minutes. In order to prevent malfunctions, do not use COMAND during this period. X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Delete All Music Files and press W to confirm. A query appears. No is highlighted. If you select Yes, all music files are deleted. You see the Please wait... message. Then, you see the Deletion successful message. If you select No, the process will be aborted. Folder functions Introduction You can view the content of the MUSIC REGISTER, change folder or track names and delete individual folders or tracks. Calling up a folder X Select Search by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Folder and press W to confirm. You see the contents of the current folder. X To switch to the superordinate folder: select the U icon and press W to confirm. The display changes to the next folder up. Changing the folder/track name Calling up memory space info X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Memory Information and press W to confirm. The following is displayed: Rstorage capacity Ravailable memory Roccupied memory Rcontent (folders, tracks) : Folder selection symbol ; Icon for music file = Current folder X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Rename/Delete Files by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select a folder/track by turning cVd. X Select Options by sliding VY and press W to confirm. X Select Edit and press W to confirm. Audio Enter a name for the folder/track. X To save the changes: select ¬ and press W to confirm. Deleting folders/tracks X Select Rename/Delete Files by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select the folder/track by turning cVd. X Select Options by sliding VY and press W to confirm. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A query appears. No is highlighted. If you select Yes, the folders/tracks are deleted. You see the Please wait... message. Then, you see the Deletion Successful message. If you select No, the process will be aborted. Playback options The following options are available: RNormal Track Sequence The tracks are played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.). RMedium Mix All the tracks on the medium are played in random order. RTrack List Mix (MP3 mode only) All the tracks that are listed in the current track list are played in random order. X To select options: switch on the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 214). X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option selected. X Select an option and press W to confirm. The option is switched on. All options except Normal Track Sequence will be indicated by a corresponding icon in the display/selection window. i The Normal Track Sequence option is automatically selected when you change the disc you are currently listening to or when you select a different medium. If an option is selected, it remains selected after COMAND is switched on or off. Media Interface mode Connection options Overview You will find the connection sockets in the glove box. Device-specific adapter cables are required to connect external devices to the Media Interface. These cables are included in the Media Interface scope of delivery. i Store individual parts in a safe place. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz connection cables. You can connect the following data carriers to COMAND via the Media Interface: RiPod® RUSB devices (USB sticks, USB hard drives, MP3 players) i iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc., Cupertino, California, USA. Supported iPod® variants The following are examples of supported iPod® variants: RiPod® nano classic RiPod® touch RiPhone® RiPod® Supported USB devices The following USB devices are supported: RUSB sticks (flash memory) hard drives requiring a startup/ permanent current of a maximum of RUSB Z COMAND X 217 218 Audio 800 mA (it may be necessary to connect a separate power supply) Rcertain MP3 players i The Media Interface supports USB COMAND storage media of "USB Device Subclass 6". Information concerning USB Device Subclass 6 is available from the equipment manufacturer. X Connect the external device with suitable socket :, ; or =. COMAND activates the device automatically for sockets ; and =. COMAND does not activate the device automatically for socket :. For details and a list of supported devices, visit http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada). Connecting an external device i Do not leave external devices in the vehicle as extreme temperatures (e.g. direct sunlight or extremely low outside temperatures) could cause them to malfunction (see the operating instructions for the respective device). Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC accepts no liability for damage to external devices. Never connect more than one device at a time. You will otherwise not be able to operate the external device. If you remove a device from sockets ; and =, the No device connected message appears. i A connected iPod® or MP3 player should not be simultaneously operated via the Media Interface and the remote control (e.g. Bluetooth® remote control), as this may produce unpredictable results. i Connecting a fully discharged iPod® or MP3 player can result in an extended initialization period. Error messages appear while the device is being activated if: RCOMAND does not support the device connected. Rtwo devices are connected. Rthe connected device consumes too much power. Rthe Media Interface connection is faulty. : 4-pin jack for 1/8 inch jack plug, e.g. for MP3 player (audio and video) ; iPod® plug = USB socket ? Example of device, iPod® i Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if required. Audio General notes In extreme cases, starting up individual functions can take up to several minutes – this depends on the external device and its content (e.g. video podcasts). Only use the original software to save files on iPods or MP3 players. Otherwise, some or all functions may not be available. Option 1 X Connect an external device (Y page 218). COMAND activates the device. Following this, the basic display appears if there are any playable files on the data carrier. or X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If you had previously selected Media Interface mode, this will now be activated. If another audio source is switched on, you can now switch to Media Interface mode in the audio menu. X Select Audio by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears. X Select Media Interface and press W to confirm. Option 2 X Select Audio by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears. X Select Media Interface and press W to confirm. Option 3 X In the media list, (Y page 208) turn cVd the COMAND controller to select the entry under the corresponding position and press W to confirm. COMAND activates the connected device. You will see a message to this effect. The basic display then appears. If no device is connected, you will see the Media Interface entry instead of a device name. COMAND Switching to Media Interface mode 219 Example display: iPod mode : Data medium type ; Track number = Track name ? Graphic time display A Track time B Graphic track display C Current playback settings (no symbol for "Normal track sequence") D Sound settings E Media list F Album name (if available) G Categories, playlists and/or folders H Artist (if available) I Playback options Type of device : connected is indicated by the corresponding symbol for iPod, MP3 player or USB mass storage device. i If the device connected does not contain any playable tracks, a message appears to this effect. Z Audio 220 Selecting music files COMAND Note COMAND displays the data stored on the iPod®, MP3 player or USB mass storage device according to the filing structure used in the respective medium. Selecting by skipping to a track X To skip forwards or back to a track: turn cVd the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active. The skip forward function skips to the next track. The skip back function skips to the beginning of the current track if the track has been playing for more than eight seconds. If the track has been playing for less than eight seconds, it skips to the start of the previous track. If you have selected a playback option other than Normal Track Sequence, the track sequence is random. X On the multifunction steering wheel: switch on Media Interface mode (Y page 218). X On the multifunction steering wheel, press the = or ; button to select the Audio menu. X On the multifunction steering wheel, press 9 or : to select a track. Selecting using the number keypad X To make an entry: press the Ä button. An input menu appears. The number of characters available for input depends on the number of tracks that can currently be selected. X To enter a track number: press a number key, e.g. q. The digit is entered in the first position in the input line. i COMAND will ignore and not display an invalid digit. X Enter more numbers if desired. The selected track is played. Fast forward/rewind X While the display/selection window is active, slide XVY and hold the COMAND controller until the desired position has been reached. i On an iPod®, fast rewind only functions within the current track. Selecting a category/playlist/folder iPod® and certain MP3 players For an iPod® or MP3 player, you can select tracks using categories or folders. Depending on the device connected, the following categories may be available, for example: RCurrent tracklist (e.g. All) RPlaylists RArtists RAlbums RTracks RPodcasts RGenres RComposers RAudiobooks i Some playback categories contain the entry All. If this entry has been selected, the entire content of the category selected will be played. USB devices For USB mass storage devices, you can select both folders as well as any existing playlists. COMAND can also display the album name and artist (metadata) during playback, if this information has been entered into the system. Playlists are indicated in the display by a special icon. When you open the playlist, the corresponding tracks are displayed and playback begins once a track is selected. You can now select Category Mix instead of Random Folder as a playback option. Audio Selecting a category and opening a folder X Press W the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active. X Select Folder by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the available categories or the folder content (e.g. other folders). The display's status bar shows the selected category or the folder name. i The Music menu item is not available until the device has been activated. X Select the category/folder by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the content of the selected category or selected folder. i If the data needs to be read from the connected device, the Please wait... message appears. X If necessary, repeat this step until the tracks in the desired folder/album appear. X Select the track by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The track is played. X To select one folder higher: select the U icon and confirm with W. i The U icon is always shown at the top of the respective folder. Playing back the contents of a category or folder X Select the category or folder by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Press W the COMAND controller for longer than two seconds. The content of the category or folder selected is played in accordance with the playback option (Y page 222) selected. Alphabetical track selection iPod® and MP3 players This function is available for alphabetically sorted categories and folders. This function is not available for albums or playlists, for example. X Select a category, e.g. Artists, by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available artists are displayed. X Press the corresponding number key once or several times to select the first letter of the artist's name (e.g. for an artist beginning with the letter "C", press number key l three times). The available letters are listed at the lower edge of the display. After a message, the first entry in the list which matches the letter entered is highlighted. i If no corresponding entry exists, the last entry corresponding to a previous letter is highlighted instead. i For iPods® and MP3 players, the quality of the search results is highly dependent on the version and language variant of the software (e.g. iTunes® version) used to populate the device. USB mass storage device This function is available for alphabetically sorted directories. This function is not available for albums or playlists, for example. Z COMAND For USB mass storage devices, you can choose to display the metadata contained in the tags of the encoded music data, or to display the file and directory names during playback. X To display the album and artist name: select Media Interface in the basic display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Display Metadata and press W to confirm. 221 Audio 222 COMAND X In a directory, press the corresponding number key once or several times to select the first letter of the artist's name (e.g. for an artist beginning with the letter "C", press number key l three times). The available letters are listed at the lower edge of the display. If the directory only contains folders, COMAND searches for folders. After a message, the first entry which matches the letter entered is shown at the top of the list. If no entry matches the entered letter, the first item in the list is the last entry to correspond to a selection. Selecting an active partition (USB mass storage devices only) You can select this function for USB mass storage devices when the storage device is partitioned. Up to four partitions (primary or logical; FAT format) are supported. i The Windows formatting program supports FAT partitioning up to 32 GB as standard. X Select Media Interface in the basic display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Select Active Partition and press W to confirm. Playback options The following options are available: RNormal Track Sequence Normal track sequence: you hear the tracks in their normal order (e.g. numerical or alphabetical). RRandom Tracks All the tracks on the medium are played in random order. RCategory Mix or Random Folder (for USB devices if Folder has been selected) The tracks in the currently active category or folder, including any subfolders, are played in random order. i For USB devices, the random playlists offer a maximum of 300 tracks chosen at random. X To select a playback option: select Media Interface in the basic display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option selected. X Select an option and press W to confirm. Separate USB connection In addition to the USB connection on the Media Interface, there is another USB connection in the glove box. This connection can also be used to play audio files. Electrical consumption at this connection must not exceed a continuous current of 500 mA. If the electrical consumption is higher, use a separate source to provide power for the USB device (e.g. 12 V power supply). X To select music from the USB port as the audio source: select Audio by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears. X Select USB and press W to confirm. Notes on USB devices Data formats The following data formats are supported: RMP3: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s) CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s) RWMA: Audio X Select AUX using cVd and press W to confirm. The audio AUX menu appears. The medium in the external audio source is played, if the source is connected and playback selected. i DRM (Digital Rights Management) protected files are not supported by the Media Interface. Audio AUX mode Notes on audio AUX mode You can connect an external audio source (AUX) to COMAND. The socket for this is located in the glove box. If COMAND is equipped with a Media Interface, external audio sources are connected using the corresponding cable set. An AUX socket is not provided. i You can find more information on the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect and in the "Media Interface mode" section (Y page 217). Activating audio AUX mode When you connect an external audio source, audio AUX is not selected automatically. X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Please see the respective operating instructions for how to operate the external audio source. You will find details on volume (Y page 124) and sound (Y page 125) settings in the "At a glance" section. G WARNING External audio sources may have different volumes, which can mean that system messages such as traffic announcements and navigation system announcements are much louder. If necessary, please deactivate the system messages or adjust their volume manually. Increasing the volume In some cases, the volume of the AUX device may be quieter or louder, or the usual maximum possible volume cannot be reached. On some devices, it is possible to adjust the volume separately. In this case, start at a medium volume and increase it gradually. This enables you to determine whether the system is able to play tones at high volume without distorting them. Z COMAND Notes on USB devices RIn order to keep the initialization time to a minimum, store only music data on a USB device. RApproximately 10,000 tracks are supported. Multiple partitions should be used for larger numbers of tracks. RDo not use USB extension leads or adapters. They can impair functionality. RA background search of the USB device is performed and any playlists found are shown in a separate category in addition to the folders. Initialization of larger USB mass storage devices containing a large number of files may take several minutes. 223 Video 224 Video General information X X COMAND Automatic picture shutoff If the vehicle is traveling faster than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and video DVD mode is activated, the picture is deactivated automatically. The video picture is only shown if the selector lever is in the P position. When the selector lever is moved from the P position, the In order not to distract the driver, the picture is faded out while the vehicle is in motion. message appears. As soon as the vehicle speed falls below approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), the picture is reactivated. Basic settings Picture settings Adjusting the brightness, contrast or color X Press W the COMAND controller to show the menu. X Select Video by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select DVD-V and press W to confirm. X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Changing the picture format X Press W the COMAND controller to show the menu. X Select Video by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Video DVD and press W to confirm. Select DVD-V and press W to confirm. The DVD-V menu appears. The ä dot in front of a menu item indicates the current setting. X Select Auto, 16:9 optimized, 4:3 or Widescreen and press W to confirm. X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Video DVD mode Safety notes G WARNING COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser product. You must not open the casing. If you open the casing, or if the casing is faulty or damaged, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This may damage your eyes, or those of others. COMAND does not contain any parts that can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, all maintenance work must be carried out by qualified aftersales technicians. G WARNING Only when the vehicle is stationary should you: Rload a disc a disc There is a risk of being distracted from the road and traffic conditions if this is done while the vehicle is in motion. Reject Notes about discs There may be playback problems when playing copied discs. There are a large variety of discs, DVD authoring software, writing software and writers available. This variety means that there is no guarantee that the system will be able to play discs that you have copied yourself. Video as they could peel off and damage COMAND. Stickers can cause the disc to bend, which can result in read errors and disc recognition problems. ! COMAND is designed to accommodate discs which comply with the EN 60908 standard. You can therefore only use discs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm. If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio data on the other), they cannot be ejected and can damage COMAND. Use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm, even with an adapter. Function restrictions Depending on the DVD, it is possible that certain functions or actions will be temporarily blocked or may not function at all. As soon as you try to activate these functions or actions, you will see the K symbol in the display. Inserting and removing DVDs X Proceed as described in the "Inserting and ejecting CDs and DVDs" section (Y page 204). Activating video DVD mode DVD playback conditions Option 1 X Insert a video DVD. COMAND loads the medium inserted and starts to play it. If video DVDs do not conform to the NTSC or PAL TV standards, they may create picture, sound or other problems during playback. COMAND can play back video DVDs produced according to the following standards: Option 2 X Select Video in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Video DVD mode is switched on. Rregion code 1 or region code 0 (no region code) i If you insert a video DVD with a different region code, you will see a message to this effect. RPAL or NTSC standard You will generally find the relevant details either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case. i COMAND is set to region code 1 at the factory. This setting can be changed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. This will allow you to play video DVDs with a different region code, provided that they are produced in accordance with the PAL or NTSC standard. The region code can be changed up to five times. Hiding/showing the navigation menu X To show: turn cVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller. i This function is not available while the DVD's own menu (Y page 228) is being displayed. X To hide: slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller. or X Wait for approximately eight seconds. Z COMAND ! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs, 225 Video 226 A Media selection B Sound settings Fast forward/rewind X COMAND Navigation menu displayed : Data medium type ; Current track = Current scene ? Track time A To show the menu Showing/hiding the menu This function is not available while the DVD's own menu (Y page 228) is being displayed. X To show: press W the COMAND controller. or X Select Menu while the navigation menu is shown and press W to confirm. X Slide XVY and hold the COMAND controller until the desired position has been reached. You see the navigation menu. Selecting a video DVD X Press W the COMAND controller to show the menu. X Select Media by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The media list appears. The # dot indicates the current medium being played. Video DVDs are indicated by the ý icon. To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller and confirm Full Screen by pressing W. : ý symbol for a video DVD ; Video DVD currently playing X Select DVD-V by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND loads the video DVD and starts playback. i If you select a CD, an audio DVD or an Menu shown : Video DVD options ; Pause function = Stop function ? Full-screen function MP3 medium, you switch to the respective audio mode. You can find further information about the media list on (Y page 208). Video X Press W the COMAND controller to show the menu. X To interrupt playback: select É by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Ë display changes to Ì. The video image is hidden. X To continue playback: select Ì and press W to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted. X To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press W to confirm. or X X During playback, confirm É by pressing W twice in quick succession. Selection is at Ì. To restart playback: confirm Ì by pressing W. Playback restarts from the beginning. Pause function X Press W the COMAND controller to show the menu. X To pause: select Ë by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Ë display changes to Ì. X To continue playback: select Ì and press W to confirm. The menu is hidden. It may also be possible to select the scene/ chapter from within the menu stored on the DVD. X To skip forwards or back: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller. The control menu (Y page 225) appears for approximately eight seconds. X On the multifunction steering wheel: switch on video DVD mode in COMAND (Y page 225). X Use the = or ; button to select the Audio menu. X Press 9 or : to select a scene/ chapter. If you press and hold 9 or : for an extended period, rapid scroll begins. Selecting a film/title This function is only available if the DVD is divided into several films/tracks. If the DVD contains several films, these can be selected directly. A film can be selected either when the DVD is being played back or when it is stopped. The film can also be selected from the menu on the DVD itself. X Press W the COMAND controller to show the menu. X Select DVD-V by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select DVD Functions and press W to confirm. A menu appears. Selecting a scene/chapter If the film is divided into scenes or chapters, you can select them directly while the film is running, or skip forwards step-by-step. Some DVDs do not permit this at certain points (e.g. during the opening credits). Z COMAND Stop function 227 Video 228 X Select Title Selection by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select a film/title and press W to confirm. COMAND DVD menu Calling up the DVD menu The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD itself. It is structured in various ways according to the individual DVD and permits certain actions and settings. In the case of multi-language DVDs, for example, you can set the language in the DVD menu. X Press W the COMAND controller to show the menu. X Select DVD-V in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select DVD Functions and press W to confirm. X Select Menu and press W to confirm. The DVD menu appears. Selecting menu items in the DVD menu X Select a menu item by sliding ZVÆ or turning XVY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The menu appears. i Menu items that cannot be selected are grayed out. COMAND executes the action. Make a selection from the further options, if necessary. COMAND then switches back to the DVD menu. i Depending on the DVD, it is possible that the Back (to the movie), Play, Stop, C, D or Go up menu item may not be operative or operative only at certain points of the DVD. To indicate this, the K symbol is shown in the display. Stopping a film or skipping to the beginning or end of a scene X Select any menu item from the DVD menu. The menu appears. X To stop the film: select the Stop menu item and press W to confirm. X To skip to the end of a scene: select the D menu item and press W to confirm. X To skip to the beginning of a scene: select the C menu item and press W to confirm. Moving up one level in the DVD menu X Press the % back button. or X Select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu and press W the COMAND controller to confirm. or X Select any menu item in the DVD menu and press W the COMAND controller to confirm. X Select Go up and press W to confirm. Back to the film X Press the % back button repeatedly until you see the movie. or X Select the corresponding menu item from the DVD menu. X To reconfirm your selection: confirm Select by pressing W. X Select the Back (to the movie) menu item in the menu and press W to confirm. Video This function is not available on all DVDs. If it is available, you can set the DVD menu language, the audio language or the audio format. The number of settings is determined by the DVD content. It is possible that the settings may also be accessed in the DVD menu (Y page 228). X Press W the COMAND controller to show the menu. X Select DVD-V in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select DVD Functions and press W to confirm. X Select Audio Language and press W to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears after a few seconds. The # dot in front of an entry indicates the currently selected language. X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND controller. X Select DVD Functions and press W to confirm. X Select Subtitles or Camera angle and press W to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears. The # dot in front of an entry indicates the current setting. X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND controller. Interactive content DVDs can contain interactive content (e.g. a video game). In a video game, for example, you may be able to influence events by selecting and triggering actions. The type and number of actions depend on the DVD. X Select an action by sliding ZVÆ or XVY the COMAND controller and press W to execute it. A menu appears and the first entry, Select, is highlighted. X Press W the COMAND controller. Subtitles and camera angle These functions are not available on all DVDs. The number of subtitle languages and camera angles available depends on the content of the DVD. It is possible that the settings may also be accessed in the DVD menu (Y page 228). X Press W the COMAND controller to show the menu. X Select DVD-V in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. AUX video mode AUX jacks An external video source (video AUX) can be connected to COMAND via the media interface (Y page 217) using the AUX jacks in the glove box. i In vehicles with a rear view camera, the video AUX jack cannot be used for external video sources. Z COMAND Setting the language and audio format 229 Vehicle 230 Switching to video AUX mode gradually. This enables you to determine whether the system is able to play the music at high volume without distorting it. COMAND X Select Video in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If video AUX mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If another video source is switched on, you can now switch to video AUX mode in the video menu. X Select Video and press W to confirm. X Select AUX and press W to confirm. The video AUX menu appears. You will hear and see the content of the external video source if it is connected and switched to playback. For details on how to operate the external video source, see the respective device's operating instructions. Showing/hiding the menu X To show: press W the COMAND controller. X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller and confirm Full screen by pressing W. Volume and sound settings You will find details on volume (Y page 124) and sound (Y page 125) settings in the "At a glance" section. Vehicle Vehicle functions General notes In this menu, you can set the following vehicle functions: RECO Rmulticontour seat settings window blind REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off Rinterior lighting delayed switch-off Rambient lighting Rautomatic folding mirror Rlocator lighting Rautomatic locking feature Rtrunk lid opening height restriction You can open the "Vehicle" menu in one of two ways. Rrear Opening the "Vehicle" menu from the main area in the center of the display G WARNING External video sources may have different volumes, which can mean that system messages such as traffic announcements and navigation system announcements are much louder. If necessary, please deactivate the system messages or adjust their volume manually. i In some cases, the volume of the AUX device may be quieter or louder, or the usual maximum possible volume cannot be reached. On some devices, it is possible to adjust the volume separately. In this case, start at a medium volume and increase it : "Vehicle" menu item ; Main area X Select Vehicle in the main function bar by sliding XVY and turning cVd the Vehicle 231 COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Main area ; is active. X Select the individual vehicle functions by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To switch the ECO start/stop function on/off: select Vehicle in the main function bar by sliding XVY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The main area is active. X Select the ECO function by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The ECO start/stop function is switched on and off alternately. X Select Vehicle in the main function bar by sliding XVY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The "Vehicle" submenu opens. X Select the individual vehicle functions in the menu by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. In the next section, it is the first procedure that is always described. Extending/retracting the rear window blind ! Make sure that the rear window blind can move freely. Otherwise, the blind or other objects could be damaged. i The rear window blind is deactivated at temperatures below -20 †. Switching the ECO function on/off The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically (Y page 270). You can switch the ECO start/stop function on and off using COMAND. If you switch the ECO start/stop function off using COMAND, the function is switched on again automatically when you switch the ignition off and on again. X To extend/retract the rear window blind: select Vehicle in the main function bar by sliding XVY and turning cVd the Z COMAND Opening from the "Vehicle" menu Vehicle 232 COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The main area is active. X Select the Rear Window Sunshade function by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND Activating/deactivating the automatic folding mirror function In the Automatic Mirror Folding menu, you can set the exterior mirrors so that they automatically fold in when the vehicle is locked. lever or press the position button of the memory function. If there is a risk of entrapment by the seat, you can also cancel the adjustment procedure by moving the switch for seat adjustment. The steering column and driver's seat stop moving immediately. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature and become trapped. You can make a setting in COMAND so that the steering wheel swings upwards and/or the driver's seat moves backwards before you get into the vehicle. You can make the following settings: ROFF: the function is switched off. Column: the steering wheel swings upwards. RSteering Column and Seat: the steering wheel swings upwards and the driver’s seat moves backwards. RSteering X To activate/deactivate automatic mirror folding: select Vehicle in the main function bar by sliding XVY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The main area is active. X Select the Automatic Mirror Folding function by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Setting the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature. If there is a risk of entrapment by the steering column, move the steering wheel adjustment X To set the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature: select Vehicle in the main function bar by sliding XVY and turning cVd the Vehicle Setting the interior/exterior lighting delayed switch-off time Interior lighting: you can set whether and for how long you wish the interior lighting to remain on in the dark after you have removed the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Exterior light: you can set whether and for how long you want the exterior lighting to remain on in the dark after the doors have been closed. The exterior lighting automatically switches off after the switch-off delay has elapsed. You may select from the following settings: R0 seconds: delayed switch-off is deactivated. R15, 30, 45, 60 seconds: delayed switch-off is activated. i You can reactivate this function by opening a door within one minute. If none of the doors are opened after the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or if a door is not closed after it has been opened, the exterior lights switch off after 60 seconds. X To set the interior/exterior lighting delayed switch-off time: select Vehicle in the main function bar by sliding XVY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The main area is active. X Select the Interior Lighting Delayed Shut-off/Exterior Lighting Delayed Shut-off menu by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller. The interior/exterior lighting delayed switch-off time menu appears. The current setting is indicated by a # dot. X Select Setting by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller. The selected setting is indicated by a # dot. Setting the ambient light You can make the following settings: RSOLAR (yellow interior lighting) (white interior lighting) RPOLAR (blue interior lighting) RBrightness of the interior lighting on a scale of 0 (off) to 5 (bright) RNEUTRAL Z COMAND COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The main area is active. X Select the Easy-Entry/Exit Feature menu by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller. The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature menu appears. The current setting is indicated by a # dot. X Select Setting by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller. The selected setting is indicated by a # dot. 233 Vehicle 234 COMAND X To set the ambient lighting: select Vehicle in the main function bar by sliding XVY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The main area is active. X Select the Ambient Lighting menu by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller. The ambient lighting menu appears. The current setting is indicated by a # dot. X Select Setting by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller. The selected setting is indicated by a # dot. Switching locator lighting on/off If you switch on the locator lighting, the following come on in the dark after you have unlocked the vehicle using the remote control: parking lamps tail lamps Rthe license plate lamp Rthe front fog lamps Rthe entry lamps in the exterior mirror The locator lighting switches off again when you open the driver’s door. If you do not open the driver’s door, the locator lighting switches off automatically after 40 seconds. X To switch locator lighting on/off: select Vehicle in the main function bar by sliding XVY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The main area is active. X Select the Locator Lighting function by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Switching the automatic locking feature on/off You can use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking feature. If the automatic locking feature is activated, your vehicle will lock centrally from a speed of approximately 15 km/h. You will find further information about the automatic locking feature in the "Automatic locking feature" section (Y page 81). Rthe Rthe X To switch the automatic locking feature on/off: select Vehicle in the main function bar by sliding XVY and Vehicle turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The main area is active. X Select the Automatic Locking function by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. 235 To do so, make certain that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. COMAND Activating/deactivating the trunk lid opening height restriction Air-conditioning function bar : To set the temperature, left ; To set the air distribution, left = To set the airflow, left ? Climate control main menu (Y page 236) A To set the airflow, right B To set the air distribution, right X To activate/deactivate the trunk lid opening height restriction: select Vehicle in the main function bar by sliding XVY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The main area is active. X Select the Trunk Opening-height Restriction function by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. C To set the temperature, right Setting the temperature You can set the temperature separately for the driver’s and front-passenger side. X Select left temperature display : or right temperature display C in the airconditioning function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Automatic climate control Introduction to automatic climate control You can operate automatic climate control using COMAND or the buttons on the upper section of the center console (Y page 257). Several special automatic climate control functions can only be adjusted using COMAND. You can access the automatic climate control menu via the air-conditioning function bar. Z Vehicle 236 X Setting the airflow Setting the air distribution You can set the airflow separately for the driver’s and front-passenger side. X Select left airflow = or right airflow A by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND To adjust the temperature: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd the COMAND controller. X To confirm the selection: press W the COMAND controller. You can set the air distribution separately for the driver’s and front-passenger side. X Select left air distribution ; or right air distribution B by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To adjust the airflow: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd the COMAND controller. X To confirm the selection: press W the COMAND controller. ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs air through the center and side air vents O Directs air through the footwell vents S Directs air through the center, side and footwell vents a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents _ Directs air through the defroster, center, side and footwell vents b Directs air through the defroster, center and side air vents W Controls air distribution automatically X To adjust the air distribution: turn cVd the COMAND controller. X To confirm the selection: press W the COMAND controller. Climate control main menu COMAND allows you to set additional functions which cannot be selected using the control panel in the center console. Call up these functions using the climate control main menu. X To open the climate control main menu: select the AC climate control symbol in the air-conditioning function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The climate control menu opens. Vehicle 237 cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The climate control menu opens. X To switch on: select Æ and press W. X To switch off: select Æ and press W. A tick appears. Climate control main menu Rswitch cooling with dehumidification on or off (Æ) Rcontrol climate control centrally (Mono) Radjust the Footwell Temperature Rset the Airflow for the air vents Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off Cooling is operational when the engine is running, and cools according to the selected interior temperature for the vehicle. Cooling also dehumidifies the air inside the vehicle and, thereby, prevents the windows from fogging up. G WARNING If you switch off cooling with dehumidification, the vehicle will not be cooled and the air not dehumidified in warm weather conditions. The windows can mist up faster. This could result in your no longer being able to observe the traffic conditions properly and you may cause an accident. i Condensation may collect on the underside of the vehicle when the cooler is operating. X Select the climate control main menu in the air-conditioning function bar by turning Controlling climate control centrally You can use the Mono function to set all the air-conditioning zones in the vehicle to the same settings. If the Mono function is switched on and you adjust climate control on the driver’s side, these changes will also be made in all the air-conditioning zones. X Select the climate control main menu in the air-conditioning function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The climate control menu opens. X Select Mono and press W. A tick appears when the function is selected. The Mono function is automatically switched off if you: Rchange settings for automatic climate control on the front-passenger side using COMAND Rpress one of the rocker switches to operate automatic climate control on the frontpassenger side Z COMAND You can: Vehicle 238 Adjusting the footwell temperature You can use the Footwell Temperature function to set the temperature difference between the footwell and the rest of the vehicle interior. i This setting is quite effective in automatic COMAND mode, especially at low outside temperatures. The greater the value you set, the higher the temperature in the footwell. X Select the climate control main menu in the air-conditioning function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The climate control menu opens. X Select Footwell Temperature and press W. A scale appears. i This setting is quite effective in automatic mode, especially at high outside temperatures. If the vehicle has become very warm and the automatic air conditioning is cooling the interior, the blower settings are briefly canceled. X Select the climate control main menu in the air-conditioning function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The climate control menu opens. X Select Airflow and press W. A menu appears. The current setting is indicated by a # dot. X To change the airflow: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. X To change the temperature difference: slide ZVÆ or turn cVd. X To confirm your selection: press W. Setting the blower settings for the air vents This function allows you to determine the way the air is blown through the air vents in automatic mode. You can select: RFocused (high blower setting) (standard setting) RDiffuse (low blower setting) RMedium Seats Lumbar supports The lumbar support in the backrest of the driver's and front-passenger seats can be adjusted to provide optimum support for your back. X To select the seat: press the T function button. The main area of the COMAND display is active. A scale appears. Vehicle 239 X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the T function button. To move to the lower menu bar: select by sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND X Selecting the seat You must first select the seat for which you wish to make adjustments. X Press the T function button. The main area is active. X To move to the lower menu bar: select by sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. i When you press the T function button, the previously adjusted seat is active. X To adjust the lumbar support: select by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Multicontour seat i Information about the components and operating principles of COMAND can be found on (Y page 108). The contour of the driver's seat and frontpassenger seat backrests can be individually adjusted to provide optimum support for your back. This is achieved by controlling the pressure in the air chambers in the multicontour seat. The adjustments are made using the COMAND display. i When you adjust the multicontour seat, you may hear the air being pumped in or released. You can adjust the following air cushions: Rseat side bolsters Rseat backrest side bolsters Rbackrest curvature in the lumbar region Rbackrest curvature in the upper back region X To select a seat: select by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Exiting a menu There are several ways of exiting the menu for the multicontour seat: X Press the T function button again. or X Press any function button. or X Select another main function from the basic menu. Display values Two values are displayed on the setting scale if you adjust the multicontour seat: Rred: this is the desired value which you specify when making the setting. Rwhite: this is the current value. It is changed gradually until it reaches the desired value. Z Vehicle 240 COMAND Adjusting the seat side bolsters This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the seat side bolsters. X Select the seat (Y page 239). X Select Seat Sides by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A scale appears. X Select Setting by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Adjusting the seat backrest side bolsters This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the seat backrest side bolsters. X Select the seat (Y page 239). X Select Seatb. Sides by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A scale appears. X Adjusting the backrest curvature in the lumbar region This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the lumbar region of the backrest. X Select the seat (Y page 239). X Select Lumbar by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A crosshair appears. You can make two settings: RVertical: to move the point of greatest lumbar support up or down RHorizontal: to adjust the amount of support Select Setting by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Setting by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Adjusting the backrest curvature in the upper back region This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the upper back region of the backrest. X Select the seat (Y page 239). X Select Shoulders by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A scale appears. X Select Setting by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Resetting adjustments You can reset the seat settings to the factory settings. X Select the seat (Y page 239). X Select Reset All by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Active multicontour seat The dynamic function of the active multicontour seat automatically adapts the side bolsters of the backrest to your current driving style. X Select the seat (Y page 239). X Select Dynamic Seat by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To confirm your selection: press W. A scale appears. You can select: X Select Setting by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Massage function (PULSE) The massage function helps you to prevent muscle tension on long journeys. X Select the seat (Y page 239). X Select Massage by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A list appears. You can select different types of massage function: R0: OFF Slow and Gentle R2: Slow and Vigorous R3: Fast and Gentle R4: Fast and Vigorous X To confirm your selection: press W. R1: R0: Off Level 1 R2: Level 2 R1: Z 241 COMAND Vehicle Vehicle 242 X Select Setting by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The massage function runs for approximately 6 to 20 minutes, depending on the setting. COMAND Uploading/downloading data With this function, you can transfer COMAND data from one system (vehicle) to another system (vehicle). You can use either a USB stick or an SD card as temporary storage. You can only transfer the complete transferable data record. The following data is included in the complete transferable data record: Rnavigation destination memory and last destination Raddress book entries Raudio station/video channel presets Rsystem settings Copying data to a storage medium X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot or X Insert a USB stick into the socket on the side in the glove box. X Select Vehicle in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The "Vehicle" menu appears. X Select System and press W to confirm. X Select Upload/Download Data and press W to confirm. X Select Copy Data to Storage Medium and press W to confirm. X Select the storage medium to which the data should be copied. X Select Start Copying. COMAND checks whether the storage medium has enough storage capacity. If there is enough storage capacity, the data is copied to the storage medium. X If there is not enough storage capacity, remove the storage medium. Make more storage space available on the storage medium. Then, try to copy the COMAND data to the storage medium again. X Remove the storage medium. Transferring data to another system (vehicle) X Insert/connect the storage medium (SD card or USB stick) with the saved data into/ to the relevant interface. X Select Vehicle in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The "Vehicle" menu appears. X Select System and press W to confirm. X Select Upload/Download Data and press W to confirm. X Select Import Data from Storage Medium and press W to confirm. X Select Start Data Import. A prompt appears, asking whether the COMAND data should be overwritten. X Press Yes to confirm that the data saved in COMAND should be overwritten. COMAND imports the data and restarts the system. or X Press No to cancel the import process. 243 244 244 249 250 251 Lights and windshield wipers Useful information ............................ Exterior lighting ................................ Interior lighting ................................. Replacing bulbs ................................. Windshield wipers ............................ 244 Exterior lighting Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. Light switch Operation Depending on the date of manufacture of your vehicle, the c or à symbol for the automatic headlamp mode/daytime running lamps is located on the light switch. i Please read the information on qualified Lights and windshield wipers specialist workshops (Y page 29). Exterior lighting Important safety notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. 1W Left-hand standing lamps 2X Right-hand standing lamps 3$ Lights off/daytime running lamps 4c Automatic headlamp mode/daytime running lamps 5T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting Information about driving abroad Converting to symmetrical low beam when driving abroad: switch the headlamps to symmetrical low beam in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road to the country where the vehicle is registered. This prevents glare to oncoming traffic. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the road. Have the headlamps converted at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries. Converting to asymmetrical low beam after returning: have the headlamps converted back to asymmetrical low beam at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, as soon as possible after crossing the border again. 6L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps 7N Front fog lamps 8R Rear fog lamp The turn signals, high-beam headlamps and the high-beam flasher are operated using the combination switch (Y page 246). ! Switch off the parking lamps and standing lamps when you leave the vehicle. This prevents the battery from discharging. The exterior lighting (except the parking/ standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0 If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X X Daytime running lamps in the USA In the USA, the daytime running lamps are deactivated upon delivery from the factory. X To activate the daytime running lamps: activate the daytime running lamps function in the on-board computer (Y page 343). X Turn the light switch to $ or c. With the engine running: depending on the ambient light, the daytime running lamps or the low-beam headlamps are switched on. When the low-beam headlamps are activated, the T indicator lamp on the light switch lights up. Daytime running lamps If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to T or L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. Turn the light switch to $ or c. or X If the rear fog lamp is switched on: press the light switch in to the stop. Low-beam headlamps To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The T indicator lamp on the light switch lights up. X To switch off the low-beam headlamps: turn the light switch to $. Daytime running lamps in Canada The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. X Turn the light switch to $ or c. With the engine running: depending on the ambient light, the daytime running lamps or the low-beam headlamps are switched on. When the low-beam headlamps are activated, the T indicator lamp on the light switch lights up. When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary or if the electronic parking brake is applied: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in high ambient light brightness: if you turn the light switch to T, the daytime running lamps and the parking lamps are switched on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. 10 Only Automatic headlamp mode X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to c. SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. With the engine running: depending on the brightness of the ambient light, the daytime running lamps10 or the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically. When the low-beam headlamps are switched on, the T indicator lamp on the light switch lights up. G WARNING If the light switch is set to c, the low-beam headlamps will not come on automatically if it is foggy. This could endanger you and others. Therefore, turn the light switch to L in fog. if daytime running lamps have been activated via the on-board computer. Z 245 Lights and windshield wipers Exterior lighting Exterior lighting 246 The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. G WARNING When it is dark or foggy, turn the light switch quickly from c to L. Otherwise, the headlamps could switch off temporarily and you could cause an accident. Front fog lamps Lights and windshield wipers G WARNING If you suspect that driving conditions will be foggy, turn the light switch to L before you start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle may not be visible and you could endanger yourself and others. G WARNING In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, only switch from position c to L with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Switching from c to L will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident. X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or T. If the light switch is set to c, you cannot switch on the fog lamps. X Pull the light switch out to the first detent. The green N indicator lamp on the light switch lights up. X To switch off the front fog lamps: press the light switch in as far as it will go. The green N indicator lamp on the light switch goes out. Rear fog lamp X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or T. If the light switch is set to c, you cannot switch on the rear fog lamp. X Turn the light switch to L. If the light switch is set to T, you cannot switch on the rear fog lamp. X Pull the light switch out to the second detent. The yellow R indicator lamp on the light switch lights up. X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the light switch in as far as it will go. The yellow R indicator lamp on the light switch goes out. Headlamp cleaning system The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated ten times while the lights are on and the engine is running (Y page 251). When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. Combination switch Turn signals : High-beam headlamps ; Right turn signal Exterior lighting = High-beam flasher 247 Hazard warning lamps ? Left turn signal X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. High-beam flasher X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: Ran air bag is deployed. vehicle is slowed down severely from a speed of over 45 mph(70 km/h) and comes to a halt. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. Rthe The hazard warning lamps are deactivated automatically if the vehicle returns to a speed of over 6 mph(10 km/h) after a full application of the brakes. i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. Z Lights and windshield wipers High-beam headlamps 248 Exterior lighting Lights and windshield wipers Cornering light function The system automatically adapts the lowbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signals or turn the steering wheel. Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) or turn the steering wheel. Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn signal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. The cornering light function may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Adaptive Highbeam Assist You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam. X To activate: activate the Adaptive Highbeam Assist function using the onboard computer (Y page 344). X Turn the light switch to c. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow : (Y page 246). If it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps, the _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. If you drive faster than approximately 28 mph (45 km/h): the headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you drive faster than approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no other road users are identified: Interior lighting G WARNING The Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid intended to support you while driving. The driver is and remains responsible for proper vehicle lighting in accordance with the prevailing light, sight and traffic conditions. The system may be impaired or unavailable when This could endanger you and/or others and cause an accident. Always pay close attention to the traffic situation and switch off the high beam manually if necessary. Headlamps fogged up on the inside The headlamps may fog up on the inside if there is high atmospheric humidity. X Drive with the headlamps switched on. The level of moisture diminishes, depending on the length of the journey and the weather conditions (humidity and temperature). If the level of moisture does not diminish: X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, or heavy spray Rthe optical sensor area of the windshield is dirty, fogged up, or covered by a sticker for example The system cannot recognize the following road users: RRoad users without a lighting system of their own, e.g. pedestrians RRoad users with dim lighting of their own, e.g. cyclists RRoad users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. road users behind a guardrail RIn some seldom cases, even road users with a lighting system of their own may be recognized too late or not at all. The automatic high-beam headlamps will then not be deactivated or it will be activated in spite of preceding or oncoming road users. Overhead control panel : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off ; v Switches the rear interior lighting on/off = c Switches the front interior lighting on/off ? | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off A p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off Z Lights and windshield wipers the high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. When you drive slower than approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or if other road users are identified or if the roads are sufficiently illuminated: the high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster stays on. X To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. 249 Replacing bulbs 250 Interior lighting control Important notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Automatic interior lighting control Lights and windshield wipers X To switch on/off: press the | button. The OFF indicator lamp shows whether the automatic interior lighting control is deactivated (indicator lamp on) or activated (indicator lamp off). The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using COMAND (Y page 233). Ropen Manual interior lighting control X To switch the front interior lighting on/ off: press the c button. X To switch the rear interior lighting on/ off: press the u button. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. Replacing bulbs Important safety notes Xenon bulbs If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs, you can recognize this by the following: the cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again when you start the engine. For this to be observed, the lights must be switched on before starting the engine. G DANGER Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could get an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured if you touch the electric contacts on Xenon bulbs. Therefore, never remove the cover from Xenon bulbs. Do not change Xenon bulbs yourself, but have them replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Other bulbs There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 251). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Even minor contamination can burn into the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lintfree cloth or only touch the base of the bulb when installing. Only use bulbs of the correct type. Windshield wipers If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. 251 Changing the front bulbs Headlamp spotlamp/infrared light (Night View Assist Plus) Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You should therefore allow them to cool down before you change them. Otherwise, you could be burned if you touch them. Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Otherwise, they could damage the bulbs, for example, and injure themselves. Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Such a bulb may break or even explode and injure you. Halogen bulbs are pressurized and can explode when you change them, particularly if they are very hot. You should therefore wear eye protection and gloves when you are changing them. Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types You can change the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend. X Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover ; counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :. X Insert bulb holder :. X Turn bulb holder : clockwise. X Align housing cover ; and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on/ off G WARNING Bi-Xenon headlamps : High-beam spot lamp: H11 55 W Infrared light (Night View Assist Plus): H11 55 W Wiper blades are components that are subject to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall. Otherwise the windshield will not be wiped properly. As a result, you may not be able to observe surrounding traffic conditions and could cause an accident. ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust Z Lights and windshield wipers G WARNING Windshield wipers 252 that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wipers to wipe more frequently. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes Lights and windshield wipers G WARNING For safety reasons, switch off the windshield wipers and remove the key from the ignition lock before changing the wiper blades (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: make sure that the on-board electronics are in state 0). Otherwise, the wiper motor could be switched on suddenly and cause injury. Combination switch 1 $ Windshield wipers off ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low11 make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper. 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high12 ! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/ î To wipe the windshield using washer fluid X X Switch on the ignition. Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather. 11 Rain 12 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity. sensor set to high sensitivity. arm has been folded away from the windshield. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades replaced by a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Always position the windshield wiper arms vertically before folding them away from the windshield. By doing so, you will avoid damage to the hood. Windshield wipers Moving the wiper blades to a vertical position Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the windshield wipers to position °. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, turn the SmartKey to position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO X Switch off the engine. X Remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Set the windshield wipers to position °. X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wipers start. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, press the Start/Stop button. Removing the wiper blades X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield until it engages. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. Installing the wiper blades X Push the new wiper blade onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow. Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm. X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. Problems with the windshield wipers The windshield wipers are obstructed Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on. The windshield wipers are inoperative The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The spray nozzles are misaligned X Remove the wiper blade from the retaining pin on the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. The windshield washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits the center of the windshield. The spray nozzles are misaligned. X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Lights and windshield wipers Replacing the wiper blades 253 254 255 256 256 257 261 Climate control Useful information ............................ Overview of climate control systems ................................................... Operating the climate control system ..................................................... Setting the air vents ......................... 256 Overview of climate control systems Useful information Climate control i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes G WARNING Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior and the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. Have a blocked filter replaced at a MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible. You can also set some automatic climate control functions via COMAND (Y page 235). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 87). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust and completely filters out pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. i It is possible that the blower may be activated automatically 40 minutes after the SmartKey is removed. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the air-conditioning system. G WARNING Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise, the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. The automatic climate control controls the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances from the air. The automatic climate control is only operational when the engine is running13. Optimum operation is only achieved when you drive with the side windows and the sliding sunroof closed. 13 The residual heat function can only be activated/deactivated if the ignition is switched off. Operating the climate control system 257 Climate control Automatic climate control panel : Sets climate control to automatic mode, left (Y page 258) ; Sets the temperature, left (Y page 259) = Sets the airflow, left (Y page 259) ? Defrosts the windshield (Y page 259) A Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 260) B Switches climate control on /off(Y page 257) C Switches the residual heat function on/off(Y page 261) D Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 260) E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 259) F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 259) G Sets climate control to automatic mode, right (Y page 258) Notes on using climate control Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use climate control optimally. RActivate climate control using the à rocker switch. The indicator lamp in the à rocker switch lights up. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up as, in air-recirculation mode, no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The "residual heat" function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. Operating the climate control system Activating/deactivating climate control Important information G WARNING When the climate control system is deactivated, the outside air supply and circulation are also deactivated. Only choose this setting for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. i Switch on climate control primarily using the à rocker switch (Y page 258). Z Operating the climate control system 258 Activating/deactivating Climate control X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the ^ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. X To deactivate: press the ^ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights up. Activating/deactivating the cooling with air dehumidification function Important information The cooling with air dehumidification function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. G WARNING If you switch off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. You can activate or deactivate the cooling with air dehumidification function via COMAND (Y page 237). i The cooling with air dehumidification function uses refrigerant R134a. This coolant does not contain chlorofluorocarbons, and therefore does not damage the ozone layer. Problems with the cooling with air dehumidification function If you can no longer switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function via COMAND, the cooling with air dehumidification function is switched off due to a malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Setting climate control to automatic G WARNING If you switch off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. Automatic mode will achieve optimal operation if cooling with air dehumidification is also activated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the desired temperature. X To switch on: press the à rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the à rocker switch lights up. X To deactivate: press the K rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the à rocker switch goes out. or X Set the air distribution using COMAND (Y page 236). The indicator lamp in the à rocker switch goes out. Operating the climate control system _ Directs air through the defroster, center, side and footwell vents b Directs air through the defroster, center and side air vents W Sets the air distribution to automatic The air distribution can be set using COMAND (Y page 236). Setting the airflow Climate control climate zones You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the footwells. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press the w rocker switch up or down. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). i You can also use COMAND to set the temperature (Y page 235). i The footwell temperature can be set via COMAND (Y page 238). Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings The air distribution can be set individually for the driver's and front-passenger sides. ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs air through the center and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S Directs air through the center, side and footwell vents a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents 14 Depending You can select different airflow settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press the K rocker switch up or down. You can also use COMAND to set the airflow (Y page 236). Defrosting the windshield You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to defrost the inside of the windshield and the side windows. i You should only select the defrosting function until the windshield is clear again. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press the ¬ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the ¬ rocker switch lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rcooling with air dehumidification on airflow14 Rhigh temperature14 Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off Rhigh on the outside temperature. Z Climate control Setting the temperature 259 Operating the climate control system 260 Climate control X To deactivate: press the ¬ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the ¬ rocker switch goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. The cooling with air dehumidification function remains on. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. Windows fogged up on the outside Press the w rocker switch up or down. Activating/deactivating or X or X Press the K rocker switch up or down. MAX COOL maximum cooling The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA. MAX COOL is only operational when the engine is running. The MAX COOL function is activated automatically: Rif climate control is set to automatic (Ã) on both sides Rif additional cooling is used The display shows MAX COOL. This is the quickest way to cool the vehicle interior when the sliding sunroof and the side windows are closed. Defrosting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside X Activate the cooling with air dehumidification function via COMAND (Y page 237). X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the defrosting function (Y page 259). i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. X Switch on the windshield wipers. Activate automatic climate control. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. X Rear window defroster G WARNING Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others. The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear as it only switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the ¤ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the ¤ rocker switch lights up or goes out. Problems with the rear window defroster The rear window defroster has deactivated itself prematurely or cannot be activated. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps or interior lighting. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster is activated again automatically. Activating/deactivating airrecirculation mode You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle Setting the air vents G WARNING Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to fog on the inside, switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging. If interior window fogging persists, make sure the air conditioning is activated, or press the ¬ button. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the g rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the g rocker switch lights up. i Air-recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures. The indicator lamp in the g rocker switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation mode is activated. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press the g rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the g rocker switch goes out. i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically: approximately five minutes if outside temperatures are less than about 41 ‡ (5 †) Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes if outside temperatures are over about 41 ‡ (5 †) Activating/deactivating the residual heat function It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the temperature that has been set. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it. X To activate: press the Ì rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the Ì rocker switch lights up. X To deactivate: press the Ì rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the Ì rocker switch goes out. i Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter about 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rif the coolant temperature is too low Rwhen Rafter Setting the air vents Important safety notes G WARNING When operating the climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This could cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Z Climate control from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. 261 Setting the air vents 262 Climate control Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin. Setting the side air vents In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air intake grille on the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grille in the vehicle interior. i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust the sliders of the air vents to the center position. Setting the center air vents X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or down. i Side window defroster vent : is never completely shut, even if side air vent ; is shut. Setting the air vents in the stowage compartment When automatic climate control is activated the stowage compartment can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. The temperature of the air is approximately the same as that of the air flowing from the center air vents. ! Close the stowage compartment air vent : Fixed center air vent ; Center air vent, right = Center vent thumbwheel, right ? Center vent thumbwheel, left A Center air vent, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheels = and ? up or down. when heating mode is activated and activate "cooling with air dehumidification" if the outside temperature is high. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the stowage compartment could be damaged. Setting the air vents 263 Setting the rear-compartment air vents X Climate control Setting the center vents in the rear compartment To switch the ventilation on/off: push rocker switch down ; or up :. Setting the glove box air vent When automatic climate control is activated, the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. ! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle. At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove box could be damaged. : Rear-compartment air vent, left ; Rear-compartment air vent, right = Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel, right ? Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = or ? to the right or left. i Close the rear-compartment air vents when heating mode is activated, as no warm air flows through the rearcompartment air vents in the basic heating setting. X To open: turn thumbwheel : counterclockwise from position 3 to position 2. X To close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise from position 2 to position 3. Z 264 Useful information ............................ Breaking-in notes .............................. Driving ............................................... Automatic transmission ................... Refueling ............................................ Parking ............................................... Driving tips ........................................ Driving systems ................................ 266 266 266 273 280 283 286 290 Driving and parking 265 266 Driving Useful information Driving and parking i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Breaking-in notes The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km) for this reason. RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RChange gear in good time, at the latest when the tachometer needle is 2/3 of the way to the red area in the tachometer display. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator pedal past the point of resistance (kickdown). ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain. RIf possible, drive in drive program E (in AMG vehicles in drive program C) for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and bring the vehicle up to full speed. Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehicles: Rdo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) in the first 1000 miles (1500 km). Ronly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4500 rpm briefly. Rchange gear in good time. i You should also observe these notes on running in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. i Always observe the respective speed restrictions. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Make sure absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals' range of movement. Keep the driver's footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals still have sufficient clearance. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury. G WARNING On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle's ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. G WARNING It is dangerous to shift the automatic transmission out of parking position P or neutral position N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You Driving ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. ! CL 63 AMG: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. SmartKey positions SmartKey SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. KEYLESS-GO General information Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESSGO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted into the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. The Start/Stop button can be removed from the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. However, you should always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. The vehicle can be started with the Start/Stop button and the electrical equipment can be operated while the SmartKey is in the vehicle. g To remove the SmartKey 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine : Start/Stop button i The SmartKey can be turned in the ; Ignition lock ignition lock even if it is not the correct Z Driving and parking could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. 267 Driving 268 X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;. i When you insert Start/Stop button : Driving and parking into ignition lock ;, the system requires a detection time of approximately two seconds before you can use Start/Stop button :. Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times. ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal Start/Stop button = USA only when starting the engine. i The catalytic converter preheats for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. ? Canada only X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. i If you then open the driver's door when in i The catalytic converter preheats for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Automatic transmission X this position, the power supply is deactivated. Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P. Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop button : twice. i You can also start the engine when the i If you press Start/Stop button : once Starting procedure with the SmartKey X when in this position and the driver's door is open, the power supply is deactivated again. As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after the engine is started or if it lights up while the vehicle is in motion, see (Y page 379). transmission is in position N. i To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/ Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 267) and release it as soon as the engine is running. Driving Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If you do not depress the brake pedal, you can move the DIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lock remains engaged. G WARNING i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted into the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 267) once. The engine starts. Pulling away Automatic transmission G WARNING It is dangerous to shift the automatic transmission out of parking position P or neutral position N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. The electric parking brake (Y page 284) is automatically released. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 234). i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. After approximately one second, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if Z Driving and parking As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could otherwise accidentally start the engine. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 269 Driving 270 X Take your foot off the brake pedal. i Once you have taken your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around one second. X Pull away. Driving and parking Hill start assist will not function if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in position N. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. automatically. All of the vehicle's systems remain active. If you open the door, unfasten your seat belt or remove your foot from the brake pedal, the engine will automatically start. The vehicle may begin moving. You could suffer serious or even fatal injury or cause an accident resulting in injury or death. Never leave the vehicle while the ECO symbol in the multifunction display is shown in green or yellow. Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before leaving it. ! Always switch the ignition off and take the key with you when leaving the vehicle. ECO start/stop function General information The ECO start/stop function is only available for the CL 63 AMG. The ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C. The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. The ECO start/stop function is activated each time the engine is switched on. If all the requirements are fulfilled for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 270), the green ¤ ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display and Stop/Start active appears. If not all of the requirements are fulfilled, the ¤ ECO symbol is shown in yellow and Stop/Start inactive appears. If the ECO start/stop function is deactivated (Y page 271), the ¤ symbol is not shown. G WARNING If the engine is switched off and the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the engine has been switched off Automatic engine switch-off The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is braked to a standstill and the brake remains depressed with the transmission in position D or N. i You can still activate the HOLD function when the vehicle is stationary, even if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, as the engine must be started first. The engine is only switched off if: Rthe outside temperature is within the range which is suitable for the system. engine is at normal operating temperature. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe hood is closed. Rthe Driving engine-relevant diagnostics are active. message is shown in the multifunction display. Rthe driver's door is closed and the seat belt is fastened. i If drive program S or M has been selected, the ECO start/stop function is always deactivated. Automatic engine start The engine is started automatically if you: Activating Rrelease X the brake pedal when HOLD is not activated and the transmission is in position D or N Rshift the transmission to position R Rdepress the accelerator pedal Rswitch off the ECO start/stop function or switch to drive program S or M Runfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door The engine is also started automatically if: Rthe vehicle starts to roll. Rthe brake system requires this. Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range. Rthe charge level of the battery is too low. Activate the ECO start/stop function using COMAND (Y page 231). The ¤ ECO symbol and the Stop/ Start active display message are shown in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled (Y page 270), the Stop/Start inactive message appears. i If you activate the ECO start/stop function in drive program S or M, drive program C is selected automatically. Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function General information You can deactivate and activate the ECO start/stop function using COMAND (Y page 231). i You can also use the programmable button (Y page 109) to activate and deactivate the ECO start/stop function if you have assigned this function to the button. Deactivating X Deactivate the ECO start/stop function using COMAND (Y page 231): The ¤ ECO symbol goes out and the Stop/Start deactivated display Z Driving and parking Rno 271 272 Driving Problems with the engine Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere Driving and parking Problem is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKey in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 268). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. RThere If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 433). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. The coolant temperature gauge shows a value above 248 ‡ (120 †). The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 411). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Important safety notes Overview of transmission positions G WARNING The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. It is dangerous to shift the automatic transmission out of parking position P or neutral position N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. G WARNING Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone only will shift the automatic transmission into neutral position N automatically. Always shift the automatic transmission into park position P before turning off the engine. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. P R N D Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display (Y page 275) in the multifunction display. Z 273 Driving and parking Automatic transmission Automatic transmission 274 Engaging park position P X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. Driving and parking i The automatic transmission shifts automatically into park position P if you open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed, and the transmission is in position D or R. ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged. Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. i The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. For further information on the ECO start/ stop function, see (Y page 270). X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. Neutral N with ECO start/stop function activated The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is braked to a standstill when in neutral N and the brake is still depressed. For further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 270). Shifting to neutral N X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. If the engine has been switched off, the automatic transmission automatically switches to N. Remaining in neutral N If the automatic transmission is to remain in neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car washes with a towing device, please observe the following instructions: G WARNING When leaving the SmartKey in the starter switch, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch on the ignition which could result in unsupervised use of vehicle equipment. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Using the SmartKey: Rmake sure that the ignition is switched on. the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Rshift to neutral N. Rrelease the brake pedal. Rif applied, release the electric parking brake. Rswitch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Using KEYLESS-GO: Rwhen Rmake sure that the ignition is switched on. the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Rengage park position P. Rrelease the brake pedal. Rremove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. Rinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Rswitch on the ignition. Rdepress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Rshift to neutral N. Rrelease the brake pedal. Rwhen Automatic transmission applied, release the electric parking brake. Rswitch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Transmission position D with ECO start/stop function activated The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is braked to a standstill when in transmission position D and the brake is still depressed. For further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 270). engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S. Do not restrict the shift range. Transmission positions B Park position Do not shift the transmission into position P unless the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. In addition to engaging the parking lock, you must always apply the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle. If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may be locked in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, immediately. C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. Shifting to transmission position D X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. Transmission position display The current transmission position is shown in the multifunction display. : Transmission position i The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever. ! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is Z Driving and parking Rif 275 276 Automatic transmission Driving and parking A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. The transmission could otherwise be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ! Rolling in neutral N can damage the drive train. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gearshifting behavior is determined by: Ra shift range restriction, if selected Rthe selected drive program E/S or, for AMG vehicles, C/S/M(Y page 277) Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Driving tips Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Vehicles for USA except AMG vehicles: fully depress the accelerator pedal. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Vehicles for Canada except AMG vehicles: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. Rocking the vehicle free Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and forth between transmission positions D and R can help to free a vehicle that has become stuck in mud or snow. The engine management system of the vehicle limits shifting back and forth between transmission positions D and R to a maximum speed of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the selector lever up and down beyond the pressure point. Working on the vehicle G WARNING When working on the vehicle, engage the electronic parking brake and shift the automatic transmission into park position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Automatic transmission General information The program selector button influences: Rthe drive program AIRMATIC (Y page 303) or ABC (Y page 305) suspension settings Rthe engine management Rthe AMG vehicles: only change from automatic drive program C or S to manual drive program M when the vehicle is stationary. X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the multifunction display. i When the engine is started, the automatic transmission always switches to automatic drive program E (drive program C in AMG vehicles). Steering wheel paddle shifters Program selector button : Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter ; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter Program selector button on AMG vehicles In AMG vehicles, drive program E is called drive program C. E Economy C Controlled Efficiency Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 277). You can restrict or derestrict the shift range by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. You can change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters in the manual drive program. Automatic drive program Drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being Z Driving and parking Program selector button 277 278 Automatic transmission driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin Drive program S is characterized by the following: engine settings vehicle pulling away in first gear Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points Restricting the shift range X Rsporty Driving and parking Rthe i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. i If the maximum engine speed for the shift range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up in order to prevent the engine from overrevving, even if the shift range is restricted. Shift ranges Introduction When the automatic transmission is in position D, it is possible to restrict or derestrict the shift range (Y page 278). The shift range selected is shown in the multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear. Shift range = You can use the engine's braking effect. 5 To use the braking effect of the engine on downhill gradients and for driving: Derestricting the shift range X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. The shift range is derestricted. Clearing the shift range restriction X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until D is shown again in the multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts from the current shift range directly to D. Ron Selecting the ideal shift range Rin X steep mountain roads mountainous terrain Rin arduous conditions 4 Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. The automatic transmission shifts down one gear and restricts the shift range to the relevant gear. To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downhill gradients and on long downhill stretches Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter and hold it in position. The automatic transmission shifts to the gear which allows optimum acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission shifts down one or more gears. Automatic transmission 279 Manual drive program The manual drive program is only available for AMG vehicles. Manual drive program M is different from drive program S with regard to spontaneity, responsiveness and smoothness of gear changes. Manual drive program M can be selected using the program selector button. In manual drive program M, you can change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters if the transmission is in position D. The gear currently selected and engaged is shown in the multifunction display. X Press the program selector button (Y page 277) repeatedly until M appears in the multifunction display. Upshifting : Gear indicator ; Upshift indicator Downshifting X i If you brake the vehicle or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission will shift down to a gear that will allow the vehicle to accelerate or pull away again. i For maximum acceleration, pull the lefthand steering wheel paddle shifter until the transmission selects the optimum gear for the current speed. ! In manual drive program M, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 277). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 277). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Kickdown i Kickdown is not possible in manual drive program M. Switching off the manual drive program X Press the program selector button (Y page 277) repeatedly until C or S appears in the multifunction display. Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator appears in the multifunction display. Z Driving and parking Switching on the manual drive program 280 Refueling Problems with the transmission Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop the vehicle. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, immediately. Transfer case This section is only valid for vehicles with 4wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles. ! Performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. ! To prevent ESP® from intervening, the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey or the Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) if: Rthe electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer. vehicle is being towed with only one axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC). Rthe The brake system could otherwise be damaged. Refueling Important safety notes G WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury. Never allow sparks, flames or smoking materials near gasoline. Turn off the engine before refueling. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing contact. Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to your health. Refueling G WARNING ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel system and engine. ! Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. You can find more information under "Fuel" (Y page 477), or by contacting an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center or visiting http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). Refueling Fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the SmartKey or using KEYLESSGO. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster 8. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Gasoline Fuel grade ! You should only refuel with unleaded premium-grade gasoline as this avoids damaging the catalytic converter. If engine running problems are apparent, have the cause checked immediately and repaired. Excess unburned fuel can otherwise enter the catalytic converter, leading to overheating and possibly causing a fire. ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can. i Only refuel with premium-grade unleaded gasoline with a specified minimum octane number of 91 (average value of 96 RON/ 86 MON). You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance. : To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tire pressure table ? Fuel type Opening X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door. This switches the ignition to position 0, which corresponds to having removed the Z Driving and parking Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gasoline to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury. 281 Refueling Driving and parking 282 SmartKey. The driver’s door can be closed again. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. X Open the fuel filler flap. X Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap ;. X Completely insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. Closing X Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages. X Close the fuel filler flap. i If you drive with the fuel filler cap open, the reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 365). For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 384). i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. A locking pin otherwise prevents the fuel filler flap from closing after the vehicle has been locked. Parking 283 Problems with fuel and the fuel tank Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of explosion or fire The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0(Y page 267) in the ignition lock immediately and remove it. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. or The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 72). or X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 75). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials can come into contact with the hot exhaust system. Combustible materials, such as grass, hay or leaves could be ignited by the hot exhaust system and cause a vehicle fire. Do not park the vehicle on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. Unintended vehicle movement can cause serious personal injury or damage to the vehicle or the vehicle drivetrain. To reduce such risks, always do the following before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle: Rkeep your right foot on the brake pedal. Rengage the electric parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission into park position P. Rslowly release the brake pedal. Rwhen parked on an incline, always turn the front wheels towards the road curb. the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, or press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. Rtake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle when leaving. Rturn Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop. With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Z Driving and parking Problem Parking 284 Driving and parking G WARNING Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone only will shift the automatic transmission into neutral position N automatically. Always shift the automatic transmission into park position P before turning off the engine. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. i If you cannot turn off the engine as described here, see "Engine emergency stop" (Y page 439). Vehicles with automatic transmission X X Apply the electric parking brake. Shift the transmission to position P. Using the SmartKey X pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently from the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Electric parking brake General information G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake and/or shift the automatic transmission out of park position P, either of which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. i If you turn off the engine with the SmartKey and then remove it from the ignition lock or open a front door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. Using KEYLESS-GO X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 267). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. i When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to SmartKey position 1. When the driver's door is open, it corresponds to SmartKey position 0 or "SmartKey removed". i If you use the Start/Stop button to switch off the engine, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. If you then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P. i In an emergency, the engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by Applying/releasing manually X To apply: press handle :. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. i The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed. X To release: switch on the ignition. X Pull handle :. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i The electric parking brake cannot be released unless the SmartKey is in position Parking Engaging the electric parking brake automatically The electric parking brake is automatically applied if HOLD or DISTRONIC PLUS brakes the vehicle until it is stationary and at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off. Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt is not fastened. Rthe hood is released. Rthe trunk lid is opened while the automatic transmission is in position R. Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. i In addition to the electric parking brake, P may also be engaged automatically. Releasing the electric parking brake automatically The electric parking brake is released automatically when the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled: Rthe engine is running. automatic transmission is in position D or R. Rthe hood is closed. Ryour seat belt is fastened. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. If the automatic transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed. Rthe If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Rthe driver's door is closed. shift out of P or you have previously driven faster than 3 km/h. Ryou have shifted out of P or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h). Ryou Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle : of the electric parking brake (Y page 284). i The vehicle is braked as long as you keep the handle of the electric parking brake pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle is depressed, the greater the braking force. During braking: Ra warning tone sounds. Please Release Parking Brake message appears. Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged. Rthe Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharge. X Connect a trickle charger. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Z Driving and parking 1 in the ignition lock or if the ignition has been switched on using the Start/Stop button. 285 Driving tips 286 Driving and parking If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. Driving tips General driving tips Important safety notes G WARNING Always remember that you must concentrate primarily on driving the vehicle. The driver's concentration must always be directed primarily at road traffic. For your own safety and that of others, we recommend that you stop the vehicle at a safe place and in accordance with the traffic conditions before making or accepting a phone call. Comply with all legal requirements if you use the telephone while driving. Use the handsfree system and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. In some jurisdictions, it is forbidden for drivers to use mobile phones while driving. Only operate COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System) in compliance with all legal requirements and when the road, weather and traffic conditions permit. You may otherwise not be able to observe the traffic conditions, endangering yourself and others. Remember that your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) a second when it is traveling at only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h). Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: X The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. X Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. X Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Service Booklet or by the service interval display. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic and in mountainous terrain. Drinking and driving G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Pedals G WARNING Make sure absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals' range of movement. Keep the driver's footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury. Rolling with the engine switched off G WARNING There is no power assistance for the steering and the brake when the engine is not running. Driving tips Exhaust check G WARNING Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times. Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency when they are maintained exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. For this reason, all work on the engine must be carried out only by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians. The engine settings must not be changed in any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Service Booklet. control. Your vehicle's ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. G WARNING Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when you apply the brakes. Downhill gradients ! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting early to a lower gear. This allows you to take advantage of the engine braking effect and helps avoid overheating and excessive wear of the brakes. When you take advantage of the engine braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. Heavy and light loads G WARNING Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. It may also cause the brakes to overheat, seriously impairing their effectiveness. It may then not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. Wet roads Brakes Important safety notes G WARNING On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle G WARNING After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced. You have to depress the brake pedal Z Driving and parking Steering and braking requires significantly more effort and you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result. Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is in motion. 287 288 Driving tips Driving and parking more firmly. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salt treated roads G WARNING The layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the braking effect, resulting in a significantly longer braking distance, which could lead to an accident. To avoid this danger, you should: Roccasionally brake carefully, without putting other road users at risk, when you are driving on salted roads. This helps to remove any salt that may have started to build up on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings. Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead and drive with particular care. Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a trip and immediately after commencing a new trip, so that salt residues are removed from the brake discs. Servicing the brakes ! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and you hear a warning tone while the engine is running, the brake fluid level may be too low. Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immediately. This work should be carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. This work should be carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Have the brake pads replaced and the brake fluid renewed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G WARNING If brake pads or brake fluid other than those recommended are used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you are planning to have the vehicle tested on such a dynamometer, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further information first. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train or the brake system. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® system operates automatically, the engine and the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer. Braking maneuvers triggered automatically by ESP® may seriously damage the brake system. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® system operates automatically, the engine and the ignition system must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) when: Rtesting the electric parking brake on a brake dynamometer. Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with one of the axles raised. Driving tips If your brake system is subject only to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals by pressing firmly on the brake pedal at high speeds. This improves the grip of the brake pads. G WARNING Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when you apply the brakes. You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS) on (Y page 62) or of BAS PLUS on (Y page 62). High-performance brake system for AMG vehicles The high-performance brake system is installed only on the CL 63 AMG and CL 65 AMG. G WARNING New vehicle brake pads and discs, and replacement brake pads and discs may take several hundred miles of driving until they provide optimum braking efficiency. Until that time, you may need to use increased brake pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware of this and adjust your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period. Excessive high-demand braking will cause correspondingly high brake wear. Please be attentive to the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster and brake condition messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly. The high-performance brake system is designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on: Rspeed Rbraking force Renvironmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain further information about this from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Driving on wet roads Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds. tires have adequate tread depth. For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning can occur you must drive in the following manner: Rthe Rreduce your speed ruts Rbrake carefully Ravoid Driving on flooded roads ! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. This can damage the electronic components in the engine or the automatic transmission. Water can also be drawn in Z Driving and parking Braking maneuvers triggered automatically by ESP® may seriously damage the brake system. 289 290 Driving systems by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage. Winter driving Driving and parking General notes G WARNING If the vehicle becomes trapped in snow, ensure that snow is kept away from the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle as long as the engine is running. Otherwise, poisonous carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle, resulting in loss of consciousness and even death. To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind. At the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 444). Driving with summer tires Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 444). Slippery road surfaces G WARNING The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. G WARNING On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle's ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to position N. i For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 445). G WARNING Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when you apply the brakes. Driving systems Cruise control Important safety notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can set any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). G WARNING The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle's speed and for safe brake operation. Driving systems Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Cruise control lever Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G WARNING : To switch on or to increase the speed ; To switch on or to reduce the speed = To deactivate cruise control ? To switch on with the current speed or with the last stored speed When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds and is indicated in the speedometer by a triangle. The speedometer dial lights up between the set speed and the maximum speed. The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. Z Driving and parking Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic, and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed. RThe use of the cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. RThe use of the cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control. RDeactivate the cruise control when driving in fog. The "Resume" function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. 291 Driving systems 292 Setting a speed Driving and parking G WARNING Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments. Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/ or serious injury to you and others. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Making adjustments in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Making adjustments in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake. are driving below 20 mph (30 km/h). RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving. If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Control Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Ryou i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS Important safety notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, DISTRONIC PLUS causes your vehicle to brake and maintain a preset distance to the vehicle in front. G WARNING The DISTRONIC PLUS requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following information carefully before operating the system. G WARNING When DISTRONIC brakes, the brake pedal is pulled back (i.e. operated automatically). The area around the pedal must not be blocked by obstacles: Rdo not place any objects in the footwell. Rensure that floormats and carpets are fixed securely. In particular, do not place several floormats on top of one another. Rdo not place your foot under the brake pedal, as it could become trapped. Non-compliance could lead you to cause an accident in which you and/or others could be seriously injured. G WARNING The DISTRONIC PLUS is a convenience system. Its speed adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not however, intended to, nor does it, replace the need for extreme care. The responsibility for the vehicle's speed, distance to the preceding vehicle and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe stopping distance, always remains with the driver. The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by the DISTRONIC PLUS. This could result in wrong or missing distance warnings. If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 344) and operational. If there is no vehicle driving in front of you, DISTRONIC PLUS functions like cruise control at a speed range between 20 mph (Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of you, it functions at a speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the applicable section in the Operator's Manual if there are any questions concerning this. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. G WARNING The DISTRONIC PLUS adaptive cruise control is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It does not react to pedestrians or on stationary objects, nor does it recognize or predict the curvature and lane layout or the movement of preceding vehicles. The DISTRONIC PLUS can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehicle's braking power. The DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles possibly driving in front of you, such as motorcycles and vehicles driving in an offset formation. It is the driver's responsibility at all times to be attentive to the road, weather and traffic conditions. Additionally, the driver must provide the steering, braking and other driving inputs necessary to remain in control of the vehicle. High-frequency sources such as toll stations, speed measuring systems etc. can cause the DISTRONIC PLUS system to temporarily cease functioning. Z 293 Driving and parking Driving systems 294 Driving systems G WARNING Driving and parking The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and traffic conditions into account. Only use the DISTRONIC PLUS if the road, weather and traffic conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed. G WARNING Use of the DISTRONIC PLUS can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control. The DISTRONIC PLUS does not function in adverse sight and distance conditions. Do not use the DISTRONIC PLUS during conditions of fog, heavy rain, snow or sleet. G WARNING The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off the DISTRONIC PLUS or do not switch it on if: Rroads are slippery or covered with snow or ice. The wheels could lose traction while braking or accelerating, and the vehicle could skid. Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS system sensor covers are dirty or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain or fog, for example. The distance control system functionality could be impaired. Always pay attention to surrounding traffic conditions even while the DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize dangerous situations until it is too late. This could cause an accident in which you and/or others could be injured. G WARNING The "Resume" function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. G WARNING Your undivided attention to street and traffic conditions is necessary at all times whether DISTRONIC PLUS is active or not. The use of DISTRONIC PLUS can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to stationary objects on the road (for example, a vehicle stopped in traffic or an abandoned vehicle). DISTRONIC PLUS likewise does not react to oncoming vehicles. Deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: Rwhen changing to the right lane, if the vehicles in the left lane are driving slower Rwhen driving into a filter lane or an expressway exit Rin complex driving situations, for example in construction sites on an expressway In these situations DISTRONIC PLUS will maintain the set speed if it is not deactivated. DISTRONIC PLUS is intended only for maintaining a set speed and a set distance from the objects moving in front of the vehicle. G WARNING An intermittent warning sounds and the distance warning lamp · in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the DISTRONIC PLUS system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle's current speed indicate that the DISTRONIC PLUS will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance, which creates a danger of a collision. Immediately brake the vehicle to increase your distance to the preceding vehicle. The warning sound is intended as a final caution in which you should intercede with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede Driving systems G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with a maximum deceleration of 13 ft/s2(4 m/s2). This is equivalent to approximately 40 % of your vehicle's maximum possible deceleration. You need to brake yourself to prevent a collision. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes the vehicle to restore the set distance from the vehicle ahead or the set speed. G WARNING If you do not receive visual or acoustic warning signals during a critical traffic situation, DISTRONIC PLUS has either not recognized the collision risk, has been deactivated or is malfunctioning. Remember, whether or not DISTRONIC PLUS is operating, it is ultimately always the drivers responsibility to apply the brakes in order to control the vehicle and avoid a collision. Cruise control lever : To store the current speed or a higher ? To store the current speed or to call up the last stored speed A To set the specified minimum distance Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storing the current speed and maintaining it Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be activated but not intervening. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe hood must be closed. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not skid. Activating while driving When driving at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is no longer detected and shown, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and a warning tone sounds. speed ; To store the current speed or a lower speed = To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS Z Driving and parking with your own braking. This will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoided. Tailgating increases the risk of an accident. 295 Driving systems 296 Driving and parking X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, or briefly press up : or down ;. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down ; until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override message is shown in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slowermoving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. Activating when driving towards a stationary vehicle If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehicle is stationary as well. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, or briefly press up : or down ;. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at under 20 mph (30 km/h) if a vehicle in front has been detected. Therefore, the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the instrument cluster should be activated (Y page 341). X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down ; until the desired speed is set. i You can use the cruise control lever to set the stored speed and the control on the cruise control lever to set the specified minimum distance (Y page 298). Pulling away X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. Driving If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, DISTRONIC causes your vehicle to brake. This maintains the preset distance to the vehicle in front. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed of your vehicle, but only up to the desired speed you have stored. G WARNING If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. DISTRONIC PLUS then no longer brakes your vehicle. In such cases, control the distance from vehicles travelling in front with the brake alone. You could otherwise cause an accident and thereby injure yourself and others. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the speed being driven and for braking in good time. Changing lanes If you wish to change to the passing lane (in left-hand-drive vehicles, the passing lane is the left-hand lane), DISTRONIC PLUS supports you if: Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph (60 km/h). RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front. Driving systems switch on the appropriate turn signals. RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision. If these conditions are met, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assist are only aids designed to assist driving. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Stopping G WARNING Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be operated, activated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the electric parking brake and must not be used for parking. The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is canceled and the vehicle can start moving if: RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the cruise control lever. Ryou accelerate. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. i Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. Setting a speed G WARNING Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments. Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/ or serious injury to you and others. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. Z Driving and parking Ryou 297 Driving systems 298 Making adjustments in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments Driving and parking X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 299). G WARNING It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to select the appropriate setting given road conditions, traffic, driver's preferred driving style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance. Making adjustments in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Storing the current speed or calling up a stored speed G WARNING The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can X To increase: turn control ; in direction =. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient and safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Driving systems 299 : Symbol for activated PRE-SAFE® Brake ; Vehicle in front, if detected When you switch on DISTRONIC PLUS, triangle ; shows the stored speed. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. = Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front ? Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable A Own vehicle If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, the speedometer dial lights up between speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed ;. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated X Select the Distance Display function using the on-board computer (Y page 341). DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multifunction display You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. After this time, you will see the following in the multifunction display while DISTRONIC PLUS is activated: General notes You can select the distance display in the Assistance menu (Y page 341) of the onboard computer. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated X Select the Distance Display function using the on-board computer (Y page 341). When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will see the following in the multifunction display: : DISTRONIC PLUS activated ; Own vehicle = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Vehicle in front, if detected Z Driving and parking DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer Driving systems 300 Driving and parking Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door is open. Rthe vehicle has skidded. If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS Off message is shown in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. G WARNING There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X The DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and releases the brakes when the vehicle decelerates below the minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) by operation of the system unless the DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle directly ahead of you. At that time the driver must apply the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop. Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message is shown in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake. Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph (25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected. RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position. Ryou switch off the radar sensor system (Y page 344). Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Important safety notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. G WARNING The DISTRONIC PLUS works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at your set distance). This means that: RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after you have changed lanes. in a sharp turn or if the preceding vehicle is in a sharp turn, the DISTRONIC PLUS could lose sight of the preceding vehicle. Your vehicle could then accelerate to the previously selected speed. RWhile Driving systems Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jam Ra disabled vehicle Ran oncoming vehicle The driver must always be alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by means of steering or braking the vehicle. DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Other vehicles changing lane Driving and parking The DISTRONIC PLUS regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead of it. It may not register stationary objects in the road, e.g.: G WARNING The DISTRONIC PLUS should not be used in snowy or icy road conditions. Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles traveling on a different line 301 DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Z 302 Driving systems Obstructions and stationary vehicles The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Driving and parking Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Crossing vehicles is fastened. electric parking brake is released. Rthe hood is closed. Rthe transmission is in position R, N or D. The trunk lid must be closed in position R. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Rthe Activating the HOLD function X Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until HOLD display : appears in the instrument cluster. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. G WARNING The vehicle's brakes are applied when the HOLD function is activated. For this reason, deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). Driving systems AIRMATIC The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Vehicle level Ryou Important safety notes Your vehicle regulates its height automatically. All-round self-leveling ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. The following vehicle levels are possible: accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P. Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain amount of pressure until HOLD disappears from the instrument cluster. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. G WARNING Never get out of the vehicle when the HOLD function is activated. The HOLD function must never be operated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. The HOLD function does not replace the electric parking brake and must not be used for parking. The braking effect of the HOLD function is canceled and the vehicle could roll away if: Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rnormal Rraised: the vehicle is raised by about 1.20 in (30 mm) when compared with the normal level Rlowered: the vehicle is lowered by about 0.40 in (10 mm) when compared with the normal level The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can be set manually. The "Lowered” vehicle level is set automatically at speeds over 60 mph (100 km/h). Setting the vehicle level Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. G WARNING To help avoid personal injury, keep hands and feet away from wheel housing area, and stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis. Z Driving and parking Deactivating the HOLD function 303 Driving systems 304 The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or comfort Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Driving and parking Rthe Setting raised level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is not lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle height is adjusted to raised level. The Vehicle rising message appears in the multifunction display. The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: Rdrive at speeds above approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) Rdrive about 3 minutes at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) The "Raised level" remains active when you are not driving within these speed ranges. Setting the normal level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level. Suspension tuning General notes The Adaptive Damping System (ADS) automatically controls the calibration of the dampers and springs. Sports tuning The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports suspension tuning is selected. The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Comfort tuning In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. highways. X If indicator lamp ; is lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. Comfort tuning is selected. The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. Driving systems 305 Active Body Control (ABC) Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to improve driving safety and reduce fuel consumption. Depending on the vehicle height that has been set, the vehicle automatically adjusts its height dependent on the current speed. As speed increases, the vehicle is lowered by up to 0.4 in (10 mm). As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height. G WARNING The vehicle is lowered when the engine is switched off. Therefore, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel housing or under the vehicle when you switch off the engine. Otherwise, limbs could become trapped. ! The vehicle is lowered when the engine is switched off. Make sure when parking that you position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the curb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. i For AMG vehicles: when the engine is switched off, the vehicle is lowered by approx. 0.2 in (5 mm). Setting the vehicle level Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. G WARNING To help avoid personal injury, keep hands and feet away from wheel housing area, and stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis. Driving and parking Vehicle level Setting raised level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is not lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle height is adjusted to raised level. Setting the normal level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level. Suspension tuning The electronically controlled ABC suspension system works continuously. This improves driving safety and comfort. The ABC suspension system is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or comfort Rthe vehicle load Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Rthe Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Z 306 Driving systems whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. G WARNING If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient traction: Driving and parking RWhile Sports tuning The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode if you prefer a firmer suspension tuning. X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected the suspension for a sporty driving style. The ABC Active Body Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Comfort tuning In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. X If indicator lamp ; is lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. You have selected the suspension for a comfortable driving style. The ABC Active Body Control COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle driving off, apply as little throttle as possible. RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal. RAdapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions. Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid. The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed. ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes G WARNING The PARKTRONIC is a supplemental system. It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers always remains with the driver. G WARNING Make sure no persons or animals are in or near the area in which you are parking/ maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be injured. Driving systems 307 PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: on the ignition the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the electric parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. Driving and parking Rswitch Rshift Side view Top view Front sensors Center Approximately 40 in (approximately 100 cm) Corners Approximately 24 in (approximately 60 cm) : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example) Range of the sensors General notes The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush; otherwise they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 418). Rear sensors Center Approximately 48 in (approximately 120 cm) Corners Approximately 32 in (approximately 80 cm) ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Z 308 Driving systems Driving and parking Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. Minimum distance Center Approximately 8 in (approximately 20 cm) Corners Approximately 8 in (approximately 20 cm) yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The selected transmission position determines which warning display is active when the engine is running. Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R Rear and front areas activated N If the electric parking brake is engaged: no areas are activated If the electric parking brake is released: rear and front areas are activated P No areas activated If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is in the instrument cluster. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment. One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. When the first red segment lights up, you hear an intermittent warning for about two seconds. From the second red segment, you hear a continuous warning. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if : To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC ; Indicator lamp Driving systems 309 If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated Driving and parking when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Z 310 Driving systems Problems with PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 418). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or approximately 20 ultrasound waves. seconds. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Parking Guidance Important safety notes Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. You receive steering instructions when parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 306). G WARNING Parking Guidance is merely an aid and may display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, for example: Rno-parking areas spaces with unsuitable surfaces (road surface) Rparking Rdriveways Rentrances and exits Parking Guidance detects and measures potential parking spaces while driving past. Changes to the parking space after this point are not taken into account, for example if the vehicle in front of or behind the parking space changes position or objects in the parking space are moved. Even when using Parking Guidance, you are still responsible for driving carefully. If you rely on Parking Guidance alone, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Safety always remains your responsibility and you must continue paying careful attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering. Driving systems Objects located above the height range of Parking Guidance will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These objects are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. Under some circumstances, Parking Guidance might therefore issue steering instructions too soon. This may lead to a collision. For this reason, you should avoid using Parking Guidance in such situations. G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the maneuvering range. Otherwise, they could be injured. ! Pay particular attention to low objects or objects with flat surfaces, such as trailer drawbars, posts, cross beams and curbs. These types of objects cannot be detected by Parking Guidance and may damage the vehicle. When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Guidance is also unavailable. Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces: are parallel to the direction of travel are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e. not on the pavement, for example. Parking Guidance may not detect flat curbs Parking tips: Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you must not use Parking Guidance. Rnever use Parking Guidance with snow chains or an emergency spare wheel installed. Rmake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct effect on the steering instructions. Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. In some cases, Parking Guidance may guide you too far or not far enough into a parking space. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure with Parking Guidance. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Detecting a parking space Rthat Rthat Ron narrow roads, drive past the parking space as close as possible. Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown or partially occupied by trailer drawbars might be identified incorrectly or not at all. Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 308) warning messages during the parking procedure. : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Parking Guidance is automatically activated when you drive forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. At speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you see white parking symbol ; in the instrument cluster as a status indicator. Parking Z Driving and parking G WARNING 311 Driving and parking 312 Driving systems Guidance only shows parking spaces on the passenger side in the default setting. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. To park on the driver's side, you must leave the driver's side turn signal switched on until you have engaged reverse gear. If a parking space is detected, parking symbol ; changes to blue. Additionally, an arrow pointing right = or left : is shown. Parking Guidance will only detect parking spaces: X Stop the vehicle when the blue parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Engage reverse gear. The multifunction display shows the message: Check surroundings Confirm with OK. X Press a on the multifunction steering wheel to confirm. The display in the instrument cluster switches to Parking Guidance. Rthat are closed in at the back are parallel to the direction of travel Rthat are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wide Rthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than your vehicle A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. Rthat Parking : Green lane The following instructions refer to parking in a space on the front-passenger side. To park in a space on the driver's side, mirror the instructions. ; White bracket marking the target position G WARNING The Parking Guidance is only an aid and may not detect all obstacles. The Parking Guidance does not relieve you of the responsibility to pay attention. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering. Otherwise, you could endanger yourself and others. X Depending on the distance, you may have to reverse along the lane towards the parking space. This is indicated by green lane :. Continue backing up until you hear a tone. Stop; the parking position has been reached and is marked by white bracket ; with an arrow for the target position. Driving systems 313 Steering tips : Red lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position ; Yellow lane indicating the route the vehicle will take when you have turned the steering wheel in the required direction X Turn the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary until red lane : and yellow lane ; overlap. Lane ; is then marked in green and you hear a tone. If the parking space is inside the area displayed, the end of the green lane is marked with a white bracket and an arrow showing the target position. Backing up into a parking space : Lane turns green when the steering wheel is turned in the correct direction X Keep the steering wheel in that position and reverse carefully. X Stop as soon as you hear a tone. The vehicle has reached the position in which you need to countersteer. : Red lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position ; Yellow lane indicating the route the vehicle will take when you have turned the steering wheel in the required direction X Turn the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary until red lane : and yellow lane ; overlap. Lane ; is then marked in green and you hear a tone. A white arrow and white bracket are shown to indicate the target position. Driving to the final position : Lane turns green when the steering wheel is turned in the correct direction X Keep the steering wheel turned in that direction and reverse carefully until you have reached the final position. The Parking Guidance finished message appears in the multifunction display and a tone sounds. Z Driving and parking Countersteering Driving systems 314 Driving and parking The rear view camera is located in the handle strip of the trunk lid. Final position Depending on the size of the parking space, you may now be in an angled position in the parking space. If possible, Parking Guidance will guide you as far back as possible towards the rear limit of the parking space. X Maneuver to the final position if necessary. X Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 308). Canceling Parking Guidance X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the dashboard (Y page 308). Parking Guidance is canceled immediately and PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Guidance is canceled automatically if it is no longer possible to guide you into the parking space, or if a malfunction occurs. The parking space symbol goes out and a warning tone sounds. The Parking Guidance Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. Rear view camera Important safety notes The rear view camera is an optical parking aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle in the COMAND display. G WARNING Make sure that no persons or animals are in the maneuvering range. Otherwise, they could be injured. : Rear view camera View through the camera The area behind the vehicle is displayed in a mirror-inverted manner, as in the rear-view mirror. G WARNING The rear view camera is only an aid and may display obstacles Rfrom a distorted perspective Rinaccurately Rmay not display obstacles at all The rear view camera does not relieve you of the responsibility to be cautious. Take care and pay careful attention. The rear view camera may not show objects which are Rvery close to the rear bumper the rear bumper Rabove the trunk handle You are responsible for safety at all times and must continue to pay attention to the immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This includes the area behind, in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise you could endanger yourself and/or others. Runder G WARNING The rear view camera will not function or will not fully function if: Driving systems trunk lid is open is raining or snowing strongly or if it is foggy Rit is night or if you are parking/ maneuvering your vehicle in a very dark area Ra very bright white light is affecting the camera Rthe immediate vicinity is illuminated with fluorescent light (the display of the COMAND system can flicker) Rtemperature changes abruptly, for example if you drive out of the cold into a heated garage (condensation on the lens) Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged In this case, have the position and the setting of the camera checked at a specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you consult a MercedesBenz Center for this purpose. Do not use the rear view camera in these situations. You could otherwise injure yourself and other people and/or cause damage - including damage to your vehicle while parking/maneuvering. Rit Activating the rear view camera X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND display with guide lines. Guide lines in the COMAND display G WARNING Use of rear view camera can be dangerous if you are color-blind or have impaired color vision. Only use rear view camera if you can see and distinguish all colored guidelines shown by rear view camera on the COMAND system display. G WARNING Please note that objects that do not touch the ground may appear to be further away than they actually are, for example: Rthe bumper of a vehicle parked behind you trailer drawbar Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear end of a truck Ra slanted post In such cases, you should not use the guide lines to judge the distance. You may misjudge the distance, which increases the risk of impacting the objects. Even if the object you approach is directly on the ground, do not approach the object any closer than the red guide line. Rthe Information in the COMAND display (example) Guide lines ; and = show the approximate distance to the rear area. Yellow guide line ; indicates a distance of approximately 3 ft (1 m) and red guide line = indicates a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m). The distances only apply to objects that are at ground level. Blue guide lines : depict the width required for the vehicle. They are used to align the vehicle with the edge of the road, e.g. the curb. Z Driving and parking Rthe 315 316 Driving systems ATTENTION ASSIST Driving and parking Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on freeways and interstate highways. It is active in the range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests you take a break. Rif you predominantly drive at speeds under 50 mph (80 km/h) or over 112 mph (180 km/h) Rif you are currently using COMAND or making a telephone call with it Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed Warning and display messages in the multifunction display G WARNING ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may detect your tiredness or lapses in concentration too late or not at all. It is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. Fatigue may cause you to recognize hazardous situations too late, misjudge a situation or react more slowly. For this reason, make sure you feel rested before you begin driving and during your journey. Make sure that you take regular breaks in time, particularly on long journeys. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rdriving conditions, e.g. time, driving time The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 342). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You will then hear an intermittent warning tone twice, and the Attention Assist: Time for a break? message appears in the multifunction display. X If necessary, take a break. X Press a to confirm the message. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness again if: Ryou switch off the engine. take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break. Ryou Driving systems Important safety notes In addition to the illumination provided by the normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus uses infrared light to illuminate the road. The Night View Assist Plus camera picks up the infrared light and shows a black-and-white image in the multifunction display. The image shown in the multifunction display corresponds to a road lit up by high-beam headlamps. This enables you to see the road's course and any obstacles in good time. If pedestrian recognition is activated, pedestrians recognized by the system are highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus display. The spotlight function also illuminates individual detected pedestrians with a spotlight that flashes four times in quick succession. After this targeted illumination, the headlamps return to the original driving position again. high-beam headlamps due to oncoming traffic. G WARNING The Night View Assist Plus cannot record objects immediately in front of or next to the vehicle. When maneuvering, continue to look through the windshield. Make sure no persons or animals are in the area in which you are maneuvering. You could otherwise injure them. i Infrared light is not visible to the human eye and therefore does not glare. Night View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming traffic. G WARNING Night View Assist Plus is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely solely on the Night View Assist Plus display. Continue to look through the windshield. You are responsible for safety and must drive in accordance with traffic conditions. You could otherwise put yourself and others in danger. The system may be impaired or unavailable if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or heavy spray. Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Ryou are driving on bends, uphill gradients or downhill gradients. Light from the headlamps of oncoming vehicles does not affect the Night View Assist Plus display in the multifunction display. This is also the case if you cannot switch on the : Night View Assist Plus camera Pedestrian recognition G WARNING Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or inoperative if: Rpedestrians are partially or entirely obscured by objects, e.g. parked vehicles. Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night View Assist Plus display is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflections. Rpedestrians do not contrast with the surroundings. Rpedestrians are not standing upright, for example, if they are sitting, crouching or lying down. Z Driving and parking Night View Assist Plus with spotlight function 317 318 Driving systems i Animals are not recognized by pedestrian Driving and parking recognition. Night View Assist Plus is able to recognize pedestrians by typical characteristics, e.g. a silhouette in the shape of a person. Pedestrian recognition is then switched on automatically if: RNight View Assist Plus is activated. Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h). Rthe surroundings are dark, e.g. when driving outside built-up areas without street lighting. If pedestrian recognition is enabled, the active pedestrian recognition symbol (Y page 319) appears in the multifunction display. If a pedestrian is now recognized, they are framed and thereby highlighted. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windshield to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and pedestrians cannot be gauged accurately by looking at a screen. It may be the case that objects are highlighted as well as pedestrians. If you switch to symmetrical low beam (Y page 244), pedestrians or objects on the front-passenger side of the vehicle will not be recognized instead. It may be the case that pedestrians and other objects are inadvertently illuminated. Activating/deactivating Night View Assist Plus with spotlight function You can only activate Night View Assist Plus with spotlight function if: Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. is dark. Rthe "Adaptive Highbeam Assist" function is activated via the on-board computer (Y page 344). Rthe light switch is in position c. Rthe combination switch is pushed forward beyond the point of resistance. Rreverse gear has not been engaged. Rit Spotlight function Pedestrian recognition with spotlight function is activated automatically if: RNight View Assist Plus with spotlight function is activated. Ryou are driving faster than 28 mph (45 km/h). Rthe surroundings are dark, e.g. when driving outside built-up areas without street lighting. Only one pedestrian or one object can be illuminated with the spotlight at any one time. The spotlight function will not function if: Rpedestrians or objects cannot be recognized due to fast cornering. Rpedestrians or objects are on the driver's side of the vehicle. X To activate: activate Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 248). X Press button :. The Night View Assist Plus with spotlight function display appears in the multifunction display. Driving systems 319 Display for a slow-moving vehicle (example) : Night View Assist Plus display ; Pedestrian recognized = Framing ? Symbol for active spotlight function (example) A Speed display The active spotlight function symbol ? changes according to the vehicle's speed and surroundings. When you activate Night View Assist Plus with spotlight function, speed display A in the multifunction display changes. Speed display A is shown as a bar at the bottom edge of the multifunction display. This line is no longer available for basic menus. You have to deactivate Night View Assist Plus with spotlight function if you wish to change a setting using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. X To deactivate the spotlight function briefly: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The spotlight function and the Adaptive Highbeam Assist are deactivated. If you push the combination switch forward beyond the point of resistance again, both systems are reactivated. X To deactivate: press button : again. X Deactivate the Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 248). i If you do not wish to use the spotlight function, you first need to deactivate Night View Assist Plus and then activate it again without the spotlight function (Y page 319). Symbols for the active spotlight function : Symbol for stationary vehicle and when Activating/deactivating Night View Assist Plus without spotlight function driving on well-lit roads ; Symbol at speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) = Symbol at speeds above approximately 28 mph (45 km/h) You can read about how to adjust the brightness of the multifunction display in the "COMAND" section (Y page 114). i The spotlight function only switches on when the vehicle is driving at speeds of at least 28 mph (45 km/h). Therefore, when Z Driving and parking the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly, you cannot check whether Night View Assist Plus with spotlight function is operating. 320 Driving systems You can only activate Night View Assist Plus without spotlight function if: Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. is dark. Rthe light switch is in the c or L position. Rreverse gear has not been engaged. X To activate: press and hold button : until the active spotlight function symbol in the Night View Assist Plus display in the multifunction display goes out. If you drive faster than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the symbol for active pedestrian recognition without spotlight function appears instead. Driving and parking Rit changes. Speed display A is shown as a bar at the bottom edge of the multifunction display. This line is no longer available for basic menus. You have to deactivate Night View Assist Plus if you want to change a setting using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. X To deactivate: press button : again. i If you want to use the spotlight function as well, you first need to deactivate Night View Assist Plus and then reactivate it with the spotlight function (Y page 318). Fogged up or dirty windshield If the windshield in front of the camera is fogged up or dirty on the inside or outside, the Night View Assist Plus display is affected. G WARNING : Night View Assist Plus display ; Pedestrian recognized = Framing ? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition without spotlight function A Speed display You can find out more about adjusting the brightness of the multifunction display in the "COMAND" section (Y page 114). i The infrared lamps switch on automatically from a speed of about 6 mph (10 km/h). This means that you do not have the full visual range while the vehicle is stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Plus is working. When you activate Night View Assist Plus, speed display A in the multifunction display Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver's attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, stop before trying to remove window fogging or cleaning the windshield in front of the Night View Assist Plus camera. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. X To defrost: check the automatic air conditioning settings (Y page 260) and fold down the camera cover (Y page 419). X To defrost the inside of the windshield: fold down the camera cover (Y page 419) and clean the windshield (Y page 417). Driving systems 321 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The picture quality of Night View Assist Plus has deteriorated. The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield. X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 252). The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a car wash. X Clean the windshield (Y page 417). There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision. X Replace the windshield. The windshield is fogged up on the inside. X Defrost the windshield (Y page 260). The windshield is iced up. X De-ice the windshield (Y page 259). There is dirt on the inside of the windshield. X Clean the inside of the windshield (Y page 417). Active Driving Assistance package General notes The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 292), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 321) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 324). Active Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the side areas of your vehicle which are in back of the driver. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible collision warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. To support the coursecorrecting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist also uses the forward-facing radar sensor system. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from speeds of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid, and may detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. It cannot detect vehicles that are overtaken at a small distance and then enter the blind spot area. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for Z Driving and parking Problems with Night View Assist Plus Driving and parking 322 Driving systems attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be activated (Y page 344) and operational. Monitoring area Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area shown in the figure up to 10 ft (3 m) behind and immediately adjacent to your vehicle. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds are not detected. No visual nor audible warnings are emitted and the system does not brake the vehicle to correct your course. If the lanes are very wide, it may not be possible to monitor the complete width of the neighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles in the next lane may not be detected, especially if they are driving in a staggered formation. This may be the case if vehicles are driving at that edge of their lane which is furthest away from your vehicle. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, such as trucks, for a prolonged time. Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers respectively. An additional radar sensor is located behind the cover in the radiator grill. Make sure that the sensor areas on the bumpers and the sensor cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice and slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display monitoring range. This warning is always given when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you are passing another vehicle, the warning is emitted only if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind Spot Assist is no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds lower than 20 mph (30 km/h). The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Visual and audible collision warnings If you switch on the appropriate turn signals and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you will receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors up to a vehicle speed of 20 mph (30 km/h). When the vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is ready for use. When your speed exceeds approximately 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : lights up red on the corresponding side whenever a vehicle is detected in the blind spot Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. The course-correcting brake application is available in the range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the Z 323 Driving and parking Driving systems 324 Driving systems Driving and parking exterior mirror and the following is shown in the multifunction display, for example: G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. In some cases, the course-correcting brake application is not sufficient to avoid a collision. In such a case, you must steer, brake or accelerate. In very rare cases, the system may erroneously detect a danger of collision in the area of crash barriers or similar lane borders and apply the brakes. Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. You are responsible for driving at appropriate speeds, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. RESP® is switched off. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected. Ra Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 344) and Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 343) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : light up red in the exterior mirrors for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. X Active Lane Keeping Assist Important safety notes Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera at the top of the windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There will be either no or only a weak coursecorrecting brake application if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. : Active Lane Keeping Assist camera If you have selected the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer(Y page 344) function in the on-board computer and select km as the unit of measurement, Active Lane Keeping Assist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. If the mph display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect the lane markings on the road incorrectly or not at all. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane are present. is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, e.g. near roadworks. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. Rthe road is narrow and winding. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Rthere Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning can be given when a front wheel passes over a lane marking. You will be warned by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. No warning vibration occurs if: Ryou Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Lane-correcting brake application If you leave your lane under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane. This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h to 200 km/h). A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, recognizable lane marking. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. The brake Z 325 Driving and parking Driving systems 326 Driving systems application also slightly reduces vehicle speed. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, the following, for example, appears in the multifunction display: cause an accident and injure yourself and others. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Driving and parking Ryou i A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. In some cases, the lanecorrecting brake application is not sufficient to bring your vehicle back to the original lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect road and traffic conditions. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. In rare cases, unclear markings or particular structures on the roadway can be recognized as solid lane markings. An inappropriate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking, may be interrupted at any time by steering slightly in the opposite direction. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take weather conditions into account. You are responsible for the driving at appropriate speeds, braking in good time, and steering correctly. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers in time, clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou switch on the turn signals. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. RESP® is switched off. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic situations or road users. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you: Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction. a turn signal. Rclearly brake or accelerate. A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ruse Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist Driving systems Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 343). Symbol : appears in the instrument cluster. If your speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, symbol : is shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Driving and parking X 327 Z 328 Useful information ............................ Important safety notes .................... Displays and operation .................... Menus and submenus ...................... Display messages ............................. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 330 330 330 333 346 378 On-board computer and displays 329 330 Displays and operation Useful information On-board computer and displays i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Important safety notes You will find an illustration of the instrument cluster in the "At a glance" section (Y page 33). G WARNING A driver's attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. G WARNING No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative. As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such as Rspeed Routside temperature Rwarning/indicator lamps Rmalfunction/warning messages of any systems Driving characteristics may be impaired. If you must continue to drive, do so with added caution. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible. Rfailure G WARNING Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems. They do not replace the owner's and/or driver's responsibility to maintain the vehicle's operating safety. Have all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages. Displays and operation Coolant temperature display G WARNING Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). Displays and operation 331 display message is shown. If the coolant temperature rises above 248 ‡(120 †), do not drive any further as this could damage the engine. Tachometer The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 332). : Multifunction display ; ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits phone book/redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume or operates the RACETIMER in AMG vehicles 8 Mute = ? Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions ? %Press briefly: Back Switches off the Voice Control System Hides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used G WARNING The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Operating the on-board computer The on-board computer is activated as soon as you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. %Press and hold: Calls up the standard display in the Trip menu Z On-board computer and displays ! If the coolant temperature is too high a 332 Displays and operation On-board computer and displays A =; Selects a menu 9:Press briefly: Selects a function or scrolls through lists In the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene In the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or a telephone number 9:Press and hold: In the Audio menu: selects a station from the alphabetical list of stations, starts station search or starts rapid scrolling through an audio/video disc In the Telephone menu: starts rapid scrolling through the phone book a Confirms selections and display messages In the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and starts dialing In the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station Multifunction display Values and settings as well as display messages are shown in the multifunction display. : Menu bar ; Description field Menus and submenus 333 Menus and submenus Menu overview On-board computer and displays The number of menus shown depends on the optional equipment in the vehicle. Function : Trip menu (Y page 334) ; Navi menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 335) = Audio menu (Y page 336) ? AMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 337) A Telephone menu (Y page 340) B DriveAssist menu (Y page 341) C Service menu (Y page 343) Rcalls up display messages (Y page 346) Rchecks the tire pressure electronically (Y page 449) Rcalls up the service due date (Y page 413) Roil level check (Y page 409) D Settings menu (Y page 343) Z Menus and submenus 334 Trip menu On-board computer and displays Standard display Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From Reset. R999 Displaying the range and current fuel consumption X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with odometer : and trip odometer ; is shown. Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, while the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 335). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From Start or From Reset. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Range. The current fuel consumption15 and the approximate range are displayed. The approximate range that can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refueled C instead of the range. Digital speedometer X Trip computer "From start" (example) : Distance ; Time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption The From Start trip computer is reset automatically if: 15 Not AMG vehicles. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select the digital speedometer. Menus and submenus 335 On-board computer and displays Route guidance inactive : Digital speedometer Resetting values You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip odometer computer "From start" RTrip computer "From reset" X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press a. RTrip : Direction of travel ; Current road Route guidance active No change of direction announced : Distance to the destination ; Symbol for "follow the road's course" = Distance to the next change of direction ? Current road Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation Resetting the trip odometer (example) X Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. Navigation menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. Further information (Y page 135). X Activate COMAND (Y page 123). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Symbol for change of direction = Distance to change of direction and visual distance display When a change of direction has been announced, you will see visual distance Z 336 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays display = next to the symbol for the change of direction ;. This decreases in size as you approach the announced change of direction. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation Lane recommendations are only displayed if the relevant data is available on the digital map. Other status indicators of the navigation system : you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. RNew route......: COMAND is calculating the new route. RDirection of Dest. Off map or Direction of Dest. Off mapped road: the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (off-map position). RDirection of Dest. No Route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination. RO Audio menu : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Symbol for change of direction = Distance to change of direction and visual distance display ? Lane recommendation On multiple-lane roads, COMAND can provide lane recommendation ? for the next change of direction. Lanes may be added during a change of direction. : Uninterrupted lane ; New lane during a change of direction = Lane recommended for the change of direction Selecting a radio station i SIRIUS XM satellite radio acts like a normal radio. For more information on satellite radio operation, see the separate operating instructions. X Switch on COMAND and select Radio (Y page 195). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. : Memory slot (only if the station is stored) ; Station = Waveband X To select a stored station: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the : or 9 button. X To select a station using station search16: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X Press a to stop the station search function at the desired station. Operating audio player or audio media If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and name of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). Video DVD operation X Switch on COMAND and select Video DVD (Y page 224). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. X Switch on COMAND and select the audio device or audio medium (Y page 204). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. : Current scene ; Medium (disc number only for DVD changer) X CD player display (example) : Current track To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired scene has been reached. ; Medium (disc number only for DVD changer) X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired track has been reached. AMG menu in AMG vehicles AMG displays X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio devices or media support this function. 16 Only if no station list is received. Z 337 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus 338 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays When RACETIMER is displayed, you cannot adjust the volume using the W and X buttons on the steering wheel. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. : Gear indicator ; Upshift indicator = Engine oil temperature ? Coolant temperature Upshift indicator UP ; indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program. Upshift indicator UP ; fades out other messages until you have shifted up. When the engine oil temperature is below 80 †, the oil temperature is shown in blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time. i CL 63 AMG: additionally, the status of the ECO start/stop function (Y page 270) will be displayed. RACETIMER Displaying and starting RACETIMER G WARNING The RACETIMER feature is only for use on roads and in conditions where high speed driving is permitted. Racing on public roads is prohibited under all circumstances. The driver is and must always remain responsible for following posted speed limits. You can use the RACETIMER to store lap times. : Gear indicator ; Seconds indicator = RACETIMER ? Lap You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To start: press the W button to start the RACETIMER. X To display the intermediate time: press the X button to show the intermediate time. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X To stop: press the W button to stop the RACETIMER. The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then press the W button, timing is continued. Storing the lap time and starting a new lap It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. Menus and submenus 339 Press the X button on the steering wheel to show the intermediate time during timing. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X Press the X button again within five seconds. The displayed intermediate time is stored as a lap time. Timing starts for a new lap. The new lap is timed from when the intermediate time is called up. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Overall evaluation This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown. : Gear indicator ; RACETIMER = Fastest lap time (best lap) Resetting the current lap X Press the W button on the steering wheel to stop the RACETIMER. X Press X to reset the lap time to "0”. Deleting all laps You cannot delete individual stored laps. X Press the W button on the steering wheel to stop the RACETIMER. X Press and hold the X button for a minimum of three seconds. X Press the W button to start the RACETIMER. All laps are deleted. : RACETIMER overall evaluation ; Total time driven = Top speed ? Distance covered A Average speed or X Press the W button on the steering wheel to stop the RACETIMER. X Press the a button. Reset Race Timer appears in the multifunction display. Z On-board computer and displays X Menus and submenus 340 On-board computer and displays Lap evaluation This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. X Switch on the mobile phone and COMAND (Y page 123). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RTelephone Ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RNo Service: no network is available, or the mobile phone is searching for a network. : Lap ; Lap time = Top speed during lap ? Lap length A Average lap speed X Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Telephone menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display, for example: Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. Telephone menu Introduction You can establish a Bluetooth® connection to COMAND (Y page 179). G WARNING A driver's attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the handsfree device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit. X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can still accept a call. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel. If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can still reject or end a call. Menus and submenus You can use the mobile phone to enter new telephone numbers into the phone book (see COMAND) (Y page 187). If your mobile phone is operational, you can select and dial a number from the phone book at any time. When you establish a Bluetooth® connection to COMAND, COMAND reads in the phone book of the mobile phone. This can take some time. While the on-board computer reads in the SIM card: Ryou can dial a telephone number from the redial list (Calls dialed list). Ryou can dial a telephone number from the telephone book stored in COMAND. Rthe multifunction display shows the Reading data... display message below the phone book entries. When the multifunction display shows the Updating data... display message, COMAND has finished importing data. The multifunction display then shows all the phone book entries in COMAND and the mobile phone. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to call up the phone book. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. To scroll rapidly, press and hold the : or 9 button for longer than one second. After skipping eight entries, the rapid scroll speeds up. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If you do not want to make a call: press the ~ or % button. Redialing The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory (Calls Dialed list). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. To scroll rapidly, press and hold the : or 9 button for longer than one second. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If you do not want to make a call: press the ~ or % button. Assistance menu Showing the distance display This function is only available with DISTRONIC PLUS. Z On-board computer and displays Dialing a number from the phone book 341 Menus and submenus 342 On-board computer and displays X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Distance Display. X Press a. The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display (Y page 299) appears in the multifunction display. Deactivating/activating ESP® If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å ESP® OFF warning lamp remain lit, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. When ESP® is deactivated or not operational, vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers is reduced. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP®. X G WARNING Under no circumstances should you deactivate ESP® when the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. Proceed as follows: Rwhen driving off, apply as little throttle as possible. Rwhile driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal. Radapt your speed to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid. ESP® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed. For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 64). X Start the engine. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ESP. X Press the a button. X To deactivate: press a again. The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. G WARNING When the å ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit, ESP® is deactivated. To activate: press a again. The å warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press 9 or : to select PRE-SAFE Brake. X Press a. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 66) is activated, the multifunction display shows the Ä symbol as long as the HOLD function is not activated (Y page 302). Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Assist. X Press a. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. Menus and submenus Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist You can use the Blind Spot Assist function to activate or deactivate Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 321). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press 9 or : to select Blind Spot Assist. X Press a. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist You can use the Lane Keeping Assist function to activate or deactivate Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 324). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Lane Keeping Assist. X Press a. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. If Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the à symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. Service menu In the Service menu you can: Rcall up display messages (Y page 346) Rcheck the tire pressure electronically (Y page 449) Rcall up the service due date (Y page 413) the oil level (Y page 409) Rcheck Settings menu Introduction The Settings menu can be used for: Rswitching the daytime running lamps on/ off Rswitching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ off Rshowing or hiding the additional speedometer Rselecting the units for speed and distance Ractivating/deactivating the radar sensor system Switching the daytime running lamps on/off This function is not available in Canada. If you have activated the Daytime Running Light function and the light switch is in the $ or c position, the daytime running lamps are switched on automatically when the engine is running. In the dark, the following also light up: Rthe parking lamps tail lamps Rthe license plate lamp Rthe side marker lamps If you turn the light switch to a different position, the corresponding lights are switched on. If you switch off the daytime running lamps at night, make sure that the light switch is set to L or c. The factory setting is On. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Day Running Lights. Rthe Z On-board computer and displays When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 316) is activated, the À symbol appears in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. 343 Menus and submenus 344 X On-board computer and displays Press the a button to confirm. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select Adapt. High-beam Asst.. X Press the a button to confirm. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. Switching the additional speedometer on or off An additional digital speedometer can be shown in the multifunction display. Vehicles with a kilometer speedometer: the digital speedometer has mph units. Vehicles with a miles speedometer: the digital speedometer has km/h units. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press 9 or : to select Add. Speedometer. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the a button to save the setting. Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rthe analog speedometer digital speedometer in the Trip menu Rthe odometer and the trip odometer Rthe trip computer Rthe Rthe navigation instruction in the Navi menu RDISTRONIC PLUS PLUS service interval display The digital speedometer shows alternative speed units (Y page 344). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Units. X Press the a button to confirm. X Press the a button to save the setting. The unit switches between km/h and mph. RASSYST Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal If you activate the Acoustic Lock Feedb. function, an audible signal sounds depending on the vehicle's date of manufacture: Rwhen locking or Ronce when unlocking and three times when locking X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Acoustic Lock Feedb. X Press the a button to confirm. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated: PLUS (Y page 292) PLUS (Y page 62) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 66) RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 321) RDISTRONIC RBAS Menus and submenus 345 i USA only: This device has been approved On-board computer and displays by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press 9 or : to select Radar sensors. X Press the a button to confirm. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. Z Display messages 346 Display messages On-board computer and displays General notes G WARNING All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Failure to repair the condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury. Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function (Y page 302) and parking (Y page 283). Hiding display messages You can hide some display messages with a low priority. X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. Display messages with a low priority are shown in either yellow or white. Display messages with a high priority are shown in red. You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up the display messages in the message memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows, for example, 2 messages. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. X Confirm with a. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. Display messages 347 Safety systems !÷ Currently Unavailable See Oper. Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 348 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages !÷ Inoperative See Oper. Manual ÷ Currently Unavailable See Oper. Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. The $ (USA only)/ J (Canada only), ÷, å and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident If the display message is shown and the ÷ warning lamp flashes at the same time, the Electronic Traction System is deactivated. Otherwise, the brakes on the drive wheels could overheat. X Let the brakes cool down until the display message disappears and the ÷ warning lamp goes out. The Electronic Traction System is activated again. Display messages ÷ Inoperative See Oper. Manual å System Inoperative T! ÷ Inoperative See Oper. Manual # Check Brake Pad Wear Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRESAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 349 On-board computer and displays 350 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions F(USA only)!(Canada The red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake. or X Pull away carefully (Y page 284). only) Please Release Parking Brake The red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (Y page 284). X After the emergency stop: release the electric parking brake lever. The red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes, the yellow F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) warning lamp lights up and a warning tone sounds. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning and the braking effect is restricted. While the vehicle is in motion: X Release the electric parking brake handle. While the vehicle is stationary: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Shift the transmission to P. Use the folding wheel chock (Y page 426) from the vehicle tool kit to secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions F(USA only)!(Canada The yellow F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) warning lamp lights up. Additionally, the red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp may light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: only) Parking Brake See Oper. Manual X Pull the electric parking brake handle. or X X Pull away carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. To apply: X X Switch off the ignition. Pull the electric parking brake lever for at least ten seconds, until the display message disappears. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Shift the transmission to P. Use the folding wheel chock (Y page 426) from the vehicle tool kit to secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. The power supply for the electric parking brake was interrupted. X Pull the electric parking brake handle. or X Pull away carefully. or X Pull the electric parking brake handle until the display message disappears. The red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. or X X Pull away carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 351 On-board computer and displays Display messages 352 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for approximately 10 seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. X Pull away carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If there is overvoltage or undervoltage: X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Switch the ignition off and on, and then engage or release the electric parking brake. If this does not release the electric parking brake: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for approximately 10 seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake has overheated. X Allow the vehicle to cool down. Do not engage or release the electric parking brake during this time. X Use the folding wheel chock (Y page 426) from the vehicle tool kit to secure the vehicle against rolling away. X When the vehicle has cooled down: switch the ignition off and on again, then engage or release the electric parking brake. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions F(USA only)!(Canada The yellow F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for approximately 10 seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch the ignition off and on, and then engage the electric parking brake. only) Parking Brake Inoperative If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X Shift the transmission to P. X Use the folding wheel chock (Y page 426) from the vehicle tool kit to secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. F(USA only)!(Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake $(USA only)J(Canada only) Service See Oper. Manual $(USA only)J(Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level The red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. There is a malfunction in the system. The brake system continues to operate normally. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Additionally, the red $ (USA only)/ J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Engage the electric parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This will not rectify the malfunction. Z 353 On-board computer and displays Display messages 354 Display messages On-board computer and displays G WARNING Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G USA only: one or more of the main functions in the mbrace system are malfunctioning. Canada only: one or more of the main functions of the TELEAID system are malfunctioning. X USA only: have the mbrace system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Canada only: have the TELEAID system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Tele Aid Inoperative PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Oper. Manual G Risk of injury Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages PRE-SAFE Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative if: Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grill is dirty. sensors in the bumpers are dirty. Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rthe Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the sensors are fully available again. Rthe system is within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be displayed: Rthe X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grill (Y page 418). X Clean the bumpers (Y page 418). X Restart the engine. X Wait until the battery is sufficiently charged. PRE-SAFE Function Limited See Oper. Manual 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required G Risk of accident PRE-SAFE® Brake is defective. BAS PLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of injury There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 355 356 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 G Risk of injury 6 G Risk of injury 6 G Risk of injury SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 Front Left SRS warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Malfunction Service Required or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Front Right SRS Malfunction Service Required SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 Rear Left SRS warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Malfunction Service Required or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Rear Right SRS Malfunction Service Required There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand window Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the Service Required or instrument cluster. Right Side Curtain X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Airbag Malfunction Service Required G WARNING In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Oper. Manual The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even though: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied. The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Engage the parking brake. X Switch off the ignition. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X If necessary, secure the child in a child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. Observe the 42(Y page 46) indicator lamp and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe 42 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Y page 46) has deactivated the front-passenger air bag. Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Oper. Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper. Manual display messages must not appear in the multifunction display. Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed and to make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 357 On-board computer and displays Display messages 358 Display messages On-board computer and displays G WARNING If the 42 indicator lamp remains off even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the frontpassenger seat until the system has been repaired. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper. Manual The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey even though an adult or a person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Engage the parking brake. X Switch off the ignition. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. Observe the 42(Y page 46) indicator lamp and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe 42 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Y page 46) has deactivated the front-passenger air bag. Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Oper. Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper. Manual display messages must not appear in the multifunction display. Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed and to make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the 42 indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. G WARNING If the 42 indicator lamp remains lit with an adult occupant on the front-passenger seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the frontpassenger seat until the system has been repaired. Display messages 359 Lights This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Cornering Light or Check Right Cornering Light b Check Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam b Check Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn Signal b Check Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn Signal b Check Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays i Display messages about LEDs: On-board computer and displays 360 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Center Brake Lamp The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself Check Left Tail (Y page 250). and Brake Lamp or Check Right or Tail and Brake Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b b Check Left High Beam or Check Right High Beam b Check Plate Right Plate Left License Lamp or Check License Lamp b Check Left Fog Lamp or Check Right Fog Lamp The left or right-hand high beam is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left-hand or right-hand rear fog lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself Check Rear Left (Y page 250). Fog Lamp or Check or Rear Right Fog Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b b Check Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking Lamp The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Reverse Lamp or Check Right Reverse Lamp b Check Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp b Check Rear Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Rear Right Sidemarker Lamp b Check Left Daytime Running Light or Check Right Daytime Running Light b Active Headlamps Inoperative b Malfunction See Oper. Manual b AUTO Lamp Function Inoperative The left or right front side marker lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself (Y page 250). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The active light function is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The light sensor is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. USA only: X Switch off the daytime running lamps in the on-board computer (Y page 343). X Switch the lights on and off using the light switch. Z 361 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 362 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to $ or c. or X If the rear fog lamp is switched on: press the light switch in to the stop. Please Switch Off Lights Adaptive High-beam Assist inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. X Add coolant, observing the warning notes when doing so (Y page 411). X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Check Coolant Level See Oper. Manual G WARNING Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned. ! The coolant level is too low. Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. The display messages and the corresponding symbol that indicate that the coolant level is too low must not be ignored. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant is too hot. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Coolant Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off The poly-V-belt may have torn. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Open the hood. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. ! If the coolant temperature exceeds 248 ‡(120 †) do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Z 363 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 364 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The engine fan is defective. X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 † ), drive to the next qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. # The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Open the hood. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. Ra If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 4 Check Engine Oil at Next Refueling Vehicles with an oil dipstick: the oil level has dropped to the minimum level. X Check the engine oil level at the latest when next refueling (Y page 409). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 410). X If engine oil needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles without an oil dipstick: the engine oil level is too low. X Check the oil level (Y page 409). Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 409). X If engine oil needs to be added more often than usual, have the (USA only)Check engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level (Add 1 Liter) (Canada only) 4 Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). Display messages 365 engine damage. The display messages and the corresponding symbol that indicate that the oil level is too low must not be ignored. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 Vehicles without an oil dipstick: the engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Add engine oil (Y page 410) and check the oil level (Y page 409). Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off 4 Engine Oil Level Too High 4 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured 8 Reserve Fuel Vehicles without an oil dipstick: you have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. X Have the excess oil siphoned off at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the legal requirements. Vehicles without an oil dipstick: the measuring system is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. 8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. Gas Cap Loose If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays ! The oil level is too low. Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. There is a risk of 366 Display messages On-board computer and displays Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on specific criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has determined that the driver is tired or paying less attention. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. Attention Assist: Pause! During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. À Attention Assist Inoperative Á Night View Assist Inoperative Á Night View Assist Currently Unavailable Á Night View Assist Lights Must Be Set to AUTO or ON Á Night View Assist Not In Reverse Gear Á Night View Assist Lights ON or AUTO, Not in R Gear ATTENTION ASSIST has failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Night View Assist Plus is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The temperature of the camera is too high. X Wait until you see the Night View Assist Available Again display message. You can also: X Fold the camera cover down (Y page 419). X Adjust the air distribution of the automatic air conditioning upwards. A condition for activating Night View Assist Plus has not been fulfilled. X Turn the light switch to c or L. A condition for activating Night View Assist Plus has not been fulfilled. X Shift the transmission to P, N or D. A condition for activating Night View Assist Plus has not been fulfilled. X Turn the light switch to c or L. X Shift the transmission to P, N or D. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Á You have attempted to activate Night View Assist Plus in the daytime. Night View Assist Plus can only be activated when it is dark. Night View Assist Only When It Is Dark ¨ Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. Vehicle Rising The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds. Vehicle Rising X Do not pull away. Please Wait Briefly The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears. ¨ ¨ STOP Car Too Low You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low. AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. G Risk of accident AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehicle. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ¨ Malfunction G Risk of accident The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 367 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 368 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ABC Malfunction Stop Vehicle The ABC (Active Body Control) vehicle level is too low. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the display message disappears. The vehicle is leaking oil. The display message is shown continuously. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. The display message is shown continuously. ABC is malfunctioning. X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The ABC vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. ABC Vehicle Rising X Do not pull away. Please Wait Briefly The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears. ABC Malfunction The ABC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. HOLD Off The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 302). The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 302). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Radar Sensors Deactivated See Oper. Manual The radar sensor system is deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 344). Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Oper. Manual Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative if: Rthe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, for example by dirt or snow. Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rvisibility Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. Rthe system recognizes that the camera is fully operational again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Clean the windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable, See Oper. Manual Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative if: Rthe sensors are dirty. Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again. Rthe radar sensor system is back within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Clean the sensors (Y page 418). Restart the engine. Z 369 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 370 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative Active Blind Spot Assist is defective. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Guidance Inoperative Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 310). X Restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Guidance Canceled Parking Guidance has been deactivated because: Rthe vehicle is skidding. sensors are dirty. Ra malfunction has occurred. X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 310). Rthe If the parking space symbol is not displayed in the multifunction display when you are driving at a speed of less than 19 mph (30 km/h): X Clean the sensors (Y page 418). X Restart the engine. If the parking space symbol is still not displayed in the multifunction display when you are driving at a speed of less than 19 mph (30 km/h): X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer following the recommended path. X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages in the multifunction display. Parking Guidance Finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 292). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS Available Again DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 292). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and is temporarily inoperative if: Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grill is dirty. function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again and the display message disappears if: Rits Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion. system detects that the sensors are fully available again. Rthe system is within the operating temperature range. If the display message continues to be displayed: Rthe X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grill (Y page 418). X Clean the bumpers (Y page 418). X Restart the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake may be inoperative as well. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS Override You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS --- mph An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 292). Z 371 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 372 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise Control Inoperative Cruise control is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control --- mph A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. You attempted to save a speed of less than 20 mph (30 km/h). X If the situation allows, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and save the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 290). Tires G WARNING Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. G WARNING Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire pressures Displayed After Driving A Few Minutes The tire pressure monitor is measuring the tire pressure. X Drive on. The tire pressures appear in the multifunction display after you have been driving for a few minutes. Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Display messages Check Tires Caution Tire Defect Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Correct the tire pressure (Y page 449). X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 465). G Risk of accident The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 465). Tire Pressure Please Rectify The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary, correct the tire pressure (Y page 449). X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 451). Wheel sensor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the defective tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire Pressure Monitor Currently Unavailable Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved. h Tire Press. Warning Caution Tire Malfunction G Risk of accident The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 465). Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 373 374 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages h Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 465). X Check the tire pressure. If necessary, correct the tire pressure (Y page 449). h Correct Tire Pressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary, correct the tire pressure (Y page 449). Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to P or N to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (White display message) The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (Red display message) The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is discharged. If there is a malfunction in the vehicle's electrical system, you may not be able to change the transmission position. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N Door Open Vehicle Not in Park or D. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Apply the electric parking brake. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Service Required Do Not Shift Gears You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Only Shift to Position P When Vehicle Is Stationary The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. N The trunk lid is open. X Close the trunk lid. M G Risk of accident The hood is open. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Close the hood. C At least one door is open. X Close all the doors. _ The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. The seat belt will have no effect. X Push the backrest back until it engages. Lock Seat Backrest Front LeftorLock Seat Backrest Front Right Z 375 On-board computer and displays Display messages 376 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages D Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident Power Steering Malfunction See Oper. Manual The power steering is malfunctioning. You will need to use more force to steer. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 412). Check Washer Fluid SmartKey Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey. Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle  Take Your Key From Ignition  Obtain a New Key  Replace Key Battery  Don't Forget Your Key The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. X Remove the SmartKey. The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 76). The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and is only a reminder. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock. X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you leave the vehicle. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Engage the electric parking brake. X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. Key Not Detected (Red display message) The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Engage the electric parking brake. X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.  Key Not Detected (White display message) The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: X  Key Detected In Vehicle  Remove 'Start' Button and Insert Key  Close Doors to Lock Vehicle Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again. Z 377 On-board computer and displays Display messages 378 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Seat belt Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 7 The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. After starting the engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 51). belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds. 7 G Risk of injury After starting the The driver's seat belt is not fastened. engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 51). The warning tone ceases. up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds. 7 G Risk of injury The red seat belt The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 51). The warning lamp goes out. as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger G Risk of injury door is closed. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 7 The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of injury The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. In addition, you are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have briefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 51). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. G Risk of injury There are objects on the front-passenger seat. In addition, you are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have briefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Safety systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $ (USA only) G Risk of accident J (Canada only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. The red brake system X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying warning lamp comes on attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving while the engine is under any circumstances. running. A warning tone X Engage the electric parking brake. also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Do not add brake fluid. This will not rectify the malfunction. G WARNING Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. Z On-board computer and displays Problem 379 380 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! G Risk of accident The yellow ABS warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. lamp is lit while the BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability engine is running. Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! G Risk of accident The yellow ABS warning ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD lamp is lit while the (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®, engine is running. PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example. Self diagnosis is not yet complete or the on-board voltage may be insufficient, for example. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. $ (USA only) J (Canada only) ÷å! The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ÷ The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident EBD is faulty. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are also unavailable, for example. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS and ESP® are faulty. Other systems, e.g. BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, are also not available due to a malfunction. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. Exceptions: (Y page 64). Z On-board computer and displays Problem 381 382 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem On-board computer and displays å Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident The yellow ESP® OFF ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts warning lamp is lit while to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. the engine is running. X Reactivate ESP®. Exceptions: (Y page 64). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G Risk of accident ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. Self diagnosis is not yet complete. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. F (USA only) The electric parking brake is temporarily malfunctioning or defective. ! (Canada only) The red indicator lamp X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. for the electric parking brake flashes and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights up. 6 The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. G Risk of injury The restraint systems are malfunctioning. The air bags or ETDs may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, not be triggered at all. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. G WARNING In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. Z On-board computer and displays Problem 383 On-board computer and displays 384 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Rin i In some states, you are required by law to immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state/province in which you are currently driving. The yellow reserve fuel The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed warning lamp flashes correctly or the fuel system is leaking. while the vehicle is in X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction motion. display. In addition, the ; X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. yellow Check Engine X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler warning lamp may light cap. up. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow reserve fuel The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. warning lamp lights up X Refuel at the nearest gas station. while the engine is running. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 385 Driving systems Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · G Risk of accident The red distance The warning is issued if you approach a stationary vehicle or a warning lamp lights up vehicle driving ahead of you at too high a speed. while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to also sounds. brake or take evasive action. More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 292) and PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 66). Tires Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h G Risk of accident USA only: The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires. monitor warning lamp X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking (pressure loss/ maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. malfunction) is lit. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction Canada only: display. The yellow tire pressure X Check the tire pressure. If necessary, correct the tire pressure monitor warning lamp (Y page 449). (pressure loss) is lit. X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 465). h The tire pressure monitor is faulty. USA only: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for 60 seconds and then remains lit. G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or, if available, the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated Z On-board computer and displays Problem On-board computer and displays 386 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. USA only: Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. 387 388 388 388 391 Stowing and features Useful information ............................ Loading guidelines ............................ Stowage areas .................................. Features ............................................. 388 Stowage areas Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all Stowing and features models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Loading guidelines G WARNING Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. Use cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backrests. The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. Never drive a vehicle with the trunk open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the driver's door frame. Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the trunk as possible. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. Ralways place the load against the rear seat backrests. Ralways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie down. pad sharp edges for protection. Stowage areas Stowage compartments Important safety notes G WARNING To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backrests. Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during Rbraking Rvehicle Ran maneuvers accident Stowage compartments in the front Glove box i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, you will find the following installed in the glove box: an audio and video AUX jack, a USB socket or Media Interface, a universal interface for portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod or USB device, and a bracket for Stowage areas i The glove box can be ventilated (Y page 263). X X To open: press button :. To close: fold the glove box flap upwards until it engages. The glove box can only be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key. X To open: press marking :. Stowage compartment under the armrest i The º Roadside Assistance call button and (Y page 397) and the E MB Info call button are located (Y page 398) in the stowage compartment under the armrest. X To open the stowage compartment: press button : and fold the armrest in the direction of arrow : to the left or right. X To open the stowage compartment: press button ; and fold up the armrest in the direction of arrow ;. Stowage compartments in the rear 1 Glove box unlocked Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit or lean your bodyweight on the armrests when they are folded out as you could damage them. 2 Glove box locked ! Close the cover of the stowage Eyeglasses compartment compartment before folding the rear seat armrest back into the seat backrest. Z Stowing and features a remote control (see the COMAND section in this Operator's Manual). 389 Stowage areas 390 X To open: fold down the seat armrest. X Pull handle : and fold the armrests upwards. Stowage box between the rear seats thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants. Storage bags cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident. Storage bags are located in the rear compartment on the driver's and frontpassenger seat backrests. Stowing and features Parcel nets G WARNING X To open: pull handle : backwards in the direction of the arrow. Stowage box in the rear seat backrest ! Do not sit or lean your bodyweight on the armrests when they are folded out as you could damage them. Parcel nets are intended for storing lightweight items only, such as road maps, mail, etc. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or fragile objects may not be transported in the parcel nets. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants. Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident. Parcel nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the right-hand side of the trunk. Securing cargo Cargo tie-down rings X X To open: fold down the rear seat armrest. Pull handle : and fold down cover ;. Stowage pockets G WARNING Storage bags are intended for storing lightweight items only. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the storage bag. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be Observe the following notes on securing loads: Rsecure the load using the cargo tie down rings. Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. Rdo not route tie downs across sharp edges or corners. Rpad sharp edges for protection. There are four cargo tie down rings in the trunk. Features X 391 Attach trunk floor cover = to the upper edge of the trunk with hooks ;. Features Cup holders Important safety notes Bag hooks ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 6.6 lbs (3 kg). Do not use it to secure a load. X Pull bag hook ; down by tab :. Stowage well under the trunk floor In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Cup holder in the front-compartment center console You can remove the cup holder to clean it. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only. : Stowage well ; Hook = Trunk floor cover Z Stowing and features G WARNING Features 392 Sun visors Overview of sun visors G WARNING Stowing and features Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors closed while the vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others. X To open: press marking :. To remove: pull the cup holder upwards in the direction of the arrow by silver handle ;. X To insert: press down until it engages. Observe the installation position indicated by "Front". X Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. : Mirror light ; Bracket = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Glare from the side X Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X X Fold down the rear seat armrest. To open: press the front of cup holder :. Cup holder : extends automatically. X To close: slide the cup holder back until it engages. X Features Rear window roller sunblind Important safety notes 393 At temperatures below Ò20 †, the window blind cannot be operated. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The children could: Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with vehicle equipment that can be operated even if the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function If children open a door, they could injure other persons or get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts. Rbe X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To extend or retract: briefly press button :. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts. X To stop: briefly press button : again. The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves back into the out-of-use position. Ashtray Ashtray in the front-compartment center console G WARNING When adjusting a roller sunblind, the roller blind moves up or down. You might become trapped in the process. In the event of danger, briefly press the button for the roller sunblind to change the roller blind's direction of movement. Extending/retracting the roller sunblind ! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged. X To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X To remove the insert: push sliding knob ? in the housing of the ashtray to the left. Ashtray insert = slides out slightly. X Lift insert = up ; and out. Z Stowing and features G WARNING Features 394 X To re-install the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X To close: press cover : briefly at the front. The cover moves back. Cigarette lighter Stowing and features G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The children could: Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with vehicle equipment that can be operated even if the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function If children open a door, they could injure other persons or get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts. Rbe G WARNING Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only. Make sure any children traveling with you do not injure themselves or start a fire with the hot cigarette lighter. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: press cover : briefly at the front. The cover moves back. 12 V sockets Points to observe before use The sockets can be used for accessories, e.g. lamps or mobile phone chargers with a maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A). If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Features Socket in the glove box 395 If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone assistance services: RUSA: X X Open the glove box (Y page 388). Lift up the cover of socket :. Socket in the trunk Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by post. You can use this password to log in to the mbrace section under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com17. The mbrace system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational. corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center. Ra service subscription is available. Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe i Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if there is sufficient GPS reception and the vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Center. X Lift up the cover of socket :. mbrace Important safety notes ! A license agreement must exist in order to activate the mbrace service. Ensure that your system is activated and ready for use, and press the E MB Info call button to register. If any of the steps mentioned is not carried out, the system may not be activated. 17 USA The mbrace system The mbrace system provides different services, e.g.: Rautomatic and manual emergency call Assistance call RMB Info call To adjust the volume during an mbrace call, proceed as follows: RRoadside X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Use the H volume controller of COMAND (Y page 109). only. Z Stowing and features Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center under 1-888-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 396 Features You can find further information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com18. System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. Stowing and features G WARNING A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following conditions occurs: Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not light up during the system selfdiagnosis. Rthe indicator lamp in the º Roadside Assistance button does not light up during the system self-diagnosis. RThe indicator lamp in the E information button does not light up during selfdiagnosis of the system. Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button, º Roadside Assistance button or E information button continues to be lit red after the system self-diagnosis. RThe Tele Aid Inoperative or Tele Aid Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system selftest. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, assistance must be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: Response Center under 888-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 18 USA only. Emergency call Important safety notes ! A license agreement must exist in order to activate the mbrace service. Ensure that your system is activated and ready for use, and press the E MB Info call button to register. If any of the steps mentioned is not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center under 1-888-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. i An mbrace emergency call that has been initiated automatically cannot be terminated by the customer. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. The COMAND display shows the Emergency Call Activated message. The audio output is muted. Once a connection has been established, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. The COMAND display shows the Emergency Call Activated message. Features All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: 397 Making an emergency call Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) Rvehicle identification number Rinformation on the type of emergency i If the Emergency Call Activated Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. If the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. i If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. G WARNING If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established, then the mbrace system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call Failed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds. Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means. i During an emergency call, the Bluetooth® connection on the phone is canceled automatically. After making the emergency call, the connection is automatically re-established. X To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open it. X Press SOS button ; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. X After the emergency call is ended, close cover :. G WARNING If you feel in any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the SOS button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle's approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants. Roadside Assistance button X Open the stowage compartment under the armrest (Y page 389). Z Stowing and features message appears in the COMAND display, you cannot use other COMAND functions. Features 398 for services such as repair work and/or towing. Further details are available in your mbrace manual. i The mbrace system failed to initiate a Roadside Assistance call if: Stowing and features Rthe X Press and hold Roadside Assistance button : for more than two seconds. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : flashes while the call is active. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display and the COMAND display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be established, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display and in the COMAND display. If a cellular phone network is available and there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center was established. This may be because the corresponding mobile phone network is not available. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. The COMAND display shows the Call could not be connected! message. Press W to confirm the message. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on the COMAND telephone keypad. MB Info call button X Open the stowage compartment under the armrest (Y page 389). X Press and hold MB Info call button : for more than two seconds. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while i The multifunction display and COMAND display show that an mbrace call is active. You can change to the navigation menu by pressing the S button during the call, for example. Voice output is not available. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. X Describe the type of assistance needed. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified MercedesBenz technician or organizes for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged Features If a connection can be established, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. The COMAND display shows the Information Call Activated message. If a cellular phone network is available and there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent Rvehicle location of the vehicle identification number i The COMAND display shows that an mbrace call is active. You can change to the navigation menu by pressing the S button during the call, for example. Voice output is not available. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You can obtain information on how to operate your vehicle's systems, on the location of the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, and on further products and services offered by Mercedes-Benz USA. Further details on the mbrace system can be found under http://www.mbusa.com19. Log in under "Owners Online". i The mbrace system failed to initiate an MB Info call if: Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button : is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center was established. This may be because the corresponding mobile phone network is not available. 19 USA The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. The COMAND display shows the Call could not be connected! message. Press W to confirm the message. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on the COMAND telephone keypad. Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel or the corresponding button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND telephone keypad. Downloading destinations in COMAND i The components and operating principles of COMAND can be found on (Y page 108). i You can only use the Destination Download function if the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. Destination Download gives you access to a database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs)/important destinations that can be downloaded onto the navigation system of your vehicle. If you know the destination, you can download the address or obtain the location of points of interest only. Z Stowing and features the connection is being established. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The COMAND display shows the Information Call Activated message. The audio output is muted. 399 400 Features (POIs)/important destinations in the surrounding area. You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered. X Slide XVY and turn cVd the COMAND controller to select Yes and confirm by pressing W. Stowing and features The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. i If you select No, the address can be stored in the address book. i The Destination Download function is available if the corresponding mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible. Route Assistance This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately. i You can also use the Route Assistance function if your vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system. Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle. The customer service representative determines a suitable driving route based on your current vehicle position and the desired destination and guides you live through the current sections of the route. Search & Send Points to observe before use i To use Search & Send, your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. You must also have an mbrace service subscription. "Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination which is determined by Google Maps® or Yahoo Local Maps® can be forwarded directly to your vehicle's navigation system using TELEAID. Specifying and sending the destination address i Information about specific commands such as address entry or sending an address can be found on (either of) the website(s). Each website works differently and is subject to change. X Go to either http:// www.maps.google.com or http:// www.maps.yahoo.com and enter a destination address in the entry field. X Press the relevant button on the website to send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account. X When the "Send" dialog window appears: In the relevant field, enter the e-mail address which you specified when activating your mbrace account. X Click on "Send". Calling up destination addresses X Press the MB Info call button to load the destination address to your vehicle's navigation system. A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started. X Slide XVY and turn cVd the COMAND controller to select Yes and confirm by pressing W. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. i If you select No, the address can be stored in the address book. i If you have sent more than one destination address, you have to make an info call to load each individual address. i Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: Features Vehicle remote opening If you have unintentionally locked your vehicle (e.g. the SmartKey is still in the vehicle) and a replacement SmartKey is not available, the vehicle can be opened by a Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be opened remotely up to four days after the ignition was last switched off. X Contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center under 1-800-FORMERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 You will be asked for your password. X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. X Pull the trunk lid handle for at least 20 seconds until the indicator lamp in the SOS button (Y page 396) flashes. The Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. Alternatively, the vehicle can also be opened via the Internet or an iPhone in the "Owners Online" section using your ID number and password20. for remote unlocking, you must wait 15 minutes before you can pull the trunk lid handle again. Vehicle remote closing If you forget to lock your vehicle but are no longer in the vicinity of the vehicle, it can be locked for you by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be locked remotely up to four days after the ignition was last switched off. X Contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center under 1-800-FORMERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 You will be asked for your PIN. The next time you are in your vehicle and switch on the ignition, the Tele Aid Doors Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display. Alternatively, the vehicle can also be locked via the Internet or an iPhone in the "Owners Online" section using your ID number and password. i The vehicle valet locking feature is available when the relevant mobile phone network is available and data connection is possible. i Vehicle remote unlocking is only possible Automatic vehicle data retrieval for the service due date if the corresponding mobile phone network is accessible. The SOS button flashes and the Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display to confirm that the command for vehicle remote unlocking has been received. If you pull the trunk handle for more than 20 seconds before receiving authorization Your vehicle comes with a function which improves the servicing of the vehicle considerably. Shortly before the service due date, mbrace sends important vehicle maintenance information to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then informs your authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center of the work required. This 20 USA only. Z Stowing and features Each destination address sent can be accessed by every vehicle which is connected with the relevant e-mail address. 401 Features 402 happens automatically and does not require any action from the driver. This function allows the Mercedes-Benz Center to improve appointment planning significantly and ensures that your vehicle receives the best service possible. i The "Automatic retrieval of vehicle data Stowing and features for the service due date" function is only available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. Service for recovering a stolen vehicle If your vehicle has been stolen: X Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report. X This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then attempts to locate the mbrace system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle. i If the anti-theft alarm system is active for longer than 30 seconds, mbrace automatically informs the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. Garage door opener Important safety notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. i Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programming the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center or call one of the following telephone hotlines: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 G WARNING Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes. Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. When programming a garage door opener, park vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. i USA only: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Features 403 i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. IC: 279B-HMIHL4 Programming the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror Programming G WARNING Only press the transmitter button on the integrated garage door opener if there are no persons or objects present within the sweep of the garage door. People could otherwise be injured by the movement of the door. Integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror Garage door remote control A is not part of this integrated garage door opener. i To achieve the best result, insert new batteries in garage door remote control A before programming. X Before programming for the first time, clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener (Y page 405). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press and hold one of transmitter buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. Indicator lamp : starts to flash yellow after a short period. i Indicator lamp : flashes yellow immediately after the transmitter button has been stored for the first time. If the transmitter button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : does not flash yellow until 10 seconds have elapsed. X Release the transmitter button. Point transmitter button B of garage door remote control A towards the transmitter buttons on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm). i The distance required between garage door remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the system of the garage door drive. You might require several attempts. You should test every X Z Stowing and features 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Features 404 position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Stowing and features X Press and hold transmitter button B on garage door remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. Programming is complete if indicator lamp : lights up or flashes green. X Release transmitter button ;, = or ? on the integrated garage door opener and the transmitter button on garage door remote control B. If indicator lamp : lights up red: X Repeat the programming procedure for the transmitter button. When doing so, vary the distance between the garage door remote control and the rear-view mirror. i If the indicator lamp flashes green after successful programming, the garage door system is operating on a rolling code. After programming, you must synchronize the garage door opener integrated in the rearview mirror with the receiver of the garage door system. Synchronizing the rolling code Your vehicle must be within range of the garage or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. Observe the safety notes when performing the rolling code synchronization. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the programming button of the door or gate drive (see the door or gate drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming of additional remote controls"). i You now normally have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. X Press the previously programmed transmitter button of the HomeLink® integrated garage door opener repeatedly in succession until the door opens. The rolling code synchronization is then complete. Notes on programming the remote control Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. These signals may not therefore last long enough for the integrated garage door opener to recognize the signal during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also have a built-in "interruption". If you live in Canada or have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps (see above), proceed as follows: X Press and hold one of transmitter buttons ; to ? of the integrated garage door opener. Indicator lamp : starts to flash yellow after a short period. X Release the transmitter button. X Press transmitter button B of the garage door remote control and hold for two seconds, then release for two seconds, then press again and hold for two seconds. X Repeat this sequence on transmitter button B of the garage door remote control until indicator lamp : is green. Repeat the process if indicator lamp : turns red. X Continue with the other programming steps (see above). Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programming the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instructions: Rcheck the transmission frequency of garage door remote control A (usually Features Opening/closing the garage door Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press transmitter button ;, = or ? in the overhead control panel that you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. i The transmitter will transmit a signal for as long as the transmitter button is being pressed. After a maximum of ten seconds, transmission is terminated and indicator lamp : flashes yellow. Press the transmitter button again, if necessary. Clearing the memory of the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press transmitter buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp lights up yellow. X Press and hold transmitter buttons ; and ? until the indicator lamp turns green. i Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. Floormat on the driver's side G WARNING Whenever you are using a floormat, make sure there is enough clearance and that the floormat is securely fastened. The floormat should always be securely fastened using the fastening equipment. Before driving off, check that the floormat is securely in place and adjust it if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of each other as this may impair pedal movement. Z Stowing and features found on the reverse side of the remote control). The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that can be operated with units in a frequency range of 280 to 390 MHz. Rchange the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the probability that garage door remote control A will send a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener on the rearview mirror. Rwhen programming, hold garage door remote control A at different distances and angles from the transmitter button that you are programming. Try different angles at a distance between 2 and 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) or the same angle at varying distances. Rif another remote control for the same garage door drive is available, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control. Before you perform the steps of the operation, make sure that there are new batteries in the garage door remote control. Rnote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press the remote control button again before it stops transmitting. Ralign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. 405 Features Stowing and features 406 X Slide the seat backwards. X To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. Infrared reflective windshield The infrared reflecting glass prevents the vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz range. Vehicles without Night View Assist : Areas permeable to radio waves (to the left and right of the rain sensor cover) ; Rain sensor cover = Areas permeable to radio waves Vehicles with Night View Assist : Areas permeable to radio waves (to the left of the rain sensor cover) ; Rain sensor cover = Areas permeable to radio waves In order to operate radio-controlled equipment, e.g. toll recording systems, areas : and = on the windshield are permeable to radio waves. In these areas, you can install radio-controlled systems. These areas can best be seen from outside the vehicle by observing the light reflected off the windshield. 407 408 408 413 414 Maintenance and care Useful information ............................ Engine compartment ........................ Maintenance ...................................... Care .................................................... 408 Engine compartment Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified Maintenance and care specialist workshops (Y page 29). Engine compartment Hood Opening the hood G WARNING Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the hood could be forced open by passing air flow. This could cause the hood to come loose and injure you and/or others. G WARNING Do not open the hood when the engine is overheated. You could be seriously injured. Observe the coolant temperature gauge to determine whether the engine may be overheated. If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, move away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department. G WARNING There is a risk of injury if the hood is open, even if the engine is not running. Some engine components can become very hot. To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those components described in the Operator's Manual and observe the relevant safety notes. G WARNING To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or may even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades. G WARNING The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage, it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system: Rwith the engine running starting the engine Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the engine is turned manually Rwhile X Make sure that the windshield wipers are switched off. G WARNING The windshield wipers and wiper linkage could be set in motion. When the hood is open, you or others could be injured by the wiper linkage. Make sure that the windshield wipers are switched off. Remove the SmartKey or make sure that no ignition position has been selected with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator lamps must be off in the instrument cluster. Engine compartment X Pull release lever : for the hood. The hood is released. ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood. 409 Engine oil Notes on the oil level Depending on the driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qts. (0.8 l) of oil over a distance of 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. On vehicles with a 12-cylinder engine, the oil level can be checked using the on-board computer. On all other models, the dipstick must be used to check the engine oil level. X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood. Once you have lifted the hood about 15 inches (40 cm), it is automatically opened the rest of the way and held open by the gas-filled struts. Closing the hood G WARNING When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone. Make sure the hood is securely engaged before driving off. Do not continue driving if the hood can no longer engage after an accident, for example. The hood could otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in motion and injure you and/or others. X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 inches (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X Park the vehicle on a level surface. To check the oil level with the engine at operating temperature, switch the engine off and wait for approximately five minutes. X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the fuel level has sunk to MIN mark = or below, add 0.55 to 1.1 US qt (0.5 to 1.0 l) engine oil. Z Maintenance and care Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick 410 Engine compartment Maintenance and care Checking the oil level using the onboard computer On vehicles with a 12-cylinder engine, the oil level can be checked using the on-board computer. On all other models, the dipstick must be used to check the engine oil level. X Park the vehicle on a level surface. To check the oil level with the engine at normal operating temperature, switch the engine off and wait for approximately five minutes. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the ; or = button to select the Service menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select Engine Oil Level. X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the following message: Engine Oil Level Measuring Now Measurement correct only if vehicle level. The measurement takes a few seconds. You will see one of the following messages in the multifunction display: REngine Oil Level RAdd 1.0 l Engine Refueling RAdd 1.5 l Engine Refueling RAdd 2.0 l Engine Refueling X Add oil if necessary. OK Oil At Next Oil At Next Oil At Next If the engine is at normal operating temperature and the Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil Level message appears, the engine oil level is too high. X Have excess oil siphoned off. ! Do not add too much oil. Adding too much oil can result in damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. Have excess oil siphoned off. If the For Engine Oil Level Ignition Must be On message appears: X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. If the Need More Time to Check Engine Oil Level message appears: X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: repeat the measurement after about five minutes. If the engine is not at normal operating temperature (e.g. if the engine was only started briefly): repeat the measurement after about 30 minutes. If the Engine Oil Level Not When Engine On message appears: X Switch off the engine. X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: wait about five minutes before carrying out the measurement. If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. i If you wish to cancel the measurement, press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel. Adding engine oil G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot engine parts. H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Use only engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles equipped with a service system. A list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Engine compartment Rusing engine oils and oil filters which have not been specifically approved for the service system. Rreplacing the engine oil or oil filter after the replacement interval required by the service system has elapsed Rusing engine oil additives. ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too much oil has been added. This can lead to damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. Have excess oil siphoned off. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 409) or the on-board computer (Y page 410). Further information on engine oil (Y page 478). Checking and adding other service products Checking the coolant level Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 267) in the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 267). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 158 ‡ (70 †). G WARNING In order to avoid any potentially serious burns: Ruse Example: engine oil cap X Turn cap : counterclockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. Vehicles with oil level measurement function in the on-board computer: observe the information in the on-board computer when doing so. Vehicles with oil dipstick: if the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 0.55 to 1.1 US qt (0.5 to 1.0 l) engine oil. extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature display indicates that the coolant is overheated. Rdo not remove the pressure cap on the coolant reservoir if the coolant temperature is above 158 ‡ (70 †). Allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure. Rusing a rag, slowly turn the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding Z Maintenance and care Specifications for Service Products can be called up by visiting http:// www.mbusa.com (USA only). More information about tested and approved engine oils and oil filters is available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: 411 Engine compartment 412 therefore, only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure. Rdo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. G WARNING Maintenance and care Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned. ! At temperatures below freezing: always fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water and windshield washer concentrate (e.g. MB WinterFit). There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windshield washer system/headlamp cleaning system. X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counterclockwise and allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. ! Only use washer fluid concentrate which is suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable washer fluid concentrate could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. i Add windshield washer concentrate, e.g. MB SummerFit, to the washer fluid all year round. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 479). Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system. i Vehicle components and their service products must match. You should, Example: washer fluid reservoir X Mix the windshield washer fluid in a container beforehand. X At temperatures above freezing: fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water Maintenance Brake fluid level ! If you notice that the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the MIN mark or less, check the brake system immediately for leaks. Also check the thickness of the brake linings. Contact a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the error. Only check the brake fluid level when the vehicle is stationary and on a level surface. Maintenance Service interval display Service messages Information on the type of service and service intervals (see separate Service Booklet). You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). The service interval display informs you of the next service due date. If a service due date has been exceeded, you also hear an acoustic signal. The multifunction display shows a service message for a few seconds, e.g. Next service A due in .. days Service A due Service A overdue by .. days The letter indicates how much time the workshop will require to carry out the service work. The letters displayed range from A for a short service duration to H for a long service duration. The service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X The brake fluid level is correct if it is between MIN marking ; and MAX marking : on the brake fluid reservoir. Subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display after reconnecting the battery. i The service interval display does not provide any information regarding the engine's oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 409). Z Maintenance and care and windshield washer concentrate (e.g. MB SummerFit). X At temperatures below freezing: fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water and windshield washer concentrate (e.g. MB WinterFit). Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature. For information on the mixing ratio (Y page 480). X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. X Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. 413 Care 414 Hiding a service message X Press the % or a button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages X Switch on the ignition. Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press 9 or : to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and press a to confirm. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. Maintenance and care X Please bear the following in mind Resetting service interval display If the qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Center, carried out the maintenance work, the service interval display will be reset. Further information, on maintenance for example, can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz. ! If the service interval display has been reset unintentionally, have the setting corrected at a Mercedes-Benz Center. Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Care Notes on care Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. G WARNING Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle's doors or windows when cleaning the inside. Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle. Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. Rabrasive H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Care Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For this reason, you must drive particularly carefully after washing the vehicle until the brakes have dried. G WARNING The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate the HOLD function and DISTRONIC PLUS before the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. ! It is preferable to use car washes with adjustable21 high-pressure precleaning. In car washes that use high water pressures, there is a risk that a small amount of water may leak into the vehicle. ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. ! In car washes with a towing mechanism, make sure that the automatic transmission is in transmission position N, otherwise the vehicle could be damaged. RVehicles with a SmartKey: Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. You can prevent this by shifting 21 Corresponds the automatic transmission to N beforehand. RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Do not open the driver's door or frontpassenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N: X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 267) in the ignition lock. Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/ Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. ventilation/heating is switched off (the OFF button has been pressed). Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position 0. Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged. Rthe After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield. Washing by hand Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter. to the specification for the Cabriolet program. Z Maintenance and care Exterior care 415 Maintenance and care 416 Care Also, clean the insides of the wheels when washing the underbody of the vehicle. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft car sponge for cleaning. X Use a gentle cleaning agent, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz approved car shampoo. X Wash down the vehicle with a gentle water jet. X Do not point the water jet directly at the air inlets. X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry it thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not allow the cleaning agent to dry on the paintwork. Power washers G WARNING Do not use power washers with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in particular the tires. You could otherwise damage the tires and cause an accident. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtires Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim elements Rventilation slots Relectrical Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Cleaning the wheels ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Cleaning the paintwork Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Care Matte finish care If your vehicle has a clear matte finish, observe the following instructions in order to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect care. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect: RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials. RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. i The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning the windows G WARNING Before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, switch off the windshield wipers and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone out. The windshield wipers could otherwise move and injure you. ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the hood. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. Z Maintenance and care If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by MercedesBenz should be used. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to correct smaller areas of paint damage quickly and provisionally. 417 Care 418 Cleaning the wiper blades Cleaning the sensors G WARNING Before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, switch off the windshield wipers and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have gone out. The windshield wipers could otherwise move and injure you. Maintenance and care ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the hood. ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. X ! When cleaning the sensors with a power washer, maintain a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer of at least 11.8 in (30 cm). Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. X Fold the wiper arms away from the windshield. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wipers back again before switching on the ignition. Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the rear view camera ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. Cleaning the exterior lighting X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses. X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer. Care Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. ! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes with alkaline-based cleaning agents, such as wheel cleaner. X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. G WARNING Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver's attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, stop before trying to remove window fogging or cleaning the window in front of the Night View Assist Plus camera. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Maintenance and care Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes Interior care Cleaning the display X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially-available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth. X Fold down the camera cover by recess :. X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield in front of camera ;. ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: thinner or gasoline cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Ralcohol-based Rabrasive Cleaning Night View Assist Plus ! Never clean the camera lens. When cleaning the field of vision of the driving systems, make sure that you do not spray glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. 419 Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING When cleaning the steering wheel boss and dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning Z Care 420 agents containing solvents cause the surface to become porous, and as a result, plastic parts may break away and be thrown around the interior when an air bag is deployed, which may result in severe injuries. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic. Maintenance and care Rscented ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Cleaning the seat covers ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. Only use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service center. Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean Alcantara® covers with a damp cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Care 421 i Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time. Cleaning the seat belts X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by warming them above 176 ‡ (80 †) or placing them in direct sunlight. Maintenance and care G WARNING Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Cleaning the headliner and carpets X Roof lining: use soft brushes or dry shampoo if it is particularly dirty. X Carpets: use carpet and textile cleaners that have been approved and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Z 422 423 424 424 425 430 433 435 437 Breakdown assistance Useful information ............................ Where will I find...? ........................... Flat tire .............................................. Battery ............................................... Jump-starting .................................... Towing and tow-starting .................. Fuses .................................................. Where will I find...? 424 Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). : Folding wheel chock ; Vehicle tool kit tray cover = Vehicle tool kit Breakdown assistance ? Jack Where will I find...? First-aid kit X Open the trunk lid. X Release strap :. Remove first-aid kit ; from the parcel net. X i Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace missing contents. Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor. X Lift the trunk floor up (Y page 391). "Minispare" emergency spare wheel The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor. X Lift the trunk floor up (Y page 391). X Turn stowage tray = counter-clockwise and remove together with vehicle tool kit tray ;. X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel :. For further information on changing a wheel and mounting the spare wheel, see (Y page 425). Flat tire Preparing the vehicle i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires. X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Engage the electric parking brake manually (Y page 284). X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to P. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics have status 0, which is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 267). X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. Changing a wheel and mounting the spare wheel Preparing the vehicle G WARNING The wheel and tire size of the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel may differ to that of the damaged wheel. When using an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel the handling characteristics of the vehicle may change. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. Never operate the vehicle with more than one emergency spare wheel/spare wheel that differs in size. Only use an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel of a differing size briefly and do not switch off ESP®. When using an emergency spare wheel, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). G WARNING Have the emergency spare wheel/spare wheel replaced with a new wheel as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i Vehicles without a spare wheel/ emergency spare wheel are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit at the factory. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, e.g. wheel chock, lug wrench or alignment bolt, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Z Breakdown assistance Flat tire 425 Flat tire 426 X Prepare the vehicle as described (Y page 425). X Remove the following items (depending on the vehicle's equipment) from the stowage well under the trunk floor: Rthe emergency spare wheel Rthe vehicle tool kit Rthe folding wheel chock Rthe jack X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Securing the vehicle on level ground X Breakdown assistance Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away G WARNING On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on slight inclines/declines. The vehicle could otherwise fall off the jack and injure you or others. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the vehicle tool kit (Y page 424). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X On downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle G WARNING X Fold both plates upwards :. Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack which has been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points built into both sides of the vehicle. The jack saddle must be placed centrally under the jacking point. The jack must always be vertical when in use, especially on inclines or declines. The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for Flat tire and in front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels (arrows). G WARNING The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. The jack saddle must be placed centrally under the jacking point. If you do not position the jack correctly in the jacking point, the vehicle can fall off the jack and seriously or fatally injure you or others. ! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. X X Position jack = at jacking point ;. Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. The jacking points for the jack are located behind the wheel housings of the front wheels Z Breakdown assistance performing maintenance work under the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle. Always firmly engage the parking brake and block the wheels with wheel chocks or other sizable objects before raising the vehicle with the jack. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Make sure that the ground on which the vehicle is standing and where you place the jack is solid, level and not slippery. If necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat. Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack may not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity if it is not at its full height. Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Also observe the notes on the jack. 427 Flat tire 428 Mounting a new wheel G WARNING Breakdown assistance X Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned directly under the jacking point. X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn crank ? until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 inches (3 cm) off the ground. Removing a wheel Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted. Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance. Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts. G WARNING Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose. Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise, the vehicle could fall off the jack. G WARNING Make sure to use the original length wheel bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired. X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. X Remove the wheel. Wheel bolts for: : All alloy wheels ; A "Minispare" emergency spare wheel ! Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Using other wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare" Flat tire indicated (: to A). The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). emergency spare wheel could damage the brake system. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. 429 G WARNING Have the tightening torque checked immediately after a wheel is changed. The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 110 lb/ft (150 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position and store it together with the rest of the tirechange tool kit in the stowage well under the trunk floor. X Slide the emergency spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. Lowering the vehicle X Turn the crank of the jack counterclockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure monitoring system when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. All mounted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors and the defective wheel should no longer be in the vehicle. MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) allow you to continue driving your vehicle even if one or more tires are entirely deflated. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with the activated tire pressure loss warning system or with the activated tire pressure monitoring system. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the load in the vehicle. You can drive 50 miles (80 km) if the vehicle is partially laden and 18 miles (30 km) if it is fully laden. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Z Breakdown assistance i When you are driving with the emergency 430 Battery G WARNING The handling characteristics of your vehicle deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example: Breakdown assistance Rwhen cornering Rwhen braking Rwhen accelerating rapidly Adapt your driving style accordingly and avoid sudden changes in direction and sudden acceleration, as well as driving over obstacles (i.e. curbs, potholes), and driving off-road. This is particularly the case when the vehicle is heavily laden. The maximum permissible distance that can be driven in run-flat mode depends to a large extent on the loads placed on the vehicle. It can be shorter due to high speeds, a heavy load, sudden changes in direction, the road surface condition, outside temperature, etc., or further if you drive carefully and conservatively. Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in run-flat mode, you must have the wheel(s) checked for damage at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rthere i When replacing one or all tires, make sure that you only use tires marked MOExtended and of the specified size for the vehicle. Battery Important safety notes In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop, such as an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adhere to the service intervals indicated in the service booklet or ask a qualified specialist workshop, such as an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Only replace a battery with a battery that has been recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. G WARNING Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Battery Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Return discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or to a special collection point for old batteries. G WARNING Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death. Never lean over batteries while connecting. You might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking etc. G WARNING Do not place any metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit. Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident. Take care that you do not become statically charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you also should not pull or push the battery over carpets or other synthetic materials. Never touch the battery first. First, touch the outside body of the vehicle in order to release any possible electrostatic charges. Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The battery could explode if touched due to electrostatic charge or due to spark formation. ! Before working on the battery, e.g. loosening the battery terminals, switch off the engine and remove the SmartKey from the ignition. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. You may otherwise destroy electronic components, such as the alternator. ! Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, such as an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by MercedesBenz. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for more information. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation. i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. Z Breakdown assistance Wear eye protection. 431 432 Battery Mercedes-Benz recommends that you do not carry out work on batteries yourself, e.g. removing or charging. Always have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Charging the battery Breakdown assistance G WARNING Never charge a battery still installed in the vehicle unless a battery charger unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Charge the battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the battery charger. G WARNING There is a risk of acid burns during the charging process due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery during the charging process. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. ! Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery chargers allow the battery to be charged while still installed. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstarting connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 433). X Open the hood (Y page 408). X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 433). X Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Jump-starting 433 Jump-starting G WARNING ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter22 and create a risk of fire. Do not use a rapid-charging device to start the engine. Make sure the jumper cables are not damaged. Make sure the jumper cables are not touching any other metal objects when they are connected to the battery. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: X The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. X Only jump-start the vehicle when the engine is cold and the catalytic converter system has cooled down23. X Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. X Jump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. X Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. X Make sure that the jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts, such as the pulley or the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running. X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. i Jumper cables and further information about jump-starting can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, for example. X Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X 22 Only 23 Only vehicles with a gasoline engine. vehicles with a gasoline engine. Z Breakdown assistance Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death. Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting. You might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc. Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury. Read all instructions before proceeding. Jump-starting 434 X Breakdown assistance Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Open the hood (Y page 408). Position number A identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. X Remove the cover from positive terminal :. X Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery A using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery A to earth point ? of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery A first. X Start the engine. X Allow the engine to run for a few minutes before disconnecting the jumper cable. X First, remove the jumper cable from earth point ? and negative terminal =, then from positive terminal : and positive terminal ;, each time disconnecting from the battery on your own vehicle first. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center. The jump-starting procedure is not a standard operating state; therefore, have the battery checked. Towing and tow-starting ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. Important safety notes G WARNING If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid towing bar if: Rthe engine is not running. Rthere is a brake system malfunction. Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system. The power assistance for the steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will need more force to steer and brake, you may have to depress the brake pedal with maximum force. Before towing away, make sure that the steering can be moved and is not locked. If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. G WARNING The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be towed. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. Otherwise, the automatic transmission may shift to position P when the driver's or front-passenger door are opened, which could lead to damage to the transmission. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N Rcannot i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the automatic locking feature (Y page 234). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. ! You may only tow the vehicle a maximum distance of 30 miles (50 km). A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 30 miles (50 km), the vehicle must loaded onto a transporter. ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Installing/removing the towing eye Installing the towing eye X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 424). G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be particularly careful when removing the rear cover. The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear, under the covers. Z Breakdown assistance Towing and tow-starting 435 Towing and tow-starting 436 X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 247). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X When leaving the vehicle, take the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground When having your vehicle towed, observe the important safety notes (Y page 435). Breakdown assistance G WARNING X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Take cover : off the opening. Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the stop and tighten it. X Removing the towing eye X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. X Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised Only possible on vehicles without 4MATIC. When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 435). ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. The power assistance for the steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. You will then need much more effort to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in position 0. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 267). X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock. Fuses Tow-starting (emergency starting) The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission As soon as the vehicle is loaded: The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle. ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 433). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. must not be started by tow-starting. This could otherwise damage the transmission. Fuses Important safety notes G WARNING Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz with the specified amperage for the system in question and do not attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. Using other than approved fuses or using repaired or bridged fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire, and/or cause damage to electrical components and/or systems. Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be happy to advise you. i If a fuse has blown, contact a breakdown service or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. Z Breakdown assistance Transporting the vehicle 437 Fuses 438 Before changing a fuse X Park the vehicle and apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Breakdown assistance Rfuse box on the right and left-hand sides of the dashboard Rfuse box in the rear Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel The fuse allocation chart is in the vehicle document wallet. Dashboard fuse box There is a fuse box located on both the driver's side and the front-passenger side. ! Do not use a pointed object such as a X To open: pull cover : outwards in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X To close: clip in cover : on the front of the dashboard. X Fold cover : inwards until it engages. Fuse box in the rear The fuse box is behind the armrest in the rear. X To open: fold down the armrest. Pull handle : on the trim behind the rear seat armrest up in the direction of the arrow. X Fold down trim ;. X screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. X X Driver's side illustrated Loosen cover ? with a suitable object =. Remove cover ? upwards in the direction of the arrow. ! The cover must be seated properly, otherwise moisture or dirt could impair the function of the fuses. Fuses 439 Fuse box in the engine compartment Fuse box on the left in the direction of travel X Open the hood (Y page 408). X Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X AMG vehicles: remove the control unit above the fuse box. X To open: undo screws : with an Allen key. X Remove bracket =. X Remove cover ;. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X To open: open clamps ;. X Remove cover ; upwards. X To close: check whether the rubber seal is lying correctly in cover ;. X Put cover ; back in position. X Fold down cover : and close clamps ;. ! The cover must be seated properly, otherwise moisture or dirt could impair the function of the fuses. X Close the hood (Y page 409). X To close: check whether the rubber seal is lying correctly in cover ;. X Put cover ; back in position. X Replace bracket =. X Tighten screws : using an Allen key. ! The cover must be seated properly, otherwise moisture or dirt could impair the function of the fuses. X Close the hood (Y page 409). Engine emergency off If the engine cannot be switched off as described, observe the following procedure: X Take the fuse allocation chart out of the vehicle document wallet. X Search for “Emergency engine shutdown” in the fuse allocation chart. X Remove the fuses listed under "Emergency engine shutdown". Fuse box on the right in the direction of travel X Open the hood (Y page 408). Z Breakdown assistance X 440 441 442 442 442 444 445 452 456 457 458 462 465 466 Wheels and tires Useful information ............................ Important safety notes .................... Operation ........................................... Winter operation ............................... Tire pressure ..................................... Loading the vehicle .......................... Maximum load rating ....................... Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards .......................................... Tire labeling ....................................... Definition of terms for tires and loading ............................................... Changing a wheel ............................. Wheel and tire combinations ........... 442 Operation Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). Wheels and tires Important safety notes Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you require information on approved and recommended tires and wheels for summer and winter operation. Advice on purchasing and caring for tires is also available there. G WARNING Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. For further information contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged. Also, the operating clearance of the wheels and the tires may no longer be correct. G WARNING Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. When replacing rims, only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident. Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are used. G WARNING If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs. G WARNING Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You might lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire. i Further information about Tires and wheels can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Operation Notes on driving RIf the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire pressures and correct them if necessary. parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, can get damaged. RWhen Operation G WARNING Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. RRegularly check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctures, tears, bulges on tires and deformation or cracks or severe corrosion on wheels) at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. RRegularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 443). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve (such as tire pressure monitoring systems) other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. RRegularly check the pressure of all the tires including the emergency spare wheel or the spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 445). Tire tread G WARNING Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the tread wear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely. Do not use tires that are excessively worn as the tire traction on wet road surfaces decreases significantly when the tread depth is less than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They become visible as soon as a tread depth of approximately 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. The recommended tread depth for summer tires is at least 1/8 inch (3 mm). The recommended tread depth for winter tires is at least 1/6 inch (4 mm). Bar marking : for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Notes on selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RAfter mounting new tires, run them in at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles Z Wheels and tires Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires 443 444 Winter operation (100 km) as they only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not use tires that are excessively worn as the tire traction on wet road surfaces decreases significantly when the tread depth is less than 1/8 inch (3 mm). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel. The service life of tires depends on the following factors amongst other things: Rdriving style Rtire pressure Rmileage Wheels and tires MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) allow you to continue driving your vehicle even if one or more tires are entirely deflated. MOExtended tires may be used only in conjunction with the activated tire pressure loss warning system or the activated tire pressure monitoring system and only on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. You will find notes on driving with MOExtended tires in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 429). Winter operation Please bear the following in mind At the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 465). Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), the elasticity of summer tires and therefore also traction and braking capability are reduced considerably — equip your vehicle with M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. M+S tires At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter, as these tires have been designed specifically for driving on snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. G WARNING M+S tires with a tread depth of less than 1/6 inch (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. They are no longer suitable for use in winter. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. Once you have mounted the winter tires: X X Check the tire pressures (Y page 449). Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 449). G WARNING If you use your spare wheel when M+S tires are mounted on the other wheels, be aware that the difference in tire characteristics Tire pressure impairs cornering ability and reduces driving stability. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Have the spare wheel replaced by a normal wheel with an M+S tire at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center. 445 ! If snow chains are mounted on the front wheels, the snow chains could grind against the bodywork or components of the chassis. This could result in damage to the vehicle or the tires. ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish Snow chains For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains which have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. ! You must drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been mounted. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. to mount snow chains on steel wheels, make sure that you remove the respective wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may otherwise be damaged. i You may wish to deactivate ESP®(Y page 64) when pulling away with snow chains mounted. This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). ! There is not enough space for snow ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you are no longer driving on snow-covered roads. RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Applicable regulations must be observed if you wish to mount snow chains. RSnow chains must not be mounted on emergency spare wheels. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Ryou may not attach snow chains to all wheel-tire combinations; see the information under "Wheel and tire combinations" in the "Wheels and tires" section. Rmount snow chains only in pairs and only to the rear wheels. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. Tire pressure Tire pressure specifications G WARNING Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Z Wheels and tires chains on some wheel sizes. Observe the information under "Tires and wheels" in the "Technical Data" section to avoid damage to the vehicle or the wheels. 446 Tire pressure Option 1) Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 452). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. i The specifications given on the following Wheels and tires Tire and Loading Information placard are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressures applicable to your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on your vehicle. Example: tire pressure table for all tires approved ex-works for this vehicle If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for that tire size. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ. : Recommended tire pressures Option 2) Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. i Specifications shown in the examples of tire pressure tables are for illustration purposes only. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. Tire pressure specifications applicable to your vehicle are located in your vehicle's tire pressure table. Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 459). Tire pressure 447 Important notes on tire pressure G WARNING Should the tire pressure drop repeatedly: Rcheck the tire for foreign bodies. Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. sure that only a valve cap approved by Mercedes-Benz is used on the tire valve. Tire pressures that are too low have a negative effect on vehicle safety, which could lead you to cause an accident. If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Option 3) The tire pressure for the emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment) can be found: To test tire pressure, use a suitable tire pressure gauge. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitoring system, the tire pressure can be checked using the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rprinted Rif Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds. i The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. in yellow on the rim of the emergency/collapsible spare wheel Rin the "Wheel and tire combinations" section (Y page 466) in this manual Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 † ), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ 1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires and only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Z Wheels and tires Rmake 448 Tire pressure Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side, the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap, Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment). Rin Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflated tires G WARNING Wheels and tires Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Radversely Rincrease affect ride comfort stopping distance Maximum tire pressure G WARNING Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Underinflated tires can: Rwear excessively and/or unevenly affect fuel economy Rfail from being overheated Radversely affect handling Radversely Overinflated tires G WARNING Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Overinflated tires can: Radversely affect handling excessively and/or unevenly Rbe more likely to become damaged Rwear : Maximum permitted tire pressure (example) i The actual values for tires are specific to each vehicle and may deviate from the values in the illustration. When adjusting the tire pressures always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle (Y page 445). Tire pressure Important safety notes G WARNING Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. Check the tire pressure at least once a month. Only check and correct tire pressures when the tires are cold (Y page 445). Checking tire pressure manually To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it with the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle. X If necessary, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value (Y page 445). X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by pressing down the metal pin in the valve using the tip of a pen, for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. Tire pressure monitor Important safety notes If a tire pressure monitor system is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you when the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the correct wheel electronics units are installed on all wheels. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA) or pressure loss (Canada). Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. RUSA only: if the warning lamp flashes for 60 seconds and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once a month when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. Z Wheels and tires Checking the tire pressures 449 Wheels and tires 450 Tire pressure As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. USA only: Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. i USA only: If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, it may take more than 10 minutes for the tire pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction by flashing for 60 seconds and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after driving for a few minutes. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display. i The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. i The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with the RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Tire pressure Checking tire pressure electronically X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 (Y page 267) in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. X Press the a button. The current tire pressure for each wheel will be displayed in the multifunction display. If the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes, the Tire Pressures Displayed After Driving A Few Minutes message appears in the display. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure monitor automatically recognizes new wheels or new sensors. If a clear allocation of the tire pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored. i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare tire is mounted is not the same as the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel's current tire pressure. Tire pressure monitor warning messages If the tire pressure monitor detects a significant pressure loss on one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds and the tire pressure warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Each tire that is affected by a significant loss of pressure is highlighted with a color. If the Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display: X Check the tire pressure on all four wheels and correct it if necessary. i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are interchanged, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Restarting the tire pressure monitor G WARNING It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure. Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You might lose control over the vehicle. When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. The tire pressure monitor must be restarted when you set the tire pressure to a new value (as a result of changed drive or load characteristics, for example). The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. i Canada only: in most cases, the tire pressure monitor recognizes the new reference values automatically. However, Z Wheels and tires 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 451 Loading the vehicle 452 Wheels and tires you can also define reference values manually as described here. Restart the tire pressure monitor after you have set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the desired driving situation (Y page 445). Only correct tire pressures on cold tires. Comply with the recommended tire pressures on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Additional tire pressure values for driving at high speeds or with heavy loads can be found in the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap. X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure of the individual tires or the Tire Pressures Displayed After Driving A Few Minutes message. X Press the : button. The Use Current Pressures As New Reference Values message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. Loading the vehicle 453 Number of seats i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. : B-pillar, driver's side Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Maximum number of seats : determines the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Determining the correct load limit Step-by-step instructions X The Tire and Loading Information placard gives you details on maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating :: "The gross weight of occupants and luggage must never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX pounds." The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the specified value. The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. Z Wheels and tires i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading the vehicle 454 X Wheels and tires Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (Y page 456). Loading the vehicle 455 Example: step 1 to 3 Step 1 Step 2 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 3 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Rear: 2 Front: 1 Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Gross weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Z Wheels and tires The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 453). 456 Maximum load rating Step 3 Permissible cargo and trailer load/ noseweight (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) = 960 lbs (435 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg) The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage. Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 456). Wheels and tires Vehicle identification plate Even if you have calculated the total load carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 452). Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross axle weight rating: the maximum permissible load that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. Trailer load/noseweight The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the trailer load/noseweight is included in the load along with occupants and luggage. The trailer load/noseweight is usually approximately 10% of the gross weight of the trailer and its load. Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their luggage. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Maximum load rating G WARNING Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 457 North America have these grades branded on the sidewall. i The actual values for tires are vehiclespecific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Where applicable, the tire grading information can be found on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum tire width. For example: i The actual values for tires are specific to each vehicle and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Maximum tire load : is the maximum permitted weight for which the tire is approved. Further information on tire loads (Y page 458). Tread wear Traction Temperature 200 A AA All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades. Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S. Government requirement. Their purpose is to provide drivers with consistent and reliable information regarding tire performance. Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires using three performance factors: tread wear :, tire traction ;, and temperature resistance =. Although not a Government of Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm, due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions. Traction G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent Z Wheels and tires Tread wear Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 458 Tire labeling the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. G WARNING Wheels and tires If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such weather conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme caution. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tire tread depth of 1/6 in (4 mm) for all four winter tires (Y page 444) to maintain normal driving characteristics in winter. Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow covered surfaces in comparison to summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with ice or snow. Take appropriate care when driving. controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Tire labeling Tire labeling overview The following markings are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name: ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. Temperature G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. These represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under : Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard (Y page 463) ; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 461) = Maximum tire load (Y page 456) ? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 448) A Manufacturer B Tire material (Y page 462) C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (Y page 459) D Load index (Y page 461) E Tire name i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating : Tire width ; Nominal aspect ratio in % = Tire code ? Rim diameter A Load bearing index B Speed rating i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: these are compact emergency spare wheels at high tire pressure, to be used only temporarily in an emergency. Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Nominal aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and the tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires. "D" represents diagonal tires, "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph(240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load bearing index: load bearing index A is a numerical code which specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. G WARNING The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise, sudden tire failure may be the result which could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you or others. Always replace rims and tires with rims and tires having the same specifications (designation, manufacturer and type) as shown on the original part. G WARNING Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. Z 459 Wheels and tires Tire labeling 460 Tire labeling Example: The load bearing index 91 is equivalent to a maximum load of 1356 lbs (615 kg) that the tire can carry. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and pounds, see (Y page 456). For further information on the load bearing index, see Load index (Y page 461). Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. G WARNING Wheels and tires Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. Regardless of the speed rating always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q Up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R Up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S Up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T Up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H Up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V Up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W Up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y Up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...Y Up to 186 mph (300 km/h) Summer tires Index Speed rating ZR...(..Y) Above 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR Above 149 mph (240 km/h) ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). The service specifications consist of load bearing index A and speed rating B. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating and the maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). REvery tire that has a maximum speed above 186 mph (300 km/h) must have "ZR" in the size description and the service specification must be given in brackets. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speed rating "(Y)" shows that the maximum speed of the tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer to find out the maximum speed. All-weather tires and winter tires Index Q M+S24 Up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S24 M+Si for winter tires. Up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S24 Up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S24 24 Or Speed rating Up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Tire labeling identification offer the driving characteristics of winter tires. Winter tires have, in addition to the M+S identification, the i snow flake symbol on the tire sidewall. Tires with this identification fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow and have been especially developed for driving on snow. Load index An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding the following speeds: i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may R130 In addition to the load bearing index, load index : may be imprinted after the letters that identify speed index B (Y page 459) on the sidewall of the tire. RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure mph (210 km/h): - All vehicles (except AMG vehicles) R155 mph (250 km/h): - CL 63 AMG - CL 65 AMG R186 mph (300 km/h): - CL 63 AMG (Performance Package) - CL 63 AMG with increased top speed - CL 65 AMG with increased top speed The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating as specified in the "Tires" section (Y page 466), e.g. if you buy new tires. Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. deviate from the data in the example. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every manufacturer of new tires or retreader has to imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. Z Wheels and tires i Not all tires that have the M+S 461 462 Definition of terms for tires and loading The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tire manufacturers to inform purchasers of recalls and other safetyrelevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. Tire characteristics i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may Wheels and tires deviate from the data in the example. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information about retreaded tires (Y page 442). Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. This information describes the tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under the tread ;. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. There are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the United States Department of Transportation. Definition of terms for tires and loading The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using U.S. government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment This is the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the total load limit and the weight of the optional equipment installed at the factory. Z Wheels and tires Normal occupant weight 463 464 Definition of terms for tires and loading Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa is the equivalent of 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. Load index In addition to the load bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load bearing capacity more precisely. Wheels and tires Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the airconditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum load rating The maximum load rating in kilograms or pounds is the maximum weight for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Tire pressure of cold tires The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Bead The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead. Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard part and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs). Changing a wheel TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Total load limit Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity. Changing a wheel Flat tire The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 425) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. It also provides instructions on changing a wheel or mounting the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel. Interchanging the wheels G WARNING Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension. If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible. G WARNING Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle's rims. The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, the tires should then be replaced every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if the tire wear requires this. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tire pressures. Information on changing a wheel and mounting the spare wheel (Y page 425). Z Wheels and tires These optional extras, such as highperformance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and accessory weight. 465 466 Wheel and tire combinations ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Always have the tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Further information about tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RMO1 Wheels and tires Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is maintained. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. You may mount a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limit specified on the spare wheel/ emergency spare wheel. Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. Cleaning the wheels G WARNING Do not use power washers with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in particular the tires. You could otherwise damage the tires and cause an accident. Wheel and tire combinations Please bear the following in mind ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use Tires and i The Tire and Load Information placard with the recommended tire pressures is attached to the B-pillar on the driver's side. Further information about driving at high speeds or driving with vehicle loads that are lighter than the maximum vehicle load can be found in the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. Wheel and tire combinations For further information on the recommended tire inflation pressure and on tire pressures for specific driving conditions, see (Y page 445). 467 i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available from the factory for all countries. i Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle: Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left/right) Rwith the same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) i On the following pages, you can find Wheels and tires information on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available ex factory as standard equipment or optional extras. If you want to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, it may be necessary to obtain wheel rims in the corresponding size, as the size of the approved winter tires may differ from the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory. The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i Overview of abbreviations used in the following tire tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle RFA: In the following table, the wheel/tire combinations are allocated to the vehicle models through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.: V1 CL 550 4MATIC25 V2 CL 600 V3 CL 63 AMG V4 CL 65 AMG 25 BlueEFFICIENCY Z 468 Wheel and tire combinations Wheels and tires Tires Summer tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 255/45 R18 99 Y MOExtended26 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) # # — — FA 255/45 R18 99 Y MOExtended26 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) — # — — RA 275/45 R18 103 Y MOExtended26, 27 9.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) BA 255/40 R19 100 Y XL 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) # # — — FA 255/40 R19 100 Y XL — # — — RA 275/40 R19 101 Y27 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) FA 255/40 ZR 19 XL — — # # RA 275/40 ZR 19 XL27 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) BA 255/35 ZR 20 XL27 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) # # — — FA 255/35 ZR 20 XL — # # # RA 275/35 ZR 20 XL27 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 255/45 R18 99 H M+S 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) # # — — FA 255/45 R18 99 H M+S — # — — RA 275/45 R18 103 H M+S27 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) 9.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) 26 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure monitor. of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 27 Use All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 255/40 R19 100 V XL M+S 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) # # — — FA 255/40 R19 100 V XL M+S — # — — RA 275/40 R19 101 V M+S27 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) Winter tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 BA 255/45 R18 99 V M+Si 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) # # — — BA 255/40 R19 100 V XL M+Si 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) # # # # FA 255/40 R19 100 V XL M+Si 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) — — # # RA 275/40 R19 105 V XL M+Si27 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) "Minispare" emergency spare wheel27 Tires Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4 T 155/70 R19 113 M Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/ 61 psi) 4.5 B x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.38 in (35 mm) # # # # i The specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency/collapsible spare wheel. 27 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. Z 469 Wheels and tires Wheel and tire combinations 470 471 472 472 472 473 473 475 480 Technical data Useful information ............................ Notes on technical data ................... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Warranty ............................................ Identification plates ......................... Service products and capacities ..... Vehicle data ...................................... 472 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safetyrelated systems and functions. i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 29). G WARNING Driving safety may be impaired if nonapproved parts, tires and wheels or safetyrelevant accessories are used. This could lead to malfunctions in safetyrelevant systems, e.g. the brake system. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Notes on technical data i The data stated here specifically refers to Technical data a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts All Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide for quick and reliable parts service. There are more than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts available for Mercedes-Benz models. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and fine-tuned for them. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used. Devices, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rdashboard Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. Rdoor H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (Y page 473) and the engine Identification plates number (Y page 474) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. Warranty 473 Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) and paint code number The Service and Warranty Information booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your vehicle. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties: RNew i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you. X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) ; VIN = Paint code Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) ; VIN = Paint code Z Technical data Vehicle Limited Warranty System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws) Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. You can obtain information about this from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. REmission Identification plates 474 i The data shown on the identification plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate. Vehicle identification number (VIN) The vehicle identification number (VIN) can be found in the following locations: the vehicle identification plate (Y page 473) Rat the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 474) In addition to being stamped on the vehicle identification plate, the vehicle identification number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle body. It is under the trim behind the rear seat armrest. Technical data Ron X X Fold down the rear seat armrest. Open the trim. You will see vehicle identification number (VIN) :. (AMG vehicles) : Emission control information plate, including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards ; Engine number (stamped into the crankcase) = VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) : Engine number (stamped into the crankcase) ; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) = Emission control information plate, Engine number including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards Service products and capacities 475 Service products and capacities Important safety notes Service products include the following: Rfuels Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindshield washer fluid Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http:// www.mbusa.com (USA only). G WARNING Technical data Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing and disposing of service fluids. Otherwise, you could endanger persons or the environment. Keep service fluids out of the reach of children. For health reasons, you should prevent service fluids from coming into direct contact with your skin or clothing. If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. Z 476 Service products and capacities Capacities Engine oil and filter Cooling system Model Capacity Fuel, coolant, lubricants, etc. CL 550 4MATIC28 CL 63 AMG 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) Approved engine oils CL 600 CL 65 AMG 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) CL 550 4MATIC28 Approximately 14.5 US qt MB 325.0 or (13.7 l) MB 326.0 anticorrosion/ Approximately 15.3 US qt antifreeze (14.5 l) CL 600 Technical data Tank capacity Reserve Windshield/ headlamp cleaning system CL 63 AMG Approximately 12.2 US qt (11.5 l) CL 65 AMG Approximately 14.7 US qt (13.9 l) CL 550 4MATIC28 21.9 US gal (83.0 l) CL 600 CL 63 AMG CL 65 AMG 23.8 US gal (90.0 l) All models except AMG vehicles 2.9 US gal (11.0 l) AMG vehicles 3.7 US gal (14.0 l) All models 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) 28 BlueEFFICIENCY 29 Mixed with water or premixed washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Premium-grade unleaded gasoline (at least 91 octane, average value between 96 RON/ 86 MON) MB windshield washer concentrate29 (Y page 480) Mixing ratio for washer fluid (Y page 480) Service products and capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury. Never allow sparks, flames or smoking materials near gasoline. Turn off the engine before refueling. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing contact. Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to your health. Premium-grade unleaded gasoline ! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premiumgrade unleaded gasoline may be used. If there is no premium-grade unleaded gasoline available and regular-grade unleaded gasoline may be used; please observe the following precautions: Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular-grade unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. Rdo not drive at the maximum speed. Ravoid sudden acceleration. Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g. two passengers without luggage, do not allow the engine to rev above 3,000 rpm. Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is being operated in mountainous terrain, do not depress the accelerator pedal further than Ô of the pedal travel. Fuel requirements Use only premium-grade unleaded gasoline. The octane number should be at least 91. Details can be found on the gas pump. The octane number is the average value of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON): (RON + MON) / 2, also known as knock resistance. Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline with additives can be used if the concentration of the additives in the fuel does not exceed 10%, e.g.: REthanol RTAME RETBE RIPA RTBA For MTBE, the concentration should not exceed 15%. The concentration of methanol in gasoline including other additives must not exceed 3%. Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not permitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used. All of these mix fuels must fulfill the fuel requirements, e.g.: Rknock resistance point Rvapor pressure Rboiling Additives in gasoline One of the main problems of poor fuel quality is the forming of deposits that are caused during the gasoline combustion process. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have the additives. If you use fuels without these additives for an extended period of time, there may be a buildup of carbon deposits, especially on the inlet valves and in the combustion chamber. This could lead to engine problems, e.g.: Rlonger engine warm-up phase idle Rengine noise Rmisfiring Rloss of power Runeven Z Technical data Fuel 477 478 Service products and capacities Carbon deposits may form if the availability of gasoline with relevant additives is insufficient (in certain regions). In this case, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of additives that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or go to the Internet site http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a list of approved products. Observe the instructions for use on the product label. Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This causes unnecessary costs and could damage the engine. ! Do not refuel with low-grade fuel and do not use fuel additives that are not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Damage to or malfunctions of the fuel system may otherwise occur. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Model Engine model MB Approval CL 550 4MATIC30 278 229.5 CL 600 275 CL 63 AMG 157 CL 65 AMG 275 i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers. ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. Please bear the following in mind The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or go to the Internet site http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. This could damage the engine. Engine oil viscosity Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin. Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity) classification suitable for the prevailing outside temperatures. The following table shows the correct SAE classification to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly recommended that you carry out regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. 30 BlueEFFICIENCY 31 Restriction: 229.531 Additives Engine oil Technical data Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment. only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used. Service products and capacities 479 Coolant Important safety notes The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Rcorrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with coolant that contains an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor that ensures protection down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). Rantifreeze The air-conditioning system is filled with R134a refrigerant and a special PAG lubricant. ! Never use refrigerant R 12 (CFC) or mineral lubricants. Otherwise, you could damage the air-conditioning system. Brake fluid G WARNING Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling point. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This would impair braking efficiency. You should have the brake fluid renewed at regular intervals. The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz. Information about approved brake fluids can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. Further information on coolants and on filling can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Approval 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can also consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant under operating conditions is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). Your vehicle has a range of aluminum components. Aluminum components in the engine make it necessary to use antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor coolant that has been specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. Using other antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitors without these characteristics affects the service life. The coolant must be used throughout the year in order to maintain the necessary corrosion Z Technical data Refrigerant of the air-conditioning system 480 Vehicle data protection and to provide protection from overheating. In the Service Booklet, you can find information on the intervals for renewal. The renewal interval is determined by the coolant type and the engine cooling system design. The renewal interval in the Service Booklet is only valid if the coolant is renewed or filled up with Mercedes-Benz approved products. Therefore, only use MB 325.0 or 326.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze or another Mercedes-Benz approved product of the same specification. Information on other products with the same specifications that are approved by Mercedes-Benz can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The coolant is checked at every maintenance interval at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Technical data Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 † ). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection to -49 ‡ [-45 † ]); otherwise, heat will not dissipate as effectively. If the coolant level is too low, MB 325.0 or 326.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should be added. Have the engine cooling system checked for possible leaks. Windshield/headlamp cleaning system G WARNING Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned. Use MB SummerFit windshield washer concentrate at temperatures above freezing: X Mix 1 part MB SummerFit with 100 parts water. Use MB WinterFit windshield washer concentrate at temperatures below freezing: X At temperatures down to 14 ‡(Ò 10 †): mix 1 part MB WinterFit with 2 parts water. X At temperatures down to Ò 4 ‡(Ò 20 †): mix 1 part MB WinterFit with 1 part water. X At temperatures down to Ò 20.2 ‡(Ò 29 †): mix 2 parts MB WinterFit with 1 part water. ! Only SummerFit and WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the jets could become blocked. Vehicle data For the specified vehicle data, please note that: RThe - heights specified may vary due to: tires load condition of the suspension optional equipment All models Vehicle length 200.8 in (5099 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 83.9 in (2130 mm) Vehicle height 55.9 in (1419 mm) Wheelbase 116.3 in (2955 mm) Front track 63.0 in (1601 mm) Rear track 63.3 in (1607 mm) Turning circle 38.2 ft (11.63 m) Maximum trunk load Maximum 220 lb (100 kg) Vehicle data 481 CL 63 AMG Vehicle length 201.0 in (5106 mm) Vehicle height 56.1 in (1425 mm) Turning circle 38.1 ft (11.60 m) Vehicle length 201.0 in (5106 mm) Vehicle height 56.2 in (1428 mm) Turning circle 38.1 ft (11.60 m) Technical data CL 65 AMG Z 482 483 484 Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Editorial office Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Daimler AG. As at 16.02.2011 É21658409822ËÍ 2165840982 Order no. 6515 2367 13 Part no. 216 584 09 82 Edition A 2012